Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal GOT1000 Series

Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal GOT1000 Series
Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal
GOT1000 Series
Tailored solutions to meet your HMI and
visualization needs
Compatible with
Windows® 7
Have you ever needed an HMI to
do more than provide pretty panel
meters? The GOT1000 does more
than just visualization, it provides
solutions for both the everyday,
and not so everyday problem.
GOT Solutions
CASE STUDY 1
Robots
Inverters
Motion Controllers and
Servos Amplifiers
CNCs
Automation Platforms and
Programmable Controllers
Vision
Systems
The GOT1000 delivers
the competitive advantage:
The speed of your business and the speed of your machine
hinges on many forces outside of your control.
The GOT1000 brings them back under control with speed,
performance and industry leading functions that are tailored
for visualization - real life solutions for your real time process.
Whether your focus is centered on uptime, productivity or
serviceability there is a GOT solution that fits your machine,
factory and enterprise level requirements.
GOTs evolve
the face of control.
Solutions for your FA Device:
Innovative solutions for
improving uptime, work efficiency
and productivity using the
GOT1000 and your FA equipment.
FA Solutions
CASE STUDY 2
CASE STUDY 1
GOT Solutions
1
3
CASE
Facility uptime is increased by reducing unexpected errors
on the floor.
Before
GOT Solution
Alarm light is on
Before
One-Touch Ladder Jump function
Error
When an error is detected, touch
switch operations can search for
and display the cause of the problem.
ST1
(Normal)
No need to
go back to my desk to
get my PC or check
ladder programs!
ST2
(Error)
GOT Solution
It may take several workers to debug
programs and operate equipment at the
same time if the operation and control
panels are on different floors.
2F
It's difficult to
perform
debugging
without watching
the machine in
operation.
Control panel
Electrical
Room
Error indicator
light: Y10
Error detected
Touch panel
operation is enabled
even when a PC is
connected.
Both the GOT and PLC
can be debugged in one
single, efficient
operation!
FA Transparent function
Use GOT to connect the PLC and PC.
You can check the equipment and debug programs at
the same time.
Control panel
2F
Electrical
Room
M10
Y20
FA Solutions
The one touch function reduces equipment downtime by
quickly checking equipment operation, machine status and
logic with a single button.
<Error occurred in ST2 device!>
Error!
Downtime is shorten when debugging can be
performed locally or over decentralized systems.
GOT Solutions
CASE
Quick response to problems. Easy facility design with the GOT1000 series.
Comprehensive
solutions to production site problems.
M20
Search
M30
M40
Y30
What's wrong
with it?
Touch the switch to
find how Y10 is set
Touch
When errors occur, touch the Search switch
to automatically start up the Ladder Monitor
Screen.
<Display ladder blocks including Y10>
ST1 error
M10
How do I
deal with the
problem?
What is
the cause?
ST2 error
M20
Y10
Error indicator
light: ON
Touch normally open
contact (M20) in on state.
(Coil search function)
1F
<Display ladder blocks including M20>
Pusher LS error
M31
Air pressure error
M32
M20
Oil pressure error
M33
1F
GOT Solution
M20
Y20
M20
Repair is made
easy and quick
without a PC!
It takes only a few touches to make minor ladder
program corrections. It is easy and fast.
M40
Operation panel
Operation panel
4
Before
Ladder Editor function
The device
number
is wrong.
M10
Production efficiency is maintained when the GOT is used to
manage product changeovers and maintenance recovery plans.
GOT Solution
Backup/Restoration function
Warehouse
Check it with the ladder monitor function.
Sensor
X10
Operation
lamp
Y30
CASE
Part not being
read by sensor
Operation
lamp
Stop
I'm not sure
how the program
is changed and
if it's operating
correctly.
Error is detected
because oil pressure
(M33) is on.
2
Before
Start
M30
Equipment availability is greatly improved
when GOTs are used to quickly edit PLC programs.
Sensor
malfunction!?
Start
Operation screen
Stop
Operation screen
Equipment
Floor
ST2
error
Touch
CASE
Equipment
Floor
PLC debugging can be
performed from a PC
connected to the GOT!
Sensor
X10
M20
No need for a PC on the production floor - simply use
the GOT to manage (Read/Write) and store PLC programs.
I need to go to
the warehouse
to get another
PLC!
I also need
to go to the
office to get
a PC.
Office
Q25HCPU
MODE
RUN
ERR
USER
BAT
BOOT
USB
PULL
Circuit input
Change CPU
Q25HCPU
QX10
QX41
QX41
QJ71BR11
Speedy
restoration!
No need for a PC
or locating
the program.
QJ71BR11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
X20
Correct
Need to
fix it now.
Restore
Change the device number from
X10 to X20.
I need
a PC...
PLC failed!
Sensor
X20
M20
POWER
Q61P-A1
Q61P-A1
Q25HCPU
Q25HCPU
MODE
POWER
RUN MODE
ERR
RUN
USER
ERR
BAT USER
BOOT
BAT
BOOT
PULL
PULL
USB
USB
PULL
PULL
4
QX10
QX41
QX10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
QX41
QX41
QX41
QJ71BR11
QJ71BR11
RUN QJ71BR11
MNG
RUN QJ71BR11
MNG
T.PASS
D.LINK T.PASS
D.LINK
RUN RD
MNG SD
RUN RD
MNG
SD
D.LINK
D.LINK
ERR T.PASS ERR
ERR T.PASS ERR
SD
RD
SD
RD
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
It is OK,
because the latest
program was
stored in the GOT.
No battery!
5
CASE STUDY 1
GOT Solutions
5
CASE
Operator efficiency is improved when manuals and work
instructions can be accessed directly from the display.
Before
GOT Solution
Alarm light is on
Error
B110
Before
Document Display function/
Video Manual Playback
Work
instructions are
easy to access and
written in a language
that I can
understand.
You can save necessary documents such as manuals
on the GOT.
With the
Document
Error!
Display function,
it's
easy to read the
Alarm display screen
manual by changing
01/11/2007 10:00 Error B110
Directly assign
01/10/2007 10:10 Error B112
and scrolling
01/10/2007 9:55 Error B110
documents and
image files to
Manual
through pages.
touch switches.
What is
error B110?
Where is the
manual?
Call the
maintenance
representative?
Torque 2
Save operator information on a CF card along with
operation records. You can find sources of trouble quickly.
GOT Solution
100
It is found that Jon Smith entered
erroneous data.
100
 Checking the production data and
timesheet information to indentify the
operator takes time.
The operation
log including
the operator
information is
shown for
analysis.
History check screen
Product A
Product B
Product C
Display
alarm data
Display
operation log
I don't
remember.
We can determine
the cause of the
error and this will
be helpful in
improving operations
and preventing
a recurrence
in the future.
8
Reduce installation costs by using flexible mounting
options.
Before
Multimedia function
Hardware switches and lamps may
require large areas of boards.
Check the recorded view of the production line.
You can find problem causes quickly.
GOT Solution
GT10 models (GT1020/GT1030)
For simple and small applications,
GOT1000 compact types are just right.
Alarm display screen
Compact and
easy-to-use,
with simple wiring
that reduces
assembly time.
01/11/2007 10:00 Error B110
01/10/2007 10:10 Error B112
01/10/2007 9:55 Error B110
I can use
the GOT to capture
the cause of
this problem.
Video
search
Attach a video camera on GOT.
The view of the production line
is recorded before and after the
occurrence of a problem.
Play it on the GOT.
Play the video from the alarm display
screen.
High-resolution pictures are recorded
and played in VGA resolution!
<120-second long video images are recorded before
and after the occurrence of a problem.>
That machine
failed again...
How can I locate the
cause of the problem in
this unmanned, fully
automated line?
120
seconds
before
120
seconds
after
Rearranging them and reconnecting
cables may be inconvenient when
specifications are changed.
Its operation is intuitive. Three backlight
colors indicate different equipment statuses.
Trouble
Both horizontal and vertical mounting
available to meet the needs of
different applications.
6
You don't have
to panic.
The GOT will
find the cause.
100
What is the
cause of the
defective
product?
CASE
Production quality can be increased when using the GOT
to capture and play back real time videos and images.
Machine fails,
forcing the
line to stop!
Product A
Screw tightening torque
Torque 1
<Video manual playback>
6
Before
Operator Authentication function
+ Operation Log function
Production
failure!
Who was
working at
that time?
What was being
operated
and how?
<Document display>
CASE
GOT Solution
 The operator's memory about the operation
is too vague to identify the problem cause.
The manual
describes how
to deal with the
error displayed.
How do I
deal with the
problem?
Minimize production mistakes by using the GOT to
manage authorization and security levels.
FA Solutions
Error!
7
GOT Solutions
CASE
green orange
red
3-color display model
( white
pink
red
3-color model is also available)
7
CASE STUDY 2
FA Solutions
Obstacles are often encountered when using many different types of FA devices.
The following problems can be resolved by linking with GOT1000.
Enhancing sequence control.
Can PLC programs be monitored with the GOT?
Ladder monitor function and
ladder editor function
For details,
see P.44 P.45
Can simple changes to
ladder programs be made
without a personal computer?
Can the root cause be
easily identified?
General-purpose PLC
LINK1
One-touch ladder jump function
(Q/L/QnA series ladder monitor and ladder editor function)
Can the program be debugged
without opening the cabinet?
For details,
see P.44
By setting a program name and coil number of the PLC to a touch
switch, the relevant ladder circuit block can be displayed directly.
Troubles can be handled smoothly from the alarm screen.
Powerful functionality that is useful during startup and the tuning process!
Display the ladder block of
the coil set to the touch switch
Can the PLC status or
errors be checked quickly?
The Q series (Q mode) SFC programs (MELSAP3, MELSAP-L) can be
monitored in a SFC diagram format.
FA transparent function
Connected with a personal computer, the
GOT acts as a transparent gateway to
enable programming, start up, and
adjustment of equipment using GX Works2
or GX LogViewer. Users do not have to
bother with opening the cabinet or changing
cable connections. (On the GT10 series,
the FA transparent function can be used via
the interface on the rear side.)
System monitor function
Sequence programs of the Q series (Q mode) and the L series can be
edited in a circuit diagram (ladder format).
Edit
Touch theConvert
area you
wish Online
to edit.
Find/Replace
Display
The circuit input window is displayed.
Enter ladder program
Enter ladder program
Print
Screen
GX Works2
GX LogViewer, etc.
and changed.
For details,
see P.46
Enable monitoring of network line conditions on a dedicated screen.
Network module status display
Backup/restoration function
Sequence programs and parameters can be backed up to the CF card
or USB memory in the GOT. Users can then perform batch operation to
restore the data to the PLC.
CF card,
etc.
Q25HCPU
8
Replace CPU
Restore
Sequence
program,
etc.
If data is backed up
< >
One touch to jump
to Ladder Monitor or Ladder Editor Screen
Insert row
Delete row
Insert column
[ ]
Delete column
Circuit symbol: Changing from normally
closed contact to normally open contact.
Device: Changing from M422 to M200.
Using the MELSEC-L series or
high-speed data logger module!
Monitoring batch control!
Can collected logging data be
checked at the worksite?
Can Process and Batch
monitoring be simplified?
Enable monitoring of LED status, error status, among others of
network modules on a GOT.
For details,
see P.42
Delete column
Buffer memory values and I/O information can be monitored
Network monitor function
Can the PLC programs
be recovered after failure?
Insert column
[ ]
Exit
Mon.
Menu
For details,
see P.46
Delete row
< >
PLC RD.
For details,
see P.46
PLC devices can be monitored and changed.
Intelligent module monitor function
For details,
see P.45
Ladder editor function
Insert row
For details,
see P.39
FA Solutions
Sequence programs can be monitored in a circuit diagram (ladder
format).
For details,
see P.44
SFC monitor function
GOT Solutions
Ideal for PLCs in the field and on the plant floor!
MELSEC-L troubleshooting functiion
A dedicated maintenance
screen for the L series is
included. The CPU status
and error information can
be easily confirmed without
a personal computer.
If a problem occurs, you
can jump to a function
screen such as the ladder
monitor to quickly take
corrective actions.
Log viewer function
For details,
see P.46
Logging data collected
using the L series or
high-speed data logger
module can be
displayed on the GOT.
For details,
see P.40
Building a process control
system using GOT1000
For details,
see P.26 P.51
PX Developer creates GOT
process control screens
automatically.
The automatically generated
data can be used for both the
GOT (worksite) and
GT SoftGOT1000 (monitor
room), and therefore monitor
screens can be created
efficiently.
9
CASE STUDY 2
FA Solutions
Making drive control even easier.
Can the motion controller’s
servo parameters be
changed easily?
Q series motion monitor function
Can motion SFC programs
be checked on the GOT?
For details,
see P.47
Motion controller (Q series) SFC programs can be monitored in SFC
diagram format. Viewing the batch program monitor or the active step
list enables you to see the complete status at a glance.
Real mode main
General-purpose AC Servo
Holding point positioning
P0
LINK 2
F100
1 //Obtain digital SW
2 DIND2010,X10
3 D2011=D2010&HFF
4 //Select data
5 D2012L=BIN(D2011)
6 //0
7 D2020L=D2012K1000L
Real mode main
Detailed program
window
Device
D2010
G100
Execute “change speed” when X19=ON,
M2415=ON, and M2345=ON.
Can the program be debugged
without opening the cabinet?
Can motion profiles be
recovered after
controller failures?
MT Works2
GX Works2, etc.
Connected with a personal computer, the GOT acts as a transparent
gateway to enable programming, startup, and adjustment of equipment
using MT Works2, GX Works2, GX Configurator-QP or MR
Configurator2. Users do not have to bother with opening the cabinet or
changing cable connections.
Can devices in the motion
controller be validated?
H0000
D2012L
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 BIN
D2020L
0
H
K(+)
Change speed
For details,
see P.42
Backup/restoration function
Motion controller (Q series) programs and parameters can be backed
up onto a CF card or USB memory in the GOT. Users can perform
batch operation to restore the data to the motion controller.
Embedded functionality for positioning modules!
System monitor function
For details,
see P.46
Other convenient uses!
Can positioning status
and errors be validated?
Motion controller devices can be monitored and changed.
Intelligent module monitor function
For direct connection of servo amplifiers to GOTs!
Can errors or the status of
servo amplifiers be validated?
K(±)
FEDC BA98 7654 3210
D2011
G102
Position holding point when X0=ON and M2001=OFF.
Powerful functionality that is useful during startup and the tuning process!
FA transparent function
Format
X10
F100
For details,
see P.39
Value
0
FA Solutions
The GOT enables easy monitoring of motion controllers (Q series),
changing of servo parameters, and display of errors on the screen.
For details,
see P.45
Motion SFC monitor function
GOT Solutions
Ideal for motion controllers in the field and on the plant floor!
For details,
see P.46
Buffer memory values of modules such as the QD75MH and I/O
information can be monitored and changed.
When used in combination with the FA transparent function, the
positioning module can be efficiently debugged. If an error occurs in the
positioning module, the details of the error can be confirmed using just
the GOT.
Monitor the status, parameters, input/output information,
and other data for each axis of the positioning module
(intelligent module monitor function)
Operation screen
Start
Monitor positioning
sequence programs
(FA transparent function)
Operation
lamp
Stop
M10
Y20
Servo amplifier monitor function
In a system which outputs pulse train, the GOT can be connected to a
servo amplifier in a serial connection to perform the following
operations: monitoring, alarm display, diagnosis, parameter setting, and
test operations.
10
M20
For details,
see P.47
M30
M40
Y30
Operation panel
11
CASE STUDY 2
FA Solutions
Simplifying inverter control.
Can the inverter status be
monitored on the GOT?
Example of GT16 operation screen
Operation commands and parameters can be set from a GOT. On the
GT1020/GT1030, three different backlight colors can be switched
between screens, making it easy for operators to read and operate the
screens.
Example of GT1020 parameter screen
Example of GT1030 operation screen
LINK3
FA Solutions
General-purpose Inverter
Easy-to-understand display
GOT Solutions
Ideal for inverter operation!
Ideal for inverter startups and operation!
Can connections to the
inverter be simplified?
Can the program be debugged
without opening the cabinet?
FA transparent function
Directly connect inverters
Up to 31 inverters can be connected to a single GOT over a total
distance of 500m.
FREQROL-F700P/F700PJ inverters can automatically configure the
communication parameters for GOT connection, making connections
easy.
For details,
see P.39
Connected with a personal computer, the GOT acts as a transparent
gateway to enable startup and adjustment of equipment using FR
Configurator. Users do not have to bother with opening the cabinet or
changing cable connections.
Can inverter parameters
be changed easily?
Ready-to-use sample screens
Sample screen data for specifying parameters is available.
GT10 model
Max. 500 m
FR Configurator
RS-485 connection
Max. 31 units
FREQROL-D700
12
13
CASE STUDY 2
FA Solutions
Faster robot control!
Ready-to-use sample screens
Can the robot program
be easily accessed?
Sample screen data is available for robot operation, current position
monitoring, and other purposes. There is no need to create robot
programs from scratch.
FA Solutions
Industrial Robot
Robot operation panel screen
LINK 4
Robot jog/hand operation screen
GOT Solutions
Ideal for robot programming!
Robot current position monitor screen
Opens a video of
operation examples
Powerful functions for robotic systems!
Can the teaching box and the
personal computer used for setup
be consolidated into a single unit?
Immediately
check the robot
status!
Operation and maintenance on the GOT
• Robot operation screen
• Robot current position monitor screen
• Load rate/current value display screen
• Maintenance forecast screen
Manual display
Consolidate and centralize robot monitoring and
control functions on production floor using the GOT
Even if a teaching box is not available, the GOT can be used to operate
the robot and easily check the current position data and error details.
Consolidating panel operations into the GOT improves operation and
maintenance work efficiency.
Robot internal information (data)
Error information/Variable information/Program information
Robot information (current speed/attainment rate, etc.)
Maintenance information (battery/grease remaining time, etc.)
Servo motor (load rate/current value, etc.)
Consolidated
panel operations
MANUAL
AUTO
Robot load rate/current value monitor screen
Robot maintenance forecast screen
Can the program be debugged
without opening the cabinet?
Connected with a personal computer, the
GOT acts as a transparent gateway to
enable start up and adjustment of
equipment using RT ToolBox2. Users do
not have to bother with opening the cabinet
or changing cable connections.
Can devices in the robot
controller be validated?
For details,
see P.39
FA transparent function
Robot manual menu screen
System monitor function
For details,
see P.46
Embedded monitoring utilities are available enabling users to view and
change device values.
RT ToolBox2
In the event of trouble!
MANUAL AUTO
Robot controller
Teaching box
Robot programming
&
engineering software
Can robot profiles be recovered
after controller failures?
CF card,
etc.
Q25HCPU
Backup/restoration function
For details,
see P.42
MODE
RUN
ERR
USER
BAT
BOOT
If data is backed up
Replace CPU
Restore
Q25HCPU
QX10
QX41
QX41
QJ71BR11
QJ71BR11
USB
Robot controller data can be backed up to the CF card or USB memory
in the GOT. Users can perform batch operation to restore the data to
the robot controller.
14
PULL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Robot data,
etc.
15
CASE STUDY 2
FA Solutions
Connected with a personal computer,
the GOT acts as a transparent gateway
to enable start up and adjustment of
equipment using NC Configurator, etc.
Users do not have to bother with
opening the cabinet or changing cable
connections.
NC Configurator
CNC C70 and MELDAS C6/C64 sequence programs can be monitored
in a circuit diagram (ladder format).
Numerical Control Unit
LINK 5
One-touch ladder jump function
Can errors or the status
of the CNC be validated
quickly?
Can CNC parameters
be changed easily?
CNC monitor function
Can programs be
changed easily without
a personal computer?
Can the root cause be
easily identified?
Powerful function for CNC startup, machining and changeover!
For details,
see P.47
The CNC C70 and MELDAS C6/C64 can be monitored and the
parameters can be changed.
CNC data I/O function
For details,
see P.44
Ladder monitor function
FA Solutions
Ideal for CNC programming!
Can CNC programs be validated
directly from the GOT?
GOT Solutions
Can the program be debugged
without opening the panel?
Simplifying numerical control.
For details,
see P.39
FA transparent function
For details,
see P.44
By setting a program name and coil number of the CNC C70 to a touch
switch, the relevant ladder circuit block can be displayed directly.
Problems can be handled smoothly from the alarm screen.
For details,
see P.45
Ladder editor function
Sequence programs of the CNC C70 can be edited in a circuit diagram
(ladder format).
Edit
Display the ladder block of
the coil set to the touch switch
Touch theConvert
area you
wish Online
to edit.
Find/Replace
Display
The circuit input window is displayed.
For details,
see P.47
Enter ladder program
Print
Screen
Data, such as machining programs and parameters, can be copied
from a GOT CF card or USB memory to the CNC C70 and vice versa.
Data can be deleted as well.
Enter ladder program
PLC RD.
Insert row
Exit
Delete row
Insert column
< >
[ ]
Delete column
Mon.
< >
[ ]
Menu
Insert row
One touch to jump
to Ladder Monitor or Ladder Editor Screen
Delete row
Insert column
Delete column
Circuit symbol: Changing from normally
closed contact to normally open contact.
Device: Changing from M422 to M200
In the event of trouble!
Can the CNC programs be
recovered after failure?
CF card,
etc.
Q25HCPU
Can CNC devices be
easily validated?
16
System monitor function
For details,
see P.46
Embedded monitoring utilities are available enabling users to view and
change CNC C70 and MELDAS C6/64 device values.
Backup/restoration function
For details,
see P.42
MODE
RUN
ERR
USER
BAT
BOOT
If data is backed up
Replace CPU
Restore
Q25HCPU
QX10
QX41
QX41
QJ71BR11
QJ71BR11
USB
CNC C70 data such as machining programs and parameters can be
backed up to the CF card or USB memory in the GOT. Users can
perform batch operation to restore the data to the CNC C70.
PULL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Machining
programs,
etc.
17
CASE STUDY 2
FA Solutions
Improving vision integration.
Ready-to-use sample screens
Can vision parameters be
changed from the GOT?
Sample screen data is available for checking the results of positioning,
inspection, and reading characters.
[Inspection screen]
[Code recognition screen]
The workpiece position and posture
detected with In-Sight Series as well as
the success or failure state of the detection
are displayed. The workpiece detection
threshold can be changed from this screen.
The results of workpiece inspections
carried out with the In-Sight Series are
displayed. The workpiece detection
threshold can be changed.
The results of reading ID codes with the
In-Sight Series are displayed. The reading
mode (read/verify or change character
string during verification) can be selected.
LINK 6
FA Solutions
[Alignment screen]
GOT Solutions
Ideal for configuration!
Powerful functions for vision systems!
Can automation and vision
systems be consolidated
into a single platform?
Displaying the In-Sight Series processing
results on the GOT
By connecting a GOT to the In-Sight Series and PLC over Ethernet, the
In-Sight Series processing results can be displayed and parameters can
be changed on the GOT. The GT16 model has a built-in Ethernet port,
allowing the system to be built easily.
Ideal for monitoring operations!
Can vision applications
be handled easily at
the worksite?
Displaying In-Sight Series vision
applications on the GOT
Connect the COGNEX VisionView VGA with the GOT to display the
In-Sight Series Vision Application screen. While monitoring connected
devices such as PLCs, it is possible to switch to the Vision Application
screen when necessary to display live images, specify parameters with
touch operations, and perform other operations.
Ethernet
Ethernet
In-Sight Series
processing results
In-Sight Series
GOT1000
In-Sight Series
Parameter changes
In-Sight Series screen display
RGB input function
GOT1000
Can other COGNEX
products be connected?
18
Remote personal computer
operation function (serial)
DataMan
✽ : A RS-232 connection is required to directly
exchange data with GOT and Dataman.
(Ethernet connection is not supported.)
Connect to various COGNEX products
RS-232
VisionView VGA
✽ : RGB input unit is required.
DataMan
✽ : A RS-232 connection is required to directly
exchange data with GOT and Dataman.
(Ethernet connection is not supported.)
The In-Sight vision system and DataMan barcode reader can be
connected to the GOT.
19
LINE-UP
The GOT1000 series offers five classes of terminals
12.1" type
15" type
GT16
to fit any system or budget requirement.
10.4" type
8.4" type
6.5" type Handy
5.7" type
High performance models with multimedia
and a host of features and functions
including embedded communications
SVGA TFT(High-brightness, wide viewing angle)
GT1675M-STBA
GOT1000 GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
Multimedia
Video RGB
Network
Bus
Serial
GT15
AC type
GT1675M-STBD
DC type
Resolution : 800 × 600 Display colors : 65,536 colors
Multimedia, video/RGB model
XGA TFT(High-brightness, wide viewing angle)
GT1695M-XTBA
AC type
GT1695M-XTBD
DC type
SVGA TFT(High-brightness, wide viewing angle)
GT1685M-STBA
AC type
GT1685M-STBD
DC type
VGA TFT(High-brightness, wide viewing angle)
GT1675M-VTBA
AC type
GT1675M-VTBD
DC type
Resolution : 1024 × 768 Display colors : 65,536 colors
Multimedia, video/RGB model
Resolution : 800 × 600 Display colors : 65,536 colors
Multimedia, video/RGB model
Resolution : 640 × 480 Display colors : 65,536 colors
Multimedia, video/RGB model
15" type
12.1" type
10.4" type
VGA TFT
✽
GT1675-VNBA
AC type
GT1675-VNBD
DC type
Resolution : 640 × 480 Display colors : 4,096 colors
VGA TFT
✽
GT1672-VNBA
AC type
GT1672-VNBD
DC type
Resolution : 640 × 480 Display colors : 16 colors
SVGA TFT(High-brightness, wide viewing angle)
GT1665M-STBA
AC type
GT1665M-STBD
DC type
Resolution : 800 × 600 Display colors : 65,536 colors
Multimedia, video/RGB model
VGA TFT
GT1662-VNBA
✽
AC type
GT1662-VNBD
DC type
NEW
Resolution : 640 × 480 Display colors : 16 colors
✽
VGA TFT(High-brightness, wide viewing angle)
VGA TFT(High-brightness, wide viewing angle)
GT1665M-VTBA
AC type
GT1665M-VTBD
GT1655-VTBD
DC type
Resolution : 640 × 480 Display colors : 65,536 colors
Multimedia, video/RGB model
8.4" type
VGA Handy GOT/TFT
Resolution : 640 × 480 Display colors : 65,536 colors
✽
(High-brightness, wide viewing angle)
GT1665HS-VTBD
DC type
DC type
Resolution : 640 × 480 Display colors : 65,536 colors
5.7" type
Performance models ideal for a wide range of
applications in a network or standalone environment
VGA TFT(High-brightness, wide viewing angle)
GT1575-VTBA
SVGA TFT(High-brightness, wide viewing angle)
GT1585V-STBA
GOT1000 GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
Multimedia
Video RGB
Network
Bus
Serial
GT12
AC type
GT1585V-STBD
DC type
Resolution : 800 × 600 Display colors : 65,536 colors
Video/RGB model
XGA TFT(High-brightness, wide viewing angle)
GT1595-XTBA
AC type
GT1595-XTBD
DC type
SVGA TFT(High-brightness, wide viewing angle)
GT1585-STBA
AC type
GT1585-STBD
DC type
Resolution : 1024 × 768 Display colors : 65,536 colors
Resolution : 800 × 600 Display colors : 65,536 colors
10.4" type
8.4" type
SVGA TFT(High-brightness, wide viewing angle)
GT1575V-STBA
AC type
GT1575V-STBD
SVGA TFT(High-brightness, wide viewing angle)
GT1575-STBA
AC type
GT1575-STBD
Network
Bus
Serial
GT1575-VTBD
DC type
VGA TFT
GT1575-VNBA
AC type
GT1575-VNBD
VGA TFT(High-brightness, wide viewing angle)
DC type
Resolution : 640 × 480 Display colors : 256 colors
VGA TFT
GT1572-VNBA
AC type
GT1572-VNBD
GT1565-VTBA
AC type
GT1565-VTBD
DC type
Resolution : 640 × 480 Display colors : 65,536 colors
VGA TFT
DC type
Resolution : 640 × 480 Display colors : 16 colors
GT1562-VNBA
AC type
GT1562-VNBD
VGA TFT(High-brightness, wide viewing angle)
GT1555-VTBD
DC type
Resolution : 640 × 480 Display colors : 65,536 colors
QVGA STN
GT1555-QSBD
QVGA STN
GT1550-QLBD
DC type
Resolution : 320 × 240 Display colors : 4,096 colors
DC type
Resolution : 320 × 240 Display colors : 16 gray scales
QVGA TFT(High-brightness, wide viewing angle)
DC type
Resolution : 640 × 480 Display colors : 16 colors
GT1555-QTBD
DC type
Resolution : 320 × 240 Display colors : 65,536 colors
5.7" type Handy
5.7" type
GT11
Small models with a host of advanced functions
QVGA STN
GT1155-QSBD
GT1155-QSBDQ
GT1155-QSBDA
GOT1000 GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
VGA TFT
GT1275-VNBA
✽
AC type
GT1275-VNBD
DC type
Resolution : 640 × 480 Display colors : 256 colors
VGA TFT
GT1265-VNBA
✽
AC type
GT1265-VNBD
Multimedia
DC type
Video RGB
Bus
Network
GT1155-QTBD
GT1155-QTBDQ
GT1155-QTBDA
Serial
GT1150-QLBD
GT1150-QLBDQ
GT1150-QLBDA
DC type
DC type Q bus connection
DC type A bus connection
Resolution : 320 × 240 Display colors : 256 colors
4.7" type
DC type
DC type Q bus connection
DC type A bus connection
Resolution : 320 × 240 Display colors : 256 colors
QVGA TFT
Resolution : 640 × 480 Display colors : 256 colors
5.7" type
GT10
DC type
Resolution : 800 × 600 Display colors : 65,536 colors
GOT1000 GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
Video RGB
DC type
Resolution : 800 × 600 Display colors : 65,536 colors
Video/RGB model
Large basic models with integrated features
and communications
Multimedia
AC type
Resolution : 640 × 480 Display colors : 65,536 colors
DC type
DC type Q bus connection
DC type A bus connection
Resolution : 320 × 240 Display colors : 16 gray scales
4.5" type
QVGA Handy GOT/STN
GT1155HS-QSBD
DC type
Resolution : 320 × 240 Display colors : 256 colors
GT1150HS-QLBD
DC type
Resolution : 320 × 240 Display colors : 16 gray scales
3.7" type
Compact models with basic functions
GOT1000 GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
Multimedia
Video RGB
Network
Bus
Serial
✽: For details about the functions of GT10 models, see "GT10 (pages 48, 49)".
20
NEW
STN(High contrast)
QVGA STN
GT1055-QSBD
QVGA STN
24VDC type
Resolution : 320 × 240
Display colors : 256 colors
GT1050-QBBD
QVGA STN
24VDC type
Resolution : 320 × 240
Display colors : Monochrome (blue/white) 16 gray scales
GT1045-QSBD
QVGA STN
24VDC type
Resolution : 320 × 240
Display colors : 256 colors
GT1040-QBBD
24VDC type
Resolution : 320 × 240
Display colors : Monochrome (blue/white) 16 gray scales
GT1030-HBD
GT1030-HBD2
GT1030-HBL
GT1030-HWD
GT1030-HWD2
GT1030-HWL
✽
Black
24VDC type RS-422 connection
Black
24VDC type RS-232 connection
RS-422 connection
Black
5VDC type
White
24VDC type RS-422 connection
White
24VDC type RS-232 connection
White
5VDC type
RS-422 connection
Resolution : 288 × 96
Display colors : Monochrome (black/white)
(Tricolor LED (green/orange/red))
NEW
STN(High contrast)
GT1030-HBDW
GT1030-HBDW2
GT1030-HBLW
GT1030-HWDW
GT1030-HWDW2
GT1030-HWLW
✽
Black
24VDC type RS-422 connection
Black
24VDC type RS-232 connection
RS-422 connection
Black
5VDC type
White
24VDC type RS-422 connection
White
24VDC type RS-232 connection
White
5VDC type
RS-422 connection
Resolution : 288 × 96
Display colors : Monochrome (black/white)
(Tricolor LED (white/pink/red))
STN
GT1020-LBD
GT1020-LBD2
GT1020-LBL
GT1020-LWD
GT1020-LWD2
GT1020-LWL
STN
Black
24VDC type RS-422 connection
Black
24VDC type RS-232 connection
RS-422 connection
Black
5VDC type
White
24VDC type RS-422 connection
White
24VDC type RS-232 connection
White
5VDC type
RS-422 connection
Resolution : 160 × 64
Display colors : Monochrome (black/white)
(Tricolor LED (green/orange/red))
GT1020-LBDW
GT1020-LBDW2
GT1020-LBLW
GT1020-LWDW
GT1020-LWDW2
GT1020-LWLW
Black
24VDC type RS-422 connection
Black
24VDC type RS-232 connection
RS-422 connection
Black
5VDC type
White
24VDC type RS-422 connection
White
24VDC type RS-232 connection
White
5VDC type
RS-422 connection
Resolution : 160 × 64
Display colors : Monochrome (black/white)
(Tricolor LED (white/pink/red))
✽: The GT16-VNB, GT1655-VTBD, GT1665HS-VTBD, GT12-VNB and GT1030 high contrast products (GT1030-H) are not supported by the screen design
software GT Works2/GT Designer 2.
21
Hardware
GOT1000 GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
The lineup that fits in with any production line. Find
GT16
High performance models with multimedia and a host of
features and functions including embedded communications
Options
� See page 24 for GT16 Handy.
Multimedia
unit
� User memory capacity: 15MB (GT16��-VNB� : 11MB)
� USB host and USB device ports are included.
� Ethernet, RS-422/485, and RS-232 interfaces are supported as
standard interfaces.
� A multimedia unit and a video/RGB unit are supported.�
� Featuring an analog touch panel
Video/RGB
V
unit
Audio output
CF card
unit
(extension) unit
Printer
unit
your GOT with the right functions, size, and features.
GT12
Large basic models with integrated features
and communication interfaces
USB device
� User memory capacity: 6MB
� USB device port is included.
� Ethernet, RS-422/485, and RS-232
interfaces are supported as standard
interfaces.
� Featuring an analog touch panel
External
I/O unit
CF card
� : Excluding GT16��-VNB�,
GT1655
Extension unit
Human sensor
Connect
communication units
and other optional
units
GT1695/GT1685 only
You can use a
USB memory
stick.
GT15
USB host and USB device
CF card
RS-422/485
Ethernet
RS-232
GT11
Performance models ideal for a wide range of
applications in a network or standalone environment
Options
Multimedia
unit
Video/RGB
V
unit
Audio output
CF card
unit
(extension) unit
Printer
unit
External
I/O unit
� : GT1585V/GT1575V only
RS-232, and RS-422/485
GT115�-Q�BD
RS-232 and Bus
GT115�-Q�BDQ
GT115�-Q�BDA
GT10
Extension unit
Connect
communication units
and other optional
units
CF card
USB device
USB device
CF card
Compact models with basic functions
GT1050/GT1040
RS-232
RS-232
GT1030/GT1020
� User memory capacity: 3MB
� User memory capacity: 1.5MB (GT1030)/
� USB device port is included.
512KB (GT1020)
� RS-422/485 and RS-232 interfaces � Three-color LED backlight indicates the
are supported as standard
equipment status at a glance.
interfaces.
� The RS-422/485� interface or the RS-232
interface is supported as a standard
interface.
RS-422/485
22
Ethernet
Small models with a host of advanced functions
� User memory capacity: 3MB
� USB device port is included.
� The RS-232 interface is supported as
a standard interface.
� Choose between two standard interface
models for network connection:
the RS-422/485 interface model or the
bus interface model.
� : For details about the functions of GT10 models,
see "GT10 (pages 48, 49)".
GT1595/GT1585(V) only
RS-422/485
� See page 25 for GT11 Handy.
� User memory capacity: 9MB (GT15��-VNB�: 5MB)
� USB device port is included.
� The RS-232 interface is supported as a standard interface.
� A video/RGB unit is supported.�
Human sensor
RS-232
� : Only the RS-422 interface for the 5VDC type
USB device
See “Specifications” (page 52) for details of each hardware model.
RS-422/485 or RS-232
23
Hardware
GOT1000 GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
Rich functionality and high performance in the palm
GT16
Handy GOT
65,536 vivid colors on a big VGA screen
The light body includes the latest GT16 functions
Extremely easy handling and operation in one hand
Standard Ethernet interface enables long-distance communication
 User memory capacity: 15MB
 USB host and USB device ports are included.
 Ethernet, RS-422/485, and RS-232 interfaces are
supported as standard interfaces.
 The latest GT16 functions are available, including
various types of monitoring and ladder editing
functions.
of your hand
allows you to change the angle of the
handle.
Various types of switches are available
Various types of external connection interfaces are
available as standard interfaces
 Operation switches with LEDs (6)
 Emergency stop switch
 Selector switch with key
 Three-position deadman switch
 USB host and USB device
 CF card interface
 RS-422/485 and RS-232 interfaces (switchable)
 Ethernet interface
High resolution handy GOT
Options
6.5" GT1665HS-VTBD
Emergency stop
switch guard cover
An example of a system configuration
with Ethernet connection
External
connection cable
A direct connection is possible to FX,
Q PLC etc. via RS-422/485 or
RS-232 in parallel with Ethernet.
Emergency stop circuit
I/Os for operation display etc.
Connector conversion box
GT16H-CNB-42S
The Ethernet interface
included in
GT16 handy GOT
24VDC power source
24VDC power source
External connection cable
GT16H-C-42P
Ethernet
Hub
 The maximum Ethernet communication
distance is 100m in total length.
 The maximum connection distance
between the connector conversion
box and the GOT is 10m.
 Four types of FA equipment can be
connected at the maximum.
Connector
conversion box
GT16H-CNB-42S
GT11
Handy GOT
Key selector switch
QCPU
FX Ethernet module
Portable 5.7" operation terminal
GT1155HS-QSBD
GT1150HS-QLBD
GT11 Handy can be connected to the CC-Link network.
Q series PLC
master station
CC-Link interface unit
GT11H
(S)
-CCL
(intelligent device station)
Emergency stop switch
Cable GT11H-C□-32P
□:30 (3m), 50 (5m), 80 (8m)
CF card interface
USB interface
Grip switch
Hand strap
6 operation switches
24
Display area
25
Software
GOT1000 GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
Use a personal computer or panel computer as a GOT.
HMI software for the GOT1000 series
Link with other applications to construct
a high-performance system
GT SoftGOT1000
GT SoftGOT1000 is the HMI software that provides GOT functions on personal computers
and panel computers.
This software connects with various types of equipment such as Mitsubishi PLCs and let
you see screens just like the GOT1000 series.
You can also reuse GOT's project data without modification.
Along with all the advantages of a GOT, you can also enjoy the convenience and flexibility
of personal computers and panel computers.
Version3
You can use a user-created application to read and write
information to and from internal devices of GT SoftGOT1000.
By linking data with user applications such as a data logger,
you can construct a high-performance system package.
You can also use a touch switch on the GT SoftGOT1000
monitor to launch another application.
USB port license key
Reduce downtime
Use GOT project data from the production site
Use GT SoftGOT1000 to monitor the production site from
your office. You can collect information quickly when a
problem occurs, taking necessary actions immediately.
• Microsoft®Visual C++®/Visual C#® NEW /Visual Basic® included with
Microsoft®Visual Studio 6.0/.NET (2002) NEW /.NET 2003/2005 NEW /2008
• Embarcadero®C++Builder®XE NEW
Connect to RFID or barcode reader and input numerical
values or ASCII characters. NEW
NEW
You can reuse project data of the GOT at your production
site as the project data of GT SoftGOT1000 to reduce the
design cost.
Monitor the screen of your onsite GOT from
GT SoftGOT1000
Connect GT SoftGOT1000 with GOT by an Ethernet connection.
Use the GOT's project data with GT SoftGOT1000 to monitor
connected equipment.�
� : Only CH1 can be monitored when GOT is connected via multi-channels.
GOT and QCPU/LCPU can be connected by a bus connection,
direct CPU connection, computer link connection, or Ethernet connection.
GOT and OMRON PLC can be connected via Ethernet connection.
Monitoring Line 1 Monitoring Line 2
Personal
computer
� : See "List of connectable models" (page 69), for more details on supported models of
other manufactures.
The SoftGOT-GOT link function enhances the linkage to your onsite GOT
Monitor the production site from a remote location
Worksite
The GT SoftGOT1000 can be connected to the Mitsubishi
PLC, other PLC brands, MODBUS ®/TCP slave devices. NEW
<Development environment of user applications>
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 is software included with the GT Works3 suite.
A separate license key is required for use.
Office
Connect to various devices
Personal
computer
Worksite
Ethernet
Office
Monitor the screen of
your onsite GOT from
GT SoftGOT1000
Project data
Ethernet
Production site
NEW
Prevent simultaneous operations from GT
SoftGOT1000 and GOT
Operation of an input object (e.g. touch switch, numerical
input) is allowed by either GT SoftGOT1000 or the GOT,
whichever has operating authority. If one terminal does
not have operating authority, the status of the operating
authority can be displayed in a pop-up window. Whether it
is possible to acquire operating authority from the other
terminal can be notified with a dialog. It is also possible to
specify the time to ensure the operating authority on the
operation side after final operations.
The host is now in
operation. Do you want
to obtain operating
authority?
With
operating
authority
Yes
Worksite
Monitor
The host is now in
operation. Do you want
to obtain operating
authority?
Ethernet
GOT
No
A dialog box opens
with message
Office
Yes
No
Monitoring Line 3 Monitoring Line 4
Q25HCPU
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
QX10
QX41
QX41
QX41
QJ71BR11
QJ71BR11
QJ71BR11
QJ71BR11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Line 4
GOT
QCPU/LCPU
OMRON PLC
Connect with MELSEC process control for process control applications
You can connect GT SoftGOT1000 to the monitor tools of the Engineering Environment PX Developer for design and
maintenance work for process control. In this way, a process control monitoring system can easily be constructed.
PX Developer window screens and other tools
Tools for monitoring, operating, and tuning loop
control tags. (The display position can be
specified.)
GT SoftGOT1000 touch switch/object
Clicking on touch switches and objects displays
various screens of PX Developer monitoring
tools. (The display position can be specified.)
Security collaboration
NEW
The GT SoftGOT1000 security level is changed accordingly when the PX Developer monitor
tool’s mode is changed (engineer mode/operate mode/lock mode). Authority can be set for
operations requiring security.
26
PX Developer monitoring tool bar
Clicking on buttons executes various operations
such as starting up GT SoftGOT1000 and
switching base screens.
GT SoftGOT1000 base screen
Make your desktop into a graphic monitoring
window by displaying the GT SoftGOT1000 base
screen in full-screen mode and sending the
window to the back of the screen.
GT SoftGOT1000 Commander
By using the GT SoftGOT1000 Commander, multiple GT
SoftGOT1000 modules using the SoftGOT-GOT link function
can be efficiently managed, and the SoftGOT-GOT link
function can be utilized easily.
Operating authority can be obtained.
Able to make
operation
A message pops up
Not able to make
operation
GT SoftGOT1000 Commander
Management
Management
<Actions possible with GT SoftGOT1000 Commander>
• Search for GOT on the Ethernet network and start with
GT SoftGOT1000 (GT16 only)
• Start/stop GT SoftGOT1000
• Check and switch GT SoftGOT1000 monitor status (online/offline)
• Designate GT SoftGOT1000 module No. displayed on top screen
Monitoring the
controller connected to
the GOT (station No.1)
by GT SoftGOT1000
(module No. 1)
GT SoftGOT1000 (module No. 1):
Communicating with the GOT
(station No.1)
GT SoftGOT1000 (module No. 2):
Communicating with the GOT
(station No.2)
Monitoring the
controller connected to
the GOT (station No.2)
by GT SoftGOT1000
(module No. 2)
Ethernet
GOT (station No.1)
GOT (station No.2)
See "List of connectable models" (page 69), "Function list" (page 70), and "Notes for use (Operating environment)" (page 85).
27
Software
GOT1000 GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
More intuitive. No more wasted time. The screen
design software optimized for usability.
GOT1000 Screen Design Software
Simulator
Preview operation without
connecting to a GOT.
Enhanced
"easy-to-use"
functions for
efficient
screen design!
Communication with the GOT
Communication settings and
drivers are automatically selected
and downloaded to the GOT with
the project data.
Tool bar
Vividly colored icons make
distinguishing active functions from
inactive ones easy.
Work tree
View the whole project, create a
new screen, and add and delete
screens with ease.
Library
Parts are easy to select. High
resolution graphics and parts are
easy create and incorporate into
projects.
Property sheet
A selected object or graphic’s
settings are displayed as a tree
view. Set colors, devices, etc., on
the property sheet without opening
a dialog box. When selecting
multiple objects or graphics,
change color, character size, etc.,
all at the same time.
Dialog box
User-friendly dialog boxes and
object settings.
Editor <screen design area>
Many convenient and efficient
development functions are included!
New functions improve
your screen design
efficiency than ever before!
Temporary area
Reduce workspace clutter by moving
objects off of the display area.
MELSOFT iQ Works improves design efficiency
Batch parameter check and system labels
of MELSOFT Navigator are supported.
28
● “Templates”
reduce time for screen design
● “Screen Preview”
enables simple simulation
● “Device Name Display”
helps you check setting contents
quickly
Related tools
GT Works3 comes with various tools such as
the Data Transfer Tool and GT Converter2.
The Help function is available
for quick reference!
29
CONTENTS
GOT1000 GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
INDEX
The GOT1000 series provides a variety of functions
to satisfy user requirements
Usability depends on who the users are and where they carry out their tasks.
Designers want to use the most advanced HMI technology, while maintenance engineers want the most dependable HMI for their facilities.
To satisfy all of our customers, we are constantly developing more and more functions for the GOT1000 series.
Efficiency requires both fast data transfer as
To restore a system as quickly as possible,
How do we stay flexible?
well as user-friendly functions.
response capabilities for "just in case"
situations are the key to selecting a HMI display.
For Designers
P32
P38
For Maintenance Personnel
P40
GT10 P48
MELSEC Process Control P51
Specifications P52
External Dimensions P61
Function List P70
Product List P74
Warranty P87
Document display function
P33
Multi-channel function
P33
SoftGOT-GOT link function
P34
For initial
startup &
operations
Drawing, computing,
P38
communication; a trio of
high-speed response functions
For maintenance
personnel
Logging function/
historical trend graph/
historical data list display
P40
Log viewer function
P40
Backlight brightness adjustment
P38
Color-coded front face LED
P38
Operator authentication function P41
Maintenance time notification
function
P38
Operation log function
P41
Backup/restoration function
P42
Advanced alarm
P43
Ladder monitor function
P44
SFC monitor function
P44
File transfer function (FTP client) P34
Ladder editor function
P45
Gateway function
P35
Motion SFC monitor function
P45
MES interface function
P35
System monitor function
P46
Comment groups
P36
Network monitor function
P46
Multilingual support
P36
Intelligent module monitor function
P46
Advanced recipe function
P37
P46
Script function
P37
MELSEC-L troubleshooting
function
USB mouse/keyboard connection P34
Remote personal computer
operation function (Ethernet)
P34
Remote personal computer
operation function (Serial)
P34
Equipped with front USB interface P39
FA transparent function
P39
Q series motion monitor function P47
Various types of window screens P37
CNC monitor function/
CNC data I/O function
P47
List editor for A/List editor for FX P47
Specifications,
External Dimensions
Servo amplifier monitor function P47
MELSEC Process
Control
Notes for Use P81
P32
iQ Platform
List of Connectable Models P65
Video/RGB function
GT10
iQ Platform P50
For designers
P32
For Maintenance
Personnel
For Initial Startup &
Adjustment Operators
Multimedia function
For Initial Startup &
Operations
There are many different applications to be solved.
For Designers
INDEX
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
GT
16
GT
15
GT
12
The functions bearing these marks are available on the GT16, GT15, or GT12 model.
All other functions are supported by GT16, GT15, GT12, and GT11 models.
�: For details about the functions of GT10 models, see "GT10 (pages 48, 49)".
30
31
Freedom to utilize advanced display functions to
Smooth, high-quality motion images help
efficiently investigate the cause of a problem
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
Display various documents on the GOT at the
worksite
GOT 1000
Multimedia function
16
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
 Capable of recording motion images for 120 seconds before and
after an error occurrence (when the event trigger device turned
on), up to 240 seconds in total.
120
seconds
after
Event trigger device: ON
Document display function
 When a system error occurs, referring to recovery methods
in check lists and/or manuals on the GOT can reduce
downtime.
Displaying input images
 In addition to the dedicated screen, images input from a
video camera can be displayed on a user-created screen.
Normally, input images are displayed on the user-created
screen, and the dedicated multi-media screen is opened
only when an error occurs or when playing back recorded
images for confirmation. NEW
Insert
CF card
Motion
image file
Office
GOT at
worksite
Motion promptly plays
image file back motion
images.
Worksite
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
The dedicated multimedia screen is available for
recording and playback. Reduce your screen
design time!
 Input images from up to four
video cameras and inspection
devices are simultaneously
and cleanly displayed in four
windows in 65,536 colors.
Images can be saved in
JPEG format.
✽ : Not supported by GT16-VNB, GT1655, GT16 Handy.
✽ : The multimedia data link tool and multimedia data link FTP services are necessary to
transmit motion image files to a personal computer.
✽ : Only one of the following devices can be used at one time: multimedia unit, video
input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit or RGB input unit.
 Easy device transfer between connected devices. Use GT
Works3 to specify triggers for source and destination
devices for device transfer.
(Device data transfer function)
 The QnA compatible 3E frame is now supported with the
microcomputer connection (Ethernet).
See "List of connectable models" (page 65), for more details on supported models of
other manufactures.
For various types of peripherals.
 General-purpose
MODBUS® devices  External devices (operation panels, switches, lamps, etc.)
 Two-dimensional code readers, barcode readers  RFID readers, IC card readers  Speakers  Video cameras
✽
 Displays (RGB output)  PCs (RGB input)  Serial printers  PictBridge printers  Vision sensors
✽ : For details, see CASE STUDY 2 FA Solutions (page 18).
Displays PC images on the GOT <RGB input>
Typical applications
 Images on a personal computer display screen appear on
the GOT simultaneously with the GOT's screen. RGB input
of up to 2 channels is available when using the GT16M-R2.
 The display size can be changed, and the clip display is available.
Display the GOT screen on a display <RGB output>
 Connect to a commercial display so that the GOT screen can
be displayed larger.
✽ : Not supported by GT16-VNB, GT1655, GT16 Handy.
✽ : Only one of the following devices can be used on the GT16 at one time; video input
unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or multimedia unit.
✽ : Only the GT1585V and GT1575V for the GT15 series. Only one of the following
unit, or RGB output unit.
An optional device may be necessary. For details, see "Selection of optional units and devices" (page 81).
GT
16
Third party PLCs via Ethernet
The GT16 enables multi-channel connection without a communication unit!
Third party PLCs
PLC + Temperature controller + Inverter
Ethernet
NEW
devices can be used at one time; video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input
32
The GOT1000 Series connects with PLCs,
microcomputers, and other various devices. More models
from more manufactures will be supported in the future.
 Sample screen data for connecting to temperature
controllers, servo amplifiers, or inverters is available to make
it easy to create your own screen data.
Multi-channel function
1
HUB
1
2
1
3
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
Enhanced compatibility with cameras and inspection
devices <Video input>
GOT 1000
Specifications,
External Dimensions
GOT 1000
GT
 Up to four FA device (PLC, servo, inverter, temperature
controller, etc.) channels can be monitored with one GOT
unit. (GT12 monitors up to two channels.)
An optional device may be necessary.
For details, see "Selection of optional units and devices" (page 81).
Video/RGB function
GT
16 15 12
The multimedia data link tool and multimedia data link FTP service are
multimedia-dedicated software programs included with GT Works3.
High-quality images with 65,536 colors provide
precise detail
Central storage of FA device information on
a single GOT terminal
MELSEC Process
Control
<Applicable software programs> • Quick Time 7 Pro
<Compatible file formats>
• 3GP and MP4
Ethernet
An optional device may be necessary.
For details, see "Selection of optional units and devices" (page 81).
iQ Platform
Use as a video guidebook for work tasks
The GOT plays back motion image files that are created by
your personal computer. Since the GOT is compatible with
standard formats, commercially available software can be used
to create motion image files.
Play back motion
images recorded by the GOT
on a personal computer!
GT10
 The motion image recorded on site is saved in the CF card of
the GOT's multimedia unit and can be played back immediately
after being recorded.
 The motion image files saved in the CF card can be sent to your
personal computer over the Ethernet interface of the GOT's
multimedia unit. You can then view the motion image on your
personal computer.
 Fast forward and slow motion playback functions are also
available.
16 15
Document is displayed on the GOT
Display of documents and manuals on the GOT can reduce downtime.
Check the motion image before and after the occurrence
of a problem, and diagnose the cause immediately.
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
For Maintenance
Personnel
Convert documents with
the document converter and
save the data to a CF card
Playing back motion image files
GT
 Supported file formats : doc, xls, ppt, pdf, jpg, bmp
CF card
High resolution recorded image (standard mode)
 Smooth, high resolution video can be recorded.
 Video size and frame rate
• Maximum 15 fps in VGA (640 × 480)
• Maximum 30 fps in QVGA (320 × 240)
GT
 The document converter that comes with GT Works3 is used
to format documents to be displayed and save them to CF
cards as JPEG files.
For Initial Startup &
Operations
Error!
For additional recording time (extended mode)
 Over two days of video can be recorded.
 Video size QVGA (320 × 240); frame rate 15 fps
 Pages can be changed, scrolled through, enlarged or
reduced, and multi-page documents can be displayed.
GOT 1000
For Designers
Clear view before and after the trouble occurrence
<Recording pre/post event motion images>
GT
16 15
Recording audio and video, displaying input images
120
seconds
before
For designers
INDEX
GT
enhance the GOT
2
MELSEC
4
Temperature controllers
2
3
Brand "A" PLC Brand "B" PLC Brand "C" PLC MELSEC-Q
Use of the main body Ethernet I/F enables connection
via Ethernet with up to 4 different types of PLCs
Brand "A" PLC
Easy data exchange between PLCs
Inverter
Capable of simultaneous communication
with different FA equipment
✽ : For the Ethernet connection with GT1695 and GT1685 of function version A, if connected to equipment compatible with 10BASE-T, use a switching hub for its operation in a network
environment where both 10Mbps and 100Mbps systems are operable.
✽ : The number of channels and functions, which can be used with the multi-channel function vary depending on the connection configuration. For more details, see "Notes for use" (page 81).
An optional device may be necessary. For details, see "Selection of optional units and devices" (page 81).
33
Transfer real-time production data to host systems
Be alerted about worksite errors and collect
device data from the office
Monitor the screen of the onsite GOT from your PC screen
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
Worksite
✽ : Only CH1 can be monitored when GOT is connected via multi-channels. GOT and
QCPU/LCPU can be connected by a bus connection, direct CPU connection,
computer link connection, or Ethernet connection. GOT and OMRON PLC can be
connected via Ethernet connection.
Connect your mouse/keyboard to the front USB interface
GOT 1000
GT
QJ71BR11
QX41
 Even when third party devices are connected, MX
Component can read and write the devices through the GOT
using the server function.
QJ71BR11
✽ : The collected data can be displayed and analyzed by Excel without using any
programs other than MX Sheet. Programming with Visual C++ and Visual Basic
enables applications to be flexibly designed and built. See the MELSOFT catalog (L
(NA) 08008) for more details.
QCPU/LCPU
OMRON PLC
Operate a remote PC from an onsite GOT
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
QJ71BR11
 A USB mouse/keyboard can be connected to the front USB
interface.
USB mouse
USB keyboard
✽ : Not supported by GT16 Handy
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
GT
GOT 1000
Remote personal computer
operation function (Serial)
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
GT
16 15 File transfer function (FTP client)
Personal computer
(FTP server✽)
Office
(Displays PC screen on GOT)
PC screen
Remote personal computer
operation function
Serial communication (RS-232)
Compatible
Windows OS
Alarm log file,
hard copy, etc.
CF card,
etc.
Ethernet
Worksite
®
®
Windows XP Professional SP2/SP3, Windows XP Home Edition SP2/SP3,
Windows® 2000 Professional SP4
✽ : Not supported by GT16-VNB, GT1655, GT16 Handy
✽ : Supported only on the GT1585V and GT1575V models in the GT15 series.
An optional device may be necessary.
For details, see "Selection of optional units and devices" (page 81).
34
Logging file,
etc.
CF card,
etc.
Touch
NEW
 With a few simple settings, files (alarm log files, hard copies,
etc.) of resource data stored in the GOT's CF card and USB
memory✽ can be sent from the GOT to a personal computer.
RGB input
PC screen
GOT 1000
GOT (FTP client)
GOT (FTP client)
MELSEC
An optional device may be necessary.
For details, see "Selection of optional units and devices" (page 81).
The GOT transmits data from connected FA
devices to the server personal computer
database via SQL statements.
 For communication with the database, just specify the
necessary data in GT Works3 without programming.
There is no need to use a gateway personal computer and
complicated programs to communicate with the MES
database server.
When MES interface function is used
More cost for installing a gateway personal
computer and its maintenance
MES database
server
MES application
MES application
Database
etc.)
• DB link function (tag function / trigger buffering function / trigger monitor function / SQL
statement transmission function <SELECT / SELECT multiple data / UPDATE / INSERT> /
calculation processing function / program execution function / DB buffering function)
• SNTP time synchronization function
• Resource data transmission function • Diagnosis function
• DB server function (ODBC connection function / connection setting function / log output function)
Usable databases
• Oracle® 8i/9i/10g/11g • Microsoft® Access 2000/2003/2007
• Microsoft® SQL Server 2000/2005/2008
• Microsoft® SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine (MSDE2000)
• Wonderware® Historian 9.0
✽ : Compatible only with 32-bit versions.
<MES (Manufacturing Execution System)>
A manufacturing execution system (MES) is a system which controls
and manages production processes at a worksite in order to
optimize quality, productivity, delivery date, and cost.
No need for gateway personal computer or database
transfer programs. Minimize the cost!
MES database
server
(Oracle®,
MES interface function
GOT 1000
MES interface function
Before
Send files from GOT to personal computer
MELSEC
Database (Oracle®, etc.)
Send events
(SQL statement)
Gateway PC
Host information system
communication processing
Office
Ethernet
SQL statement
• SELECT (multiple data)
• UPDATE
• INSERT
Data processing
(calculation processing and logging, etc.)
(MX Component)
MES application
+
database
MES
database
server
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
 When using RGB input, operate a personal computer screen
displayed on the GOT by touch operation (e.g. store
information such as touched coordinates in GOT internal
devices, transmit the data to a personal computer).
✽ : Not supported by GT16-VNB, GT16 Handy
✽ : The license key (GT16-PCRAKEY) is necessary.
You can view files such
as manuals stored on
your personal computer,
or you can use browsers
and engineering tools.
Brand "A" PLC Brand "B" PLC
Specifications,
External Dimensions
Operate a personal computer from the GOT touch screen
USB keyboard
Internet
MELSEC Process
Control
USB hub
Use the keyboard to enter
ASCII characters and numbers
Mail server
Server
iQ Platform
Operation from mouse/keyboard
This is convenient when you need to operate small
switches or enter many characters.
GT
PC screen
USB mouse
Client
Database linkage support enhances productivity
at your worksite
16 15
Ethernet
Ethernet
Worksite
 The client function can also be used to indirectly read/write
device values of PLC CPUs other than the one to which the
GOT (client) is connected.
GT
Display on the PC screen
PC screen
Office
Monitor other GOTs from a GOT (client function)
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
Office
MX Component
Host personal
computer
(client)
 A GOT (client) indirectly reads/writes device values of
equipment monitored by another GOT (server).
 A personal computer at a remote location can be operated
from an onsite GOT when they are connected via Ethernet.
Worksite
Use the mouse to click
touch switches
16 15
GOT 1000
Remote personal computer
16 operation function (Ethernet)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
USB hub
QJ71BR11
Mail send function
 The alarm history display function can transmit alarm
occurrences and recovery information by e-mail to personal
computers and mobile phones.
GT10
 In a user-created screen, you can use your mouse to click
touch switches and your keyboard to enter ASCII characters
and numbers.
QX41
QX41
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
GT
16 USB mouse/keyboard connection
QX41
GOT
 Files in the CF card within the GOT (e.g. alarms, recipes,
and hard copies) can be directly read and written from a
personal computer.
For Maintenance
Personnel
See "GT SoftGOT1000" (page 27), for more details.
 A GOT (server) can be monitored from the host personal
computer (MX Component) to perform indirect reading/writing
of connected devices being monitored by the GOT.
Monitor
QX10
The gateway function remotely monitors the
worksite and supports remote maintenance from
the office.
Collect data on a personal computer (server function)
Ethernet
Q25HCPU
✽1 : GT12 supports only the FTP server function.
For Initial Startup &
Operations
 By using the GT SoftGOT1000 Commander, multiple GT
SoftGOT1000 modules using the SoftGOT-GOT link function
can be efficiently managed, and the SoftGOT-GOT link
function can be utilized easily.
Office
Monitor the screen of
your onsite GOT from
GT SoftGOT1000
Project data
 Operation of an input object (e.g. touch switch, numerical
input) is allowed by either the GT SoftGOT1000 or GOT,
depending on which has operating authority.
QX10
Gateway function
✽1
For Designers
 Connect GT SoftGOT1000 with the GOT with an Ethernet
connection. Use the GOT's project data with GT
SoftGOT1000 to monitor connected equipment.✽
Q25HCPU
GT
16 15 12
16 15 SoftGOT-GOT link function
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
Direct check/edit of data in the CF card
(FTP server function)
GOT 1000
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GOT 1000
GT
INDEX
GT
For designers
Worksite
Send production
instruction requests
and production results
GOT
GOT
Gateway (server function)
MES interface function
GOT transmits data collectively
also to the equipment of other
manufacturers.
Brand "A" PLC
MELSEC
Temperature controller
✽ : Not supported by the GT16 Handy.
✽ : USB memory is supported only with GT16.
✽ : The Microsoft IIS (Internet Information Service) FTP server is supported.
Convenient for using GOT resource data
on a personal computer.
Mitsubishi Electric [email protected] presents the appropriate products to connect production information
and MES (manufacturing execution system) to improve productivity of clients' plants.
An optional device may be necessary. For details, see "Selection of optional units and devices" (page 81).
35
Advanced functions to increase screen efficiency
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GOT 1000
Comment groups
Management of project data line by line is no
longer required.
Example of comment group use
Line-specific comment groups are created.
Line A
comment
Line B
comment
Line C
comment
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
GOT 1000
GT
16 15 Advanced recipe function
This function allows material combination data and processing conditions data (device values) to be
held in the GOT, with only required data being written to and read from the PLC.
Individually
edited
An extensive number of settings and flexible recipe data can be created
Advanced recipe setting
Number of settings
(max. 2,048 settings/project)
 Because devices also permit bit and word combinations and
arbitrary device settings, there is no need to centralize the
sequential devices used, thereby reducing the total number
of device points used.
Import
Advanced recipe setting 2048
Advanced recipe setting 2: Stew
Advanced recipe setting 1: Curry
When "1" is selected
Line A
error
When "2" is selected
When "3" is selected
Line B
error
Line C
error
✽ : The advanced recipe file has a binary format. It must therefore be converted to either
a CSV file or a Unicode text file by using GT Works3, the GOT utility, or an external
control trigger device. After being converted, only the device values can be edited.
When more than 251 records are included in an exported Advanced Recipe file
(CSV or Unicode text format), use a text editor or Microsoft Excel 2007 or later to
open the file.
Record 2
Pork curry
Record 3
Chicken curry
D1000
Beef
300
0
D1001
Pork
0
300
0
0
D1002
Chicken
0
0
300
D1100
Onion
400
500
600
D1101
Potato
300
400
200
D1102
Carrot
200
250
150
Records
(max. 2,000 records/setting)
Number of device points
(max. 32,767 points/setting)
GT10
<Supported objects> • Touch switches or lamps where "comment
group" is selected for labels
• Comment displays where "comment group"
is used
Displayed comment group can be switched by a device.
Record 1
Beef curry
Device
comments
Devices
For Maintenance
Personnel
 Advanced recipe files can be converted into CSV or Unicode
format text files, and can be edited on a personal computer. ✽
 Automatically adjusts character size and inserts line feeds
according to the object size.
Device blocks
(max. 2,048 blocks/setting)
Easy handling of recipe data using the GOT
 Recipes can be handled easily with the GOT's utility function
without having to create a recipe operation screen.
When switching languages,
character string length is
automatically adjusted to
fit within the object.
 CSV/Unicode text files can be converted into binary format
files on the GOT. Even without GT Works3, you can edit
data on a personal computer and use it on the GOT.
Use comment groups to create Japanese, English and
Korean comments in their respective columns.
Extreme freedom in designing that enables you to
create more effective screens
GOT 1000
Script function
 You can specify the column number of the comment group
to change the language of the startup message on the GOT.
Project script/screen script
 Control statements, file operation functions, string operation
functions, etc. can be specified to a project or to individual
screens.
 The system alarm and utility screen display languages can
be changed in conjunction with the language selection
function.
Switch
Switch
Object script (For GT16 and GT15 only)
Convenient for language switching
When stroke fonts are used with switching languages for touch
switches, lamps or comment displays, the character size is
automatically adjusted by the size of the object. There is no need to
adjust the size of the object when creating a multi-language screen.
Thai
If D10=1,
Japanese is displayed
If D10=2,
English is displayed
Set the column number to be displayed
in the language switching device.
If D10=3,
Korean is displayed
Using D10
as the language
switching device
The displayed comment (language) changes.
The character size is
automatically adjusted.
✽ : Stroke fonts and Thai characters on GT16 and GT15 only.
Available for touch switches, lamps, comment displays,
the historical data list display
, the alarm history function,
the user alarm function
, and the advanced alarm function.
 Drawing functions and display control functions can be
specified per object. Object functions can be expanded, for
example, to change colors and display positions and to
freely draw graphics.
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
Various types of window screens
 Use overlap windows and dialog windows to create various
types of screens.
Dialog window
Overlap window
GT16 Model can display five screens.
Other models can display two screens.
Overlap window
q
q
w
w
e
r
e
Figure
t
Controlling the GOT display with scripts can
reduce load on the controller and enhance
maintenance performance. The editor
includes input support that makes it easy
for you to write scripts.
GOT 1000
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
✽ : Refer to "Comment groups (page 36) " for the details of comment groups.
Advanced recipe
record list screen
Specifications,
External Dimensions
For better work efficiency and enhanced
customization functions
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
 Comment group comments can be created freely for
applications, as well as for different languages.
36
Advanced recipe
information screen
MELSEC Process
Control
Users can quickly change the language display.
Example of switching between Japanese, English, and Korean screens
 By using comment groups, different language comments
can be created for each comment group column to switch
the display language.
Language switching
Select a record and execute the recipe
iQ Platform
GOT 1000
Multilingual support
Japanese
Select a recipe file
Execute recipe
Easy creation of multilingual screens
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
For Initial Startup &
Operations
 Up to 2,048 blocks can be used, each block is comprised of
sequential word devices, an arbitrary word device (1 point),
and a bit device (1 point).
For Designers
 CSV/Unicode text format files can be imported. Multiple files
can also be imported to individual comment groups, allowing
the task of inputting comments to be distributed among
several workers, greatly reducing the required input time.
Easily create complex recipe data
INDEX
Efficient input of extensive comment data
For designers
r
t
(Example) Hide the title bars to view the screens
as divided windows (GT16)
Touch
switch
Comment
(Example) Display a window to
confirm the user's
operation
Key window
There is no need to create keypads for numerical input and key windows for ASCII input.
When entering ASCII characters, you can switch windows to display character selection
windows.
37
Standard functions to provide users with
straightforward operation
For initial
startup &
operations
For initial
startup &
operations
GOT 1000
GT16/GT15 response performance comparison
Drawing, computing, communicationa trio of high-speed response functions
As of March 2011
[Using MELSEC Q series]
GT15
GT16
Bus connection
The GOT1000 series offers faster response in drawing, computing
and communication, reducing monitoring and operation load.
Computer link
connection
CC-Link Ver.2(ID connection)
(transient)
USB host (Type A) (for GT16 only)
 Operating systems, project data, and
resource data can be stored in a USB
memory device.
(transient)
 A USB mouse/keyboard can also be used
by connecting to the USB host interface.
<Example of the use of a USB memory>
✽ : To connect the GOT to a personal computer, use the
dedicated USB cable. For more details, see "Product list"
(page 74).
(transient)
Ethernet connection
 Ultra-high performance processing power to satisfy the most complex and demanding of
applications.
For Initial Startup &
Operations
CC-Link IE Controller
Network connection
CC-Link IE Field
Network connection
High-speed computing
✽1 : Back face layout for GT12.
 Connect the USB device (Mini-B) port to a
personal computer. You do not need to
open the panel to transfer operating
systems and project data or to use the FA
transparent function.
(transient)
 Sharp and quick drawing of complex, layered component screens, and detailed photographic
data in 65,536 colors.
 The GT16 further speeds up drawing operations.
Equipped with front USB interface ✽1
USB device (Mini-B)
MELSECNET/H connection
High-speed drawing
GOT 1000
For Designers
CPU direct
connection
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
INDEX
Easy data transmission without opening the
cabinet
Dramatically improved GOT overall response
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
To minimize production time, the GOT provides
the user with worksite-required functions
FX direct connection
Backup
PLC CPU
Restore
PLC program
file register
[FX3UC-32MT]
Faster
 High-speed communication is possible for connections with both Mitsubishi and third party PLCs.
Adjust brightness according to surroundings
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GOT 1000
Color-coded front face LED
With USB environmental protection cover installed
(standard feature) IP67f ✽
Green ON
When normal power is
being applied
Orange/green When backlight life has
blinking
expired
Orange ON
When in screen-save
mode
OFF
When power is not being
supplied
GOT 1000
GT
16 15 Maintenance time notification function
 Users do not have to bother with opening the cabinet or
changing cable connections. (When using the USB
interface)
 The FA transparent function can be used when a GOT and a
personal computer are connected via USB, RS-232 or even
using an Ethernet connection.
Mitsubishi PLC
USB/RS-232
Modem
connection
Ethernet
System
alarm
Personal computer
with programming and
setup software
Mitsubishi inverter
MELSECNET/H
Ethernet etc.
RS-422
connection
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
An optional device may be necessary.
For details, see "Selection of optional units and
devices" (page 81).
Bus connection/direct CPU connection/computer link connection/Ethernet connection
Specifications,
External Dimensions
The touch switches for
brightness adjustment
are registered in the
system library.
MELSOFT Navigator
GX Works2
GX Developer
GX Configurator-AD/DA/SC/CT/TI/TC/AS/FL/PT/QP
PX Developer
FX Configurator-FP
FX3U-ENET-L Configuration Tool
MT Works2
MT Developer
MR Configurator
MR Configurator2
FR Configurator
RT ToolBox2
NC Configurator
MX Component/MX Sheet
GX LogViewer
LCPU Logging Configuration Tool
✽ : The version of the software depends on the system configuration.
For more details, see the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
(Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3.
✽ : For the software access range when using the FA transparent function,
refer to the manual of the software being used.
(Supported only by GX Works2, MX Component/MX Sheet)
 The cumulative backlight ON time is automatically
monitored, and the operator is notified when maintenance is
required. This facilitates scheduled maintenance and
prevents system malfunctions.
Warning! Backlight needs replacement soon.

















FA transparent function
MELSEC Process
Control
For planned commodity maintenance
<Subject to be monitored> Backlight, display area,
touch keys, and
built-in flash memory
 Supported software✽
GOT 1000
 Connected with a personal computer, the GOT acts as a
transparent gateway to enable programming, start up, and
adjustment of FA equipment.
[Power LED: Color-coded message]
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
Sequence program and parameters can easily be
modified at the worksite
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
 The color of the LED on the front of the GOT unit indicates
whether the backlight is OFF or has expired.
GT
GT11
iQ Platform
 By using the script function or the status monitor function,
you can automatically adjust the brightness according to
conditions.
GT15
GT10
Backlight brightness adjustment
GT16
✽ : This does not guarantee protection in all users' environments.
Easy-to recognize backlight state
GOT 1000
 Consider the conditions in the operation environment
(daytime/nighttime etc.) and user comfort. You can adjust
the brightness of the backlight while viewing the user
screen.
Response performance
The monitor screen includes about 250
points of word devices.
For connectable PLC models, see "List of connectable models" (page 65).
For Maintenance
Personnel
High-speed communication
Mitsubishi servo amplifier
Bus connection,
direct CPU connection
Ethernet connection
SSCNETIII
Easy access to distant PLCs!
38
39
The GOT provides complete traceability for safe
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
Enhanced security system using password
control
GOT 1000
function/historical trend graph/
16 15 12 Logginghistorical
data list display
GT
GT
Display with graphs
QX10
QX41
QX41
QJ71BR11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Display with values
Temperature controller
 Data collected with the
logging function is
displayed in list format.
CF card
 The historical trend
graph for a specific
time can be displayed
by designating the
time.
Collect device data from PLCs
and temperature controllers
into the buffering area
Analyze data in the CF card
(CSV or Unicode text files)
on a personal computer
Option w
Perform authentication operation.
Use the ID card
or ID tag to log in
to the system.✽
ID card
ID tag
RFID reader
Login OK
JonSmith is now logged-in
JonSmith is now logged-in
Setting screw tightening torque (Product A)
The screen appears,
enabling operation!
Setting screw tightening torque (Product A)
Torque3
Torque1
Torque1
Change
operator
Torque2
Operator information can be
registered and edited by the GOT
operator management information
conversion tool or from the main
unit of the GOT.
Torque3
Torque2
Jon Smith is not
authorized to change
the set value
of "Torque 3".
The screen display and touch
switches can be specified
depending on the level of the
logged-in operator.
CF card etc.
✽ : Not supported by GT16 Handy
Change
operator
The GOT operator management information conversion
tool is included with GT Works3.
✽ : Combined with the operation log function, who, what,
when, and how the operator operated can be recorded.
See "Operation log function."
An optional device may be necessary.
For details, see "Selection of optional units and devices" (page 81).
Display logging data of a LCPU and high speed
data logger module on the GOT
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
16
GOT 1000
Very helpful for identification and analysis of
causes of incorrect operation
Log viewer function
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
Logging data can be collected without opening the cabinet
 Logging data collected by a LCPU or high speed data logger
module can be displayed on the GOT.
 In a USB memory device attached to the USB interface on
the front of the GOT, you can save logging data of the LCPU
and high speed data logger module. In this way, you can
collect the logging data easily with the GOT without
removing the CF card/SD card from the LCPU or high speed
data logger module.
<Data to be displayed> Data logging (historical display)
By displaying two cursors (multi-cursor), changes in data
can easily be checked.
Operation log function
<Specifiable operations>
Touch switch operation, numerical value input operation, security level
 Operations performed by operators on the GOT can be
recorded with respect to time, making it possible to check
when, what, and how the operation was performed.
change, screen change, etc.
 Recorded log data is saved in the CF card and is available
for checking on the GOT main unit or on a personal
computer (CSV or Unicode text files).
✽ : Use of this function together with the operator authentication function enables
recording of "who" has operated.
See "Operator authentication function".
Date/Time:11/14/2008 16:43:10
Display logging
data on the GOT
Operation Log Data List
File Name
Setting screw tightening torque (Product A)
Save logging
data in the USB
memory device/
CF card
Torque1
A problem
occurs
A.D.
Date Time
Screen No. Operation
Change To
Touch switch: Screen switching
Torque2
Time setting
Touch switch: Bit set
Touch switch: Screen switching
Touch switch: Bit set
Check log
on GOT
Numerical Input
Switch applications
Torque 1 set value
Date(descending)
Ladder monitor
JonSmith
Search
More detail
Function
:NUM_VAL
Numerical input
Screen No. :BASE_2
Operation
:
Torque 1 set value
Operator
User ID
Action No
Data Type
Device
Change To
Chng From
:JonSmith
:–
:1
:BIN16
:D100
:100
:10
(ID:1
)
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
Blue cursor
16 15
 List operations by type and easily search for specific device
and GOT operation state changes.
GOT 1000
 Connect a personal computer to the front USB interface of the
GOT to view the LCPU logging data with the GX LogViewer, or
to change the logging settings with the LCPU Logging
Configuration Tool. (FA transparent function)
Use GX LogViewer to view
and analyze logging data
Red cursor
GT
Specifications,
External Dimensions
The collected logging data can be searched for by time or
index No. and displayed.
GT
MELSEC Process
Control
Display logging data without a PC
iQ Platform
GT
GT10
Setting the level (authority) of operation and display for each operator can strengthen security and prevent
operation errors.
For Maintenance
Personnel
Buffering area
(GOT memory)
Historical data list display
Enter the operator
name and
password to log
into the system.
For Initial Startup &
Operations
 Scroll the view or
specify the time so that
you can check
necessary data easily.
QJ71BR11
Option w can be
used at the
same time.
Redundancy in
case of an
external
authentication
device failure.
Option q
 You can define various triggers, for example, to force
operators to log out of the system automatically when a
certain screen appears.
For Designers
 After collecting data
with the logging
function, you can
display the data in a
time series.
PLC
GT
16 15 Operator authentication function
Historical trend graph
 Logging data is saved in the built-in SRAM even during a
power failure. (For GT16 only)
 Two options are available for authentication of operators
when the system starts or the screen changes.
GOT 1000
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
 Collecting data from temperature controllers and other units
with the GOT can reduce the load on the PLC.
Q25HCPU
For maintenance
personnel
INDEX
Smooth operation from the collection of various
data to storage of time-series data
and secure operation
Ethernet
Logging
data
Q25HCPU
You do not need to have a PC onsite.
Check logging data from the GOT, and you can
take corrective actions quickly.
QX10
QX41
QX41
QJ71BR11
QJ71BR11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
LCPU
40
Record the operation log
Logging
data
Refer to the operation log file,
and investigate the problem source.
An optional device may be necessary.
For details, see "Selection of optional units and devices" (page 81).
Check log outline
Check log details
Example )
At 16:43:10 on November 14, 2008, Jon Smith
changed the Numerical Input data entry to change
the D100 value from 10 to 100 in "Torque 1 Set
Value" on the BASE_2 screen.
High-speed data logger module
41
Functions designed to support maintenance personnel
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
GT
Clear communication minimizes machine
downtime even during an alarm
GOT 1000
GT
16 15 12 Backup/restoration function
 The sequence program and parameter data of the PLC CPU
and motion controller, etc. can be backed up to the CF card
in the GOT.
Example of use q
The backup data conversion tool is included with GT Works3.
Example of use w
Make a data backup in case of a PLC or CPU failure or a dead
battery to quickly replace the faulty device and restore the system
using the backup data in such a case.
When a problem occurs, or when the PLC CPU program is updated, the
sequence program data can be transferred, analyzed, and corrected without
requiring an experienced engineer, increasing time and cost efficiency.
Office
CF card,
etc.
Sequence
Replace CPU program,
etc.
Sequence
program,
etc.
Restore
CF card,
etc.
Data transfer
qBackup
wAnalysis
and correction
CF card,
etc.
GT
Advanced alarm
16 15 12
A wider monitoring range protects even large-scale systems
 Alarm observation is possible for up to 32,767 devices with a
maximum of 255 alarm observation setting groups.
 Batch display of large amounts of alarm information in
large-scale systems, and unit-specific classification for easy
management.
Alarm observation
Alarm observation
for up to
32,767 devices
 Alarm log data can be saved in the built-in SRAM even
during a power failure.
(For GT16 only)
Alarm observation
settings
Unit "A" observation
settings
Unit "B" observation
settings
Alarm display settings
History file storage
Display of active and
recovery-completed alarms
Display of active
alarms only
Max. of 255 settings
Popup display
Rapid detection and corrective action for a wide array of alarms
Four-step alarm notification
Group-specific & level-specific displays
 Alarm occurrence conditions can be divided into 4 steps and
conveyed to the operator in an easy-to-understand,
step-by-step format.
 Alarms can be classified by group and level, with only
specified alarms being displayed.
 The four-step display makes it easy to take in and sort out
alarm conditions (information such as where, what, and
how). This enables efficient troubleshooting when multiple
problems occur.
Step Alarms by line
Alarm
occurrence
1
Upper step
Example of using the four steps
Step Alarms by unit
2
Middle step
Alarm
M0
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
Group
Transport G
Transport G
Transport G
Transport G
Transport G
Process G
Process G
Process G
Process G
Process G
Level
Mid-level
Mid-level
Mid-level
Mid-level
Major
Major
Minor
Minor
Minor
Minor
Group
Transport G alarm display
Transport G major alarm display
Combination
of level
& group
GT10
eRestore
Sequence programs saved on the CF card or other memory
devices can be edited in GX Developer after having been
converted by the backup data conversion tool.
GT
For Maintenance
Personnel
Worksite
If data is backed up
GOT 1000
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
For Initial Startup &
Operations
 Users can perform batch operation to restore the data to the
PLC CPU or motion controller.
<Objective data> Programs, parameters, device comments,
device initial value data, file registers, etc.
<Objective model> MELSEC Q-Series (excluding Q12PRH/Q25PRHCPU),
L-Series, FX-Series,
Q-Series motion controllers (SV13/SV22 only), CNC C70,
Robot controller (CRnD-700, CRnQ-700)
<Usable connection type> Bus connection, CPU direct connection,
computer link connection,
Ethernet connection
For Designers
With backup and restore, fear troubles no more
Q25HCPU
For maintenance
personnel
INDEX
Back up important sequence programs for
assurance in case of an emergency
and significantly reduce downtime!
Minor alarm display
Level
Step Alarm content
Where is
the error?
✽ : When replacing the PLC CPU, the restoration function may not be available depending on the system configuration and connection type.
 Multiple controllers can be backed up at the same time over
Ethernet. Target controllers for backup can be specified per
station.
 Besides automatic backup from touch switches, you can
specify a trigger device, a day of the week, and time for
automatic backup.
Network No. 1
Station 3
Backup data at 17:30 every Friday
17:30 on Friday
Detail step
Out of material
Material
When will
replenishment
recovery occur?
Easy-to-understand display
 The use of colors and popups produce easily recognizable alarm displays.
Display subject switching
Display switching can display only active alarms or all contents.
Ethernet
Comment display color
Comment display colors can be specified for each type of alarm status
(occurred, restored, and checked) and for each level and group, etc.
Password for increased security
Sorting
 Define a password to perform password authentication when
executing backup/restoration.
Backup multiple controllers
at the same time
Password for
backup/restoration
The sorting function permits the display order to be
defined by date & time, level, group, alarm status,
occurrence count, or downtime.
Cursor display color
The cursor display color can be specified. Alarm
displays are harder to miss.
Floating alarm display
Allows the entire text of long comments which cannot be
contained in the display area to be read.
Details display
Users can create window screens to
display details.
JPEG images can also
be displayed.
Alarm popup display
A popup display format ensures that user alarms and
system alarms are not missed. The background color
can be specified.
Backup
Multiple controllers to
be backed up can be specified.
Restore
Enter password
Improved system alarms
Support in identifying alarm causes (utility function)
 The PLC/GOT/Network monitoring subject can be specified
in advance, with only those specified alarms being
displayed.
 Alarm occurrence conditions can be displayed in a
time-series graph form.
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
Network No. 1
Station 1
Easy searching with time designation
 Specify a time and easily check the required data.
 When used with the historical trend graph, by specifying the
time at which an error appears to have occurred on the
graph, the state of alarm occurrence at that time can easily
be viewed.
Specifications,
External Dimensions
Backup
4
MELSEC Process
Control
Automatic backup is available
General step
Step Troubleshooting
Device "A" error
What kind
of error is it?
Backup multiple controllers at the same time
Network No. 1
Station 2
3
Line "A" stops
iQ Platform
PLC CPU programs can be easily changed without a personal computer at the worksite or any previous
GX Developer knowledge.
 Alarm occurrence counts can be displayed in bar-graph
form.
An optional device may be necessary. For details, see "Selection of optional units and devices" (page 81).
42
43
Superior functions and connectivity to reduce
The GOT Ladder Monitor Function is greatly improved
with the One-Touch Ladder Jump function
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
16 15
GOT 1000
Ladder monitor function
� : Supported by XGA/SVGA/VGA models.
� : QS series models can only monitor the
ladder program of a Q/L/QnA.
It cannot alter device values, for
instance.
� : FX3GCPU is not supported.
MELSEC Q/QS/L/QnA/A/FX series PLCs, CNC C70, MELDAS C6/C64
sequence programs can be monitored in a circuit diagram (ladder format).
� By setting a program name and coil number of the PLC to a
touch switch, the relevant ladder circuit block can be
displayed directly.
� Select [SP Function]-[Ladder Monitor] from the touch switch
property dialog.
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
GT
16 15
GOT 1000
Ladder editor function
Sequence programs of Mitsubishi PLC Q Series (Q
Mode) and CNC C70 can be edited in the ladder format.
� : Supported by XGA/SVGA/VGA models excluding 5.7" types.
� : QnPHCPU/QnPRHCPU are not supported.
Ladder programs can easily be edited on the GOT at the worksite
� Search and replace of devices makes it easy to locate the
point to be edited. You can also make two or more
modifications in one operation.
� Just touch the portion (e.g. contact points, vertical lines) you
want to edit in the ladder program. You can enter, change,
or delete circuit symbols and devices. You can also insert or
delete vertical lines and horizontal lines as well as columns
and rows.
� Statements and notes can be edited.
� The details edited last can be restored (undone).
Print
Screen
Edit
PLC RD.
One touch to jump
to Ladder Monitor Screen
Edit
Display Online
Find/Replace Convert
Display Online
For Maintenance
Personnel
Mon.
Menu
Find/Replace Convert
Touch the area you wish to edit.
The circuit input window is displayed.
Set PLC station No., CPU No.,
destination device, ladder search
mode (coil search/factor search),
and program file name.
(Example)
[Program name: AUTO-L1, Network
No.: 2, Station No.: 3, M100]
Exit
Enter ladder program
Changes to M200, normally
open contact!
Enter ladder program
Wide monitoring range and useful functions make maintenance work more efficient!
Insert row
<Display ladder blocks including Y10>
ST1 error
M10
Pusher LS error
M31
M20
Air pressure
error
M32
Oil pressure
error
M33
Error indicator
light: ON
Touch normally open
contact (M20) in on state
(Coil search function)
Since the source of operation halts and
interlocks can be easily checked, unexpected
problems can be detected quickly.
� Edited programs can be written from GOT to a PLC even if it
is in operation. You do not need to stop equipment in
operation to correct ladder programs.
� Remotely change the PLC's mode to "STOP" or "RUN" from
the GOT.
Grasping CPU status with PLC diagnosis
Insert column
Delete column
Long access range and convenient functions for
efficient maintenance!
� Besides a directly connected PLC, you can edit multiple
programs on another station's PLC, multi CPU, or CPU in
the same network.
� You can view current values, perform a search, and conduct
a device test.
� The one-touch ladder jump function is available. This is
helpful to identify problem causes.
� The CPU operation status and current errors can be
monitored.
An optional device may be necessary.
For details, see "Selection of optional units and devices" (page 81).
Use the GOT to monitor a motion SFC program
GOT 1000
� : Supported by XGA/SVGA/VGA models.
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
SFC monitor function
� Viewing the block list or active step list enables you to see
the complete status at a glance.
� Touch an SFC chart or a zoom window to specify a device.
Then, the Ladder Monitor function displays other sequence
programs that use the specified device.
� A device test can easily be conducted from a SFC chart or
block list.
� Save programs and comments in the CF card of the GOT.
They can be retrieved at a moment's notice.
GT
16 15
GOT 1000
Motion SFC monitor function
Block tabs
Touch a tab to display the block.
Block No. 1
Step
The active step is highlighted.
Touch the step to display the zoom
window or SFC program of the
relevant block. The SFC program
scrolls automatically along with the
progress of active steps.
Block No. 2
aSTART
tTRAN
sSTOP mSTOPMODE cCONT
An optional device may be necessary. For details, see "Selection of optional units and devices" (page 81).
Motion SFC programs of the Mitsubishi Motion
Controller (Q Series) can be monitored.
Block tabs
Touch a tab to display the block.
Real mode main
Clamp close command
Clamp close end
Lifter up
Holding point positioning
Real mode main
Zoom window
Drill B down
output
Lifter upper end
Before drill down
Before drill down
Drill A down
Drill B down
Drill A down sensor
Drill B stop timer
Transition condition
Touching a transition condition
displays a window for turning on
or off a bit device.
� : Supported by XGA/SVGA/VGA models.
SFC Chart
� Viewing the batch program monitor or the active step list
enables you to see the complete status at a glance.
� The detailed program window allows you to monitor
programs and current values of operation control steps and
transitions.
� Save programs in the CF card of the GOT. They can be
retrieved at a moment's notice.
Step/transition
The active step is highlighted.
Touch the step to display the
detailed program window. The
SFC chart scrolls automatically
along with the progress of active
steps.
P0
F100
1 //Obtain digital SW
2 DIND2010,X10
3 D2011=D2010&HFF
4 //Select data
5 D2012L=BIN(D2011)
6 //0
7 D2020L=D2012K1000L
Detailed program
window
Device
D2010
G100
Execute “change speed” when X19=ON,
M2415=ON, and M2345=ON.
Value
Format
K(±)
0
X10
FEDC BA98 7654 3210
D2011
H0000
D2012L
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 BIN
D2020L
0
F100
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
MELSEC Q/L series PLC SFC programs (MELSAP3,
MELSAP-L) can be monitored in a graphical format.
44
Delete row
Specifications,
External Dimensions
16 15
Insert row
MELSEC Process
Control
GT
Delete column
Writing into PLC while it is in operation
Error is detected here because
oil pressure (M33) is on.
Touch
Circuit symbol: Changing from normally closed
contact to normally open contact.
Device: Changing from M422 to M200
ST2 error
Monitor SFC programs on the GOT to make
troubleshooting even easier
GT
Insert column
iQ Platform
ST2 error
M20
Y10
<Display ladder blocks including coil M20>
An optional device may be necessary.
For details, see "Selection of optional units and devices" (page 81).
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
Delete row
Example of touch search (when error indicator light [Y10] is on)
GT10
� Not only connected PLCs, but also PLCs of other stations,
multiple CPUs, multiple programs in the CPU, and local
devices can be monitored.
� The programs and comments of multiple connected
controllers can be saved in a CF card, so the ladder data
can be switched and displayed without reading the data from
the PLC.(Q/L/QnA series)
� Device values and timer (T) / counter (C) set values can be
changed.
� Used together with the alarm history, a back-tracking ladder
search can be performed to find the contact which triggered
the alarm. <Defect search>
� Simply touching the Ladder Monitor screen can execute a
coil search and contact point search. (Q/L/QnA series)
<Touch search>
� The number of ladder program lines displayed on a XGA model
has increased thus it is more user-friendly than ever.
For Initial Startup &
Operations
Display the ladder block of
the coil set to the touch switch
Simple and easy!
Use the GOT to correct ladder programs, no need for a PC!
For Designers
Defect search with the One-Touch Ladder Jump function (Q/L/QnA series, CNC C70)
For maintenance
personnel
INDEX
GT
maintenance time
H
K(+)
Change speed
G102
Position holding point when X0=ON and M2001=OFF.
SFC Chart
An optional device may be necessary. For details, see "Selection of optional units and devices" (page 81).
45
Unique functions designed for Mitsubishi devices
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
At-a-glance monitoring of network status
GOT 1000
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
System monitor function
GT
16 15
� : Only monitoring, but not changing device values and other operations, is available
with the QSCPU.
� The current values and setting values of timers (T) and
counters (C) can be changed.
� Enable monitoring of network line conditions of the CC-Link
IE Controller Network, CC-Link IE Field Network,
MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, and MELSECNET2 on
a dedicated screen.
� Communication line and information from the host and other
stations can be monitored to check the communication
status.
GT
Easy startup and adjustment of a servo amplifier
GOT 1000
GT
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
GOT 1000
GT
16 15 Q series motion monitor function
16 15 Servo amplifier monitor function
� Up to 3 Q-type motion controllers can be used on a single
base, with monitoring and parameter settings possible.
� In a system which outputs pulse strings, the GOT can be
connected to a servo amplifier in a serial connection to
perform the following operations: set up, monitoring, alarm
display, diagnosis, parameter setting, and test operations.
�Access to other stations is also possible.
<Objective models>
• Q172D/Q173DCPU (-S1)
• Q172H/Q173HCPU
� : Available monitoring functions vary according to the servo amplifier type.
• Q170MCPU
• Q172(N)/Q173(N)CPU
For Initial Startup &
Operations
� The buffer memory (BM) of an intelligent function module
can be monitored and changed.
Network monitor function
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
For Designers
� The devices of PLCs, motion controllers, CNCs and robot
controllers can be monitored and changed.
Easy adjustment of Q series motion controller
GOT 1000
INDEX
Monitor and change Mitsubishi FA devices
For maintenance
personnel
� : Supported only if the Q series motion controller CPU has the SV13/SV22 OS
version.
Moreover, available functions of the Q series motion monitor vary according to the
CPU type or the servo amplifier model.
For Maintenance
Personnel
GT10
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
16 15 Intelligent module monitor function
GOT 1000
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
GOT 1000
GT
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GOT 1000
16 MELSEC-L troubleshooting function
16 15 CNC monitor function/CNC data I/O function
� The maintenance screen dedicated to LCPU is installed.
Without designing new screens and even without using a
personal computer, you can check CPU status/error
information easily.
CNC monitor function
� Connecting to a CNC (C70, C6/C64) enables functions such
as position display and alarm diagnosis, and allows tool
offset parameters to be set.
� MELSEC-A series, FX series PLC sequence programs can
be edited in list format (instruction word).
� Just touch the dedicated screen. You can jump to a function
screen such as the intelligent unit monitor to quickly take
corrective actions on site.
CNC data I/O function
� This function can be used to copy and delete CNC C70 work
programs, parameters, etc.
� Used together with the ladder monitor function, the GT16
and GT15 can edit sequence programs while viewing the
ladder data.
List editor for A/List editor for FX
� Permits minor program changes onsite, even without a
peripheral device.
� : Supported by XGA/SVGA/VGA models.
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
List editor for FX
Specifications,
External Dimensions
� When a QCPU (Q mode), a QSCPU or a LCPU is in use,
CPU operating status and existing errors can be monitored
by PLC diagnosis.
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GT
Convenient method for minor program changes
onsite
MELSEC Process
Control
� Buffer memory values of intelligent function modules (e.g.
QD75MH) and the ON/OFF status of I/O units can be
monitored and changed.
� QD65PD2 and LD77MH16 are now supported.
Easy maintenance of MELSEC-L Series
GOT 1000
GT
Save space and cost when no dedicated display
device is required
iQ Platform
Easy-to-understand display of buffer memory
values and I/O information
List editor for A
� : Supported by XGA/SVGA models.
An optional device may be necessary.
For details, see "Selection of optional units and devices" (page 81).
46
47
GT10
Powerful features even down to the most basic GOT
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GOT 1000
GOT 1000
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GOT multi-drop connection
The GT10 now offers line up of models with 5.7" and 4.7" screens, enabling more flexible screen layouts.
The 4.5" and 3.7" wide screen models are also available with a white frame.
Common software functions
GT10 includes convenient functions of more advanced
models in a compact package.
� Preinstalled OS to enable immediate use � Displaying custom startup screens
� Choose your font
� Display in a variety of languages
� A variety of alarm functions and
and comment switching function
window functions
� Screen save function
� The recipe function and multi-action switch
for reducing sequence program load
5.7inch
Mitsubishi PLC
MELSEC Series
FX, A, QnA or Q
White frame
Black frame
� : See relevant manuals for connectable hardware and software versions.
� : GOT multi-drop connection is also available for GT16, GT15, and GT11.
GOT 1000
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
Connection to Mitsubishi inverters and AC servos
� 160 × 64 dots
� Analog touch panel
inch � Minimum touch key size: 2 × 2 dots
� Maximum number of touch keys: 50/Screen
3.7
Monitoring
Parameter
adjustment
Can connect
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GOT 1000
FA transparent function
When a GOT and a personal computer are connected, the FA
devices can be programmed, started and adjusted via GOT.
axes of
up to
Mitsubishi
general-purpose
AC servos with a
total extension of
Monitoring
Operation
commands
Can connect
10
Mitsubishi
up to
general-purpose
inverters with a
total extension of
500m.
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GOT 1000
Supporting the GT Works3 simulator function
Created screens can be easily debugged without an actual machine.
500m.
C li ck !
Easily
debug
with a PC
� : See relevant manuals for connectable hardware and software versions.
Using the GX Works2 simulator,
the sequence program can also
be debugged simultaneously.
� : Supported with GT Works3 Ver. 1.22Y or later.
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
The GT1050, GT1055, and F940GOT are of the same size, 5.7", with
the same LCD, QVGA 320 × 240 dots. They are highly compatible.
Data transfer for improved user-friendliness and flexibility
Optional memory board and memory loader provide a convenient way to download project data and operating system data to
terminals without a PC. Furthermore when downloading to multiple units speed and efficiency is increased.
Connect a PC with
PLC via GOT.
� Install a memory board
storing the newest data
Data transfer memory board GT10-50FMB
34.8
320 dots
240 dots
320 dots
240 dots
GT1050/GT1055
Basic OS,
communication driver,
and project data
Read/Write
36
The GT1030 has the same panel mounting dimensions as the
F930GOT yet with improved resolution�2.
F930GOT GT1030
Resolution
Direct connection with FX/Q/L/QnACPU
Q/L/QnACPU serial communication unit connection etc.
×1.4
GT1030 288 dots
F930 240 dots
80
dots
96
dots
48
Memory loader GT10-LDR
FA transparent
×1.4
� Has a compact design (70 × 110 mm),
where the GOT transfer cable can be
stored inside the body.
� Can write the standard monitor OS,
communication driver, and project data.
� Can read the project data and
resource data.
� Offers simple switch type operation,
where the write-protect switch
prevents erroneous reading.
� Does not require a power supply as
power is supplied from the GOT or
personal computer.
At the worksite
On a
business trip
110
�2 : 1.44 times compared
with the F930GOT
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
� QVGA 320 × 240 dots in each model
� Data can be read or written as shown in the utility window below.
� Data is written at startup when two points are pressed on the screen.
Specifications,
External Dimensions
F940GOT
GOT 1000
MELSEC Process
Control
�1 : When the F940GOT is replaced with the GT1050/GT1055 or when the F930GOT is
replaced with the GT1030
Objects
Comment registration (basic comments and comment groups)
Parts registration
Data computing function
Offset function
Security function
Lamp indications
Touch switches
Numeric indications and input
ASCII indications and input
Clock function (GT1050, GT1055, GT1040, GT1045, GT1030:
Integrated clock, GT1020: Read from the PLC clock)
Comment displays
Alarm list and alarm history
Parts display
Panel meters
Trend graphs, kinked line graphs, bar graphs, statistic crossbar graphs, statistic circular graphs
Status monitor function
Recipe function (4,000 points)
Time action function
� : See the manual for details.
32
GOT 1000
Similar dimensions to the F900 Series allows for simple
replacement without panel design changes�1
Straight lines, continuous lines, rectangular, polygons, chamfered quadrangles,
circles, ellipses, arcs, elliptic arcs, circular sectors, and elliptic sectors
Division indication
Painting
Images (BMP/DXF)
iQ Platform
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
Drawing and
graphics
GT10
4.5
Screen (base: max. 1,024 screens, window: max. 512 windows)
Fonts (standard (6 × 8 dots: Gothic, 16 dots: Gothic, 12 dots: Gothic
[except GT1020])/high quality/ TrueType/Windows)
Screen switching function, screen call-up function, language switching function,
password, system information, setting connected devices, and startup logo
White frame
Direct connection to Mitsubishi inverters and AC servo
amplifiers with RS-485 makes it easy to adjust parameter
settings etc.
� 288 × 96 dots
� Matrix touch panel
inch � Minimum touch key size: 16 × 16 dots
� Maximum number of touch keys: 50/Screen
High contrast
product released!
Common
For Maintenance
Personnel
Black frame
Functionality
For Initial Startup &
Operations
4.7inch
� QVGA 320 × 240 dots
� Matrix touch panel
� Minimum touch key size: 16 × 16 dots
� Maximum number of touch keys: 50/Screen
For Designers
By using the serial multi-drop connection unit, the
GT01-RS4-M, up to 16 GOT1000 units can be connected.
The total distance can be up to 500m.
� QVGA 320 × 240 dots
� Matrix touch panel
� Minimum touch key size: 16 × 16 dots
� Maximum number of touch keys: 50/Screen
GOT 1000
INDEX
Various screen sizes
GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
At the desk
Visiting a customer
70
For copying series
production units
Standard monitor OS,
communication driver
project data,
resource data�1
Read/Write
PC
(GT Works3)
USB cable (1m) packed
together
GT10-LDR
Standard monitor OS,
communication driver
project data,
resource data�2
At worksite
Read/Write
RS-232 transfer cable (0.2m)
incorporated
GT1020/GT1030
�1 : Only the standard monitor OS and communication driver can be written and only resource
data can be read.
�2 : Only resource data can be read.
49
Real-time multi CPU access with the iQ Platform
"iQ Platform," the next generation
integrated platform
Based on the information such as tags defined by PX Developer, process control monitor screens for the GOT can be created
automatically, greatly reducing the time required for screen design.
GT Works3 can then customize the automatically created screens.
By using the GT Works3 simulator function and GX Simulator, the operation of programs and screen data can be confirmed on a
personal computer even without an actual machine.
�: For details on the compatible software version and functions, see the PX Developer Operating Manual.
[Screen examples that can be created automatically]
For Maintenance
Personnel
Robot
qPX Developer creates GOT process control monitor screens automatically
C controller
QX41
QJ71LP21
Q62AD-GH
Q62AD-GH
Tuning screen
Alarm list screen
Trend graph screen
GT10
Control panel screen
Q61P
For Initial Startup &
Operations
CNC
Four benefits that MELSEC process control and GOT1000 (GT16/GT15) can offer.
For Designers
PLCs, motion controllers, CNCs, robot controllers, and C controllers are
integrated into one as a controller compatible with the iQ Platform.
The GOT1000 can integrate different types of monitor units
that were previously connected to each controller.
Motion controller
"MELSEC process control" is used in a wide range of applications
from device process control to plant process control.
The GOT1000 can be used as the monitoring interface.
When using Mitsubishi FA devices, the outstanding interaction allows
a high-performance process control monitor system to be created easily.
integrated Q
improved Quality
intelligent & Quick
innovation & Quest
With high speed control and convenience fully assured,
controllers compatible with the iQ Platform and
the GOT1000 are the keys to higher productivity at lower costs.
PLC
MELSEC process control
MELSEC will change process control.
From dedicated systems to PLCs.
INDEX
Mitsubishi FA Integrated Platform
optimizes front line of production
Create an easy-to-operate process control system.
GOT1000 flexibly interacts with process control.
Q62AD-GH
POWER
20
10
15
1
PULL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
wUtilizing GOT1000 & GT SoftGOT1000 data
Only by using GT Works3 and PX Developer, a process control monitor system can be developed for both the worksite (GOT1000)
and the remote monitoring location (GT SoftGOT1000).
Screen data can be shared to monitor screens efficiently.
Controller compatible with iQ Platform
Worksite
GOT1000
in the monitoring location
MELSEC Process
Control
Monitoring
location
at the worksite
The screen design software "GT Works3" enables
creation of monitor screens for each controller.
�: For more details, see "GT SoftGOT1000" (page 26)
wReducing spare parts cost
A single GOT1000 can integrate several types of monitor
units connected to each controller, greatly reducing
equipment cost.
eProcess control parts library
Library of process control parts
has been added. This allows a
process control graphic screen to
be created easily.
ePowerful support for maintenance
The GOT1000 has a variety of useful maintenance
functions such as the "Q motion monitor function" and
"CNC monitor function," very capable of and reliable for
troubleshooting. (GT16 and GT15 only)
50
Robot sample drawing data
CNC monitor function
� : Connectable models and usable functions vary depending on the GOT main unit.
For more details, see "List of connectable models" (page 65), "Function list" (page 70) and "Notes for use" (page 81).
Motorized valve
Piston valve
Diaphragm
type 3-way valve
Pump
Control loop
Flow meter
rVarious GOT1000 functions
are available for process and
duplex CPU
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
� Touch switches on the GT SoftGOT1000 can call up
screens such as face plates and the alarm list of the
PX Developer monitor tool.
� Since GOT1000 screen data can be used for
GT SoftGOT1000 without modification, no screens
need to be created just for the monitoring location.
Specifications,
External Dimensions
� Excellent anti-environment performance (IP67f) for operation
in various types of worksites.
� The VESA mount adapter is available.
qReducing engineering cost
iQ Platform
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
15
The various GOT1000 functions usable with
process and duplex CPUs support the
maintenance work of the process control
system.
� Operation log function
� Operator authentication function
� Backup/restoration function, etc.
51
Specifications
Power supply specifications
GT16
Specification
General specifications
Vibration resistance
Impact resistance
Operating atmosphere
Operating altitude✽2
Installation location
Overvoltage category✽3
Contamination level✽4
Cooling method
Grounding
✽1 : The maximum operating ambient temperature should be 5°C lower than
that shown in the table on the left when connecting to a multimedia unit
(GT16M-MMR), MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25
or GT15-J71BR13) or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13).
✽2 : Do not operate or store the GOT unit in pressurized environments where
the pressure exceeds 0m elevation atmospheric pressure, as this could
result in abnormal operation.
Do not pressurize inside the control panel for air purge cleaning. The
pressure could raise the surface sheet, making the touch panel difficult
to operate or causing the sheet to come off.
✽3 : Assuming that the device is connected at some point between a public
power distribution network and local system equipment.
Category2 applies to devices that are supplied with power from fixed
equipment. The surge withstand voltage is 2,500V for devices with
ratings up to 300V.
✽4 : Index that indicates the level of foreign conductive matter in the operating
environment of the device. Contamination level 2 denotes an environment
contaminated only by non-conductive matter which may, under certain
conditions, become temporarily conductive due to condensation.
✽5 : 0 to 40°C for GT1665HS
✽6 : Excluding GT1665HS
Do not use or store the GOT under direct sun light or in an environment
with excessively high temperature, dust, humidity or vibration.
For inquiries relating to products which conform to UL, cUL, and CE
directives and shipping directives, please contact your local sales office.
Item
Inrush current
Permissible instantaneous failure time
Noise resistance
Screen size
Resolution
Display size
GT1675M-STBA
GT1675M-STBD
GT1685M-STBA
GT1685M-STBD
GT1675M-VTBA
GT1675M-VTBD
TFT color LCD (high-brightness, wide viewing angle)
15"
12.1"
XGA: 1024 × 768 [dots] SVGA: 800 × 600 [dots]
304.1(W) × 228.1(H)[mm] 246(W) × 184.5(H)[mm]
TFT color LCD
Battery Backed up data
Life
4,096 colors
65,536 colors
• Right/left: 70°, Up/down: 65°
(Function version D or later)
• Right/left/up/down: 88°
(Function version C or earlier)
450 [cd/m2]
1 [m]
Right/left/up/down: 70°
0 to 4 [sec]
Temperature difference to be 4°C or more
between human body and ambient air
16 colors
Right/left: 45°, Up: 30°, Down: 20°
Right/left: 80°,
Up: 80°, Down: 60°
200 [cd/m2]
4-step adjustment
400 [cd/m2]
8-step adjustment
Approx. 52,000 hours
(operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
Approx. 43,000 hours
(operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
Screen size
Resolution
Display size
Life
Backlight
Life✽3
Touch
panel
Human
sensor
Type
Key size
No. of simultaneous touch points
Life✽11
Detection distance
Detection range
Detection delay time
Detection temperature
Memory C drive
✽5
Backed up data
Life
Ethernet
Built-in
interface
USB
CF card
100,000 times
3.47 to 8.38 secs/day (operating ambient temperature: 25°C)✽12
GT15-BAT type lithium battery
Clock data, maintenance time notification data, system log data and SRAM user area (500KB)
Approx. 5 years (operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
USB (full-speed 12Mbps), host 1ch Connector shape: TYPE-A
Application: USB mouse/keyboard connection, USB memory data transfer and storage FAT16 format: max. 2GB, FAT32 format: max. 32GB✽13
USB (full-speed 12Mbps), device 1ch
Connector shape: Mini-B Application: Connection to personal computer
(project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
Connector shape: TYPE 1
Compact flash slot, 1ch
Application: Data transfer, data storage, GOT startup
FAT16 format: max. 2GB, FAT32 format: max. 32GB✽13
397(W) × 296(H) × 61(D)[mm] 316(W) × 242(H) × 52(D)[mm]
External dimensions
383.5(W) × 282.5(H)[mm] 302(W) × 228(H)[mm]
Panel cut dimensions
Weight (excl. mounting brackets)
5.0[kg]
2.7[kg]
GT Works3 Version1.31H or later
2.1[kg]
GT1665M-VTBA
GT1665M-VTBD
GT1662-VNBA
GT1662-VNBD
TFT color LCD
(high-brightness, wide viewing angle)
TFT color LCD
–
2.3[kg]
GT Works3 Version1.31H or later
(not supported by GT Works2/GT Designer 2)
GT Works3 Version1.31H or later
TFT color LCD
(high-brightness, wide viewing angle)
5.7"
VGA: 640 × 480 [dots]
171(W) × 128(H)[mm]
115(W) × 86(H)[mm]
6.5"
132.5(W) × 99.4(H)[mm]
USB
Protective construction
External dimensions
Panel cut dimensions
Weight (excl. mounting brackets)
Extension interface
(GT1655 at left side only)
Video/RGB interface
(excluding GT16MM-VNBM, GT1655)
(
3.47 to 8.38 secs/day
-3.61 to 2.16 secs/day
(operating ambient temperature: 25°C)✽12 (operating ambient temperature: 25°C)✽12
GT15-BAT type lithium battery
GT11-50BAT type lithium battery GT15-BAT type lithium battery
Clock data, maintenance time notification data, system log data and SRAM user area (500KB)
Approx. 5 years (operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
Data transfer system: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T, 1ch
Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack)
Application: Communication with connected devices,
gateway function, connection to personal computer
(project data read/write, OS installation,
FA transparent function, MES interface function)
RS-232, RS-422/485, 1ch,
each (When using, select
one of the channels.)
Transmission speed:
115200/57600/38400/19200/
9600/4800bps
Connector shape:
Square, 42-pin (male)
Application: Communication
with connected devices
Data transfer system:
100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T, 1ch
Connector shape:
Square, 42-pin (male)
Application:
Communication with connected
devices, gateway function,
connection to personal computer
(project data read/write, OS
installation, FA transparent function)
USB (full-speed 12Mbps), host 1ch Connector shape: TYPE-A USB (full-speed 12Mbps), host 1ch Connector
Application: USB mouse/keyboard connection, USB memory data transfer shape: TYPE-A Application: USB memory data
transferand storage FAT16 format: max. 2GB,
and storage FAT16 format: max. 2GB, FAT32 format: max. 32GB ✽13
FAT32 format: max. 32GB✽13
Compact flash slot, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE 1
Application: Data transfer, data storage, GOT startup FAT16 format: max. 2GB, FAT32 format: max. 32GB ✽13
1ch for optional function board installation
2ch for communication unit/optional unit installation
1ch for communication
unit/optional unit installation
–
–
Single tone (tone length adjustable)
Front: IP67f ✽6 In panel: IP2X
241(W) × 190(H) × 52(D)[mm]
227(W) × 176(H)[mm]
1.7[kg]
1.8[kg]
Applicable software packages GT Works3 Version1.31H or later
IP65f ✽9
(when external connection
cable is connected)
267(W) × 135(H) × 60(D)[mm] 201(W) × 230(H) × 97(D)[mm]
–
153(W) × 121(H)[mm]
1.2[kg] (main unit only)
1.0[kg]
GT Works3 Version1.31H or later (not supported by GT Works2/GT Designer 2)
Dip switch for setting
terminal resistance
(inside cover)
)
Display, touch key
USB interface
(host)
RS-422/485 interface
Power supply terminal
RS-232 interface
Ethernet interface
✽This illustration shows GT1695.
GT1665HS (Handy)
Interface
protective cover
USB interface
(device)
USB interface
(host)
100,000 times
3.47 to 8.38 secs/day
(operating ambient temperature: 25°C)✽12
CF card access switch
Human sensor
GT1695,
GT1685 only
USB interface
(device)
15MB built-in flash memory
(for saving project data and OS)
CF card access LED
Optional function
board interface
Cold-cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable), with backlight OFF
LED (not replaceable), with backlight OFF detection
detection function. Backlight off time and screen save time can be set. function. Backlight off and screen save time can be set.
–
Approx. 50,000 hours or more Approx. 40,000 hours or more Approx. 70,000 hours or more
–
(Time for display intensity reaches 50% at operating ambient temperature of 25°C)
Analog resistive type
Min. 2 × 2 [dots] (per key)
Simultaneous touch prohibited✽4 (1 point only)
1,000,000 times or more (operating force 0.98N or less)
–
–
–
–
15MB built-in flash memory 11MB built-in flash memory
(for saving project data and OS) (for saving project data and OS)
S.MODE
(OS installation switch)
CF card interface
Battery holder
Reset switch
POWER LED
USB (full-speed 12Mbps), device 1ch Connector shape: Mini-B
Application: Connection to personal computer
(project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
CF card
GT1695/GT1685/GT167M/GT166M/GT1655
Approx. 43,000 hours Approx. 52,000 hours Approx. 50,000 hours Approx. 41,000 hours
(operating ambient temperature: 25°C) (operating ambient temperature: 25°C) (operating ambient temperature: 25°C) (operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
RS-422/485
Ethernet
Component names
GT1665HS-VTBD
8.4"
Buzzer output
241(W) × 190(H) × 52(D)[mm]
227(W) × 176(H)[mm]
1.7[kg]
GT1655-VTBD
RS-422/485, 1ch
Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
Connector shape: 14-pin (female)
Application: Communication with connected devices
Extension unit✽7
303(W) × 214(H) × 49(D)[mm]
289(W) × 200(H)[mm]
–
–
0.5 to 0.8 [N·m]
RS-232, 1ch
Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)
Application: Communication with connected devices,
connection to personal computer
(project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
Optional function board
1ch for optional function board installation
2ch for communication unit/optional unit installation
Single tone (tone length adjustable)
Front: IP67f ✽6 In panel: IP2X
Extension unit✽7
Buzzer output
Protective construction
Applicable software packages
Built-in
interface
Data transfer system: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T, 1ch✽8
Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack)
Application: Communication with connected devices, gateway function, connection to personal computer
(project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function, MES interface function)
Optional function board
52
Within 5ms
Noise voltage 1000Vp-p,
noise width 1ms
by noise simulator with
noise frequency 30 to 100Hz
Reset switch
S.MODE
(OS installation switch)
Key type selector switch
CF card interface
CF card access LED
CF card access switch
Hook for wall mounting
Emergency
stop switch
Display,
touch key
POWER
LED
Operation
switches (6 switches)
Hand strap
Grip switch
External interface
Rear face protective cover
RS-232 interface
RS-422/485 interface
Dip switch for setting
terminal resistance
Battery
(All inside cover)
✽1 : On LCD screens, bright dots (permanently lit) and black dots (not to be lit) generally appear.
Because the large number of display elements exist on an LCD screen, it is not possible to
reduce appearance of the bright and black dots to zero.
Note that the existence of bright and black dots is a standard characteristic of LCD
screens, and it does not mean that the products are defective or damaged.
✽2 : LCD panels have characteristics of tone reversal. Note that even within the indicated view
angles, the screen display may not be clear enough depending on the display color.
✽3 : Using the GOT screen save/backlight OFF functions prevents screen burn-in and extends backlight life.
✽4 : An analog resistive touch display is used. When 2 points on the screen are touched
simultaneously, if a switch is located the middle of the 2 points then the switch will be
activated. Therefore, avoid touching 2 points on the screen simultaneously.
✽5 : The memory is ROM that permits overwriting of new data without having to delete the existing data.
✽6 : With the USB environmentally protective cover is on, pressing firmly the portion marked "["
makes it conform to IP67f. (The USB interface conforms to IP2X when a USB cable or a USB
memory is connected.) However, this does not guarantee protection in all users' environments.
The unit may not be used in an environment where it is exposed to splashing oil or
chemicals for a long time or it is soaked with oil mist.
✽7 : Where more than one extension unit, barcode reader, and RFID controller are used, the sum
of their current consumptions should be within the current level which the GOT can supply.
For the currents which the extension units, barcode reader, and RFID controller consume
and the current level which the GOT can supply, see "Notes for use" (page 81).
✽8 : The function version A of GT1695/GT1685 is not compatible with 10BASE-T.
✽9 : The degree of protection is not guaranteed under all users' environmental conditions. If the interface
protective cover or the rear face protective cover is removed, the specification does not apply.
✽10 : If necessary, use a stylus pen meeting the following specifications. (excluding GT1665HS)
• Material: Polyacetal resin • Pen point radius: 0.8mm or more
✽11: When using a stylus pen, it will be 100,000 times or more (operating force 0.98N max.).
Since the touch panel is a consumable product structurally, it may not be used even fewer
than above, depending on the usage method and environment.
✽12 : If the operating ambient temperature is other than 25°C, operation errors may increase.
✽13 : USB memory and CF cards that can store more than 2GB are available for the GT16 with
the following versions of OSs installed.
• Boot OS version: 05.09.00AF or later
• Standard monitor OS version: 05.09.00 or later
With OSs earlier than the above versions, the GOT cannot correctly recognize the USB
memory and the CF card that store more than 2GB.
If the above versions of OSs are not installed, install the OSs on the GOT by using GT
Designer3 with version 1.17T or later. GT Designer2 versionM is not compatible with USB
memory and CF cards that can store more than 2GB.
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
RS-422/485
Within 10ms
Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1µs
by noise simulator with noise frequency 25 to 60Hz
RS-232✽7
15MB built-in flash memory
(for saving project data and OS)
Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)
Application: Communication with connected devices, connection to personal computer
(project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
RS-422/485, 1ch Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
Connector shape: 14-pin (female) Application: Communication with connected devices
30A or less
(2ms, at max. load)
Within 20ms (100VAC or more)
Life (No. of writings)
Internal clock accuracy
Battery
11MB built-in flash memory
(for saving project data and OS)
67A or less
(1ms, at max. load)
Noise voltage 1500Vp-p, noise width 1µs
by noise simulator with noise frequency 25 to 60Hz
16-dot standard font: 40 chars. × 30 lines (2-byte)
No. of displayed
12-dot standard font: 53 chars. × 40 lines (2-byte)
Display characters
✽1
16 colors
65,536 colors
Display colors
65,536 colors
Right/left: 80°, Up: 80°, Down: 60° Right/left: 45°, Up/Down: 20° Up/down/right/left: 80° Right/left: 80°, Up: 60°, Down: 80°
View angle✽2
2
2
2
350 [cd/m ]
550 [cd/m2]
600 [cd/m ]
200 [cd/m ]
Intensity
Intensity adjustment 8-step adjustment
4-step adjustment
8-step adjustment
✽10
–
15MB built-in flash memory
(for saving project data and OS)
Type
RS-232, 1ch
RS-232✽7
12A or less
(55ms, at max. load)
Specifications,
External Dimensions
Life (No. of writings)
Internal clock accuracy
16-dot standard font: 40 chars. × 30 lines (2-byte)
12-dot standard font: 53 chars. × 40 lines (2-byte)
11.6W or less
8.2W or less
MELSEC Process
Control
Life✽11
✽5
8.4"
SVGA: 800 × 600 [dots]
171(W) × 128(H)[mm]
Cold-cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable), with backlight OFF detection function.
Backlight off time and screen save time can be set.
Approx. 50,000 hours or more
(Time for display intensity reaches 50% at operating ambient temperature of 25°C)
Analog resistive type
Min. 2 × 2 [dots] (per key)
Simultaneous touch prohibited✽4 (1 point only)
1,000,000 times or more (operating force 0.98N or less)
–
–
–
No. of simultaneous touch points
Memory C drive
GT1665M-STBA
GT1665M-STBD
16-dot standard font:
50 chars. × 37 lines (2-byte)
12-dot standard font:
66 chars. × 50 lines (2-byte)
Approx. 43,000 hours
(operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
Type
Key size
Detection distance
Detection range
Human
Detection delay time
sensor
Detection
temperature
Right/left/up/down
Approx. 52,000 hours
(operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
Life✽3
✽10
12A or less
(75ms, at max. load)
16W or less
14W or less
38W or less
27W or less
Performance specifications
TFT color LCD
(high-brightness, wide viewing angle)
10.4"
VGA: 640 × 480 [dots]
211(W) × 158(H)[mm]
SVGA: 800 × 600 [dots]
470 [cd/m2]
400 [cd/m2]
8-step adjustment
Backlight
Touch
panel
40W or less
26W or less
24VDC (+10%, -15%)
iQ Platform
Life
450 [cd/m2]
Right/left: 80°,
Up: 60°, Down: 80°
GT1672-VNBA
GT1672-VNBD
GT1665HS-VTBD
GT10
Intensity
Intensity adjustment
Right/left: 75°,
Up: 50°, Down: 60°
60W or less
30W or less
Tightening torque (terminal
block's terminal screws)
Item
GT1675-VNBA
GT1675-VNBD
GT1655-VTBD
24VDC (+25%, -20%)
–
–
Specification
16-dot standard font:
No. of displayed 64 chars. × 48 lines (2-byte) 16-dot standard font: 50 chars. × 37 lines (2-byte)
12-dot standard font:
characters
12-dot standard font: 66 chars. × 50 lines (2-byte)
85 chars. × 64 lines (2-byte)
Display
✽1
Display colors
65,536 colors
View angle✽2
28A or less
(4ms, at max. load)
GT1685M-STBD
For Maintenance
Personnel
Type
GT1695M-XTBD
1500VAC for 1 minute between power supply terminal and ground
500VDC for 1 minute between power supply terminal and ground
Withstand voltage
10MΩ or higher with an insulation resistance tester (500VDC between power supply terminal and ground)
Insulation resistance
Applicable wire size
0.75 to 2 [mm2]
Clamp terminal
Clamp terminals for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A
Specification
GT1695M-XTBA
GT1695M-XTBD
GT1685M-STBA
100 to 240VAC (+10%, -15%)
Input power supply voltage
Input frequency
50/60Hz ±5%
Input maximum apparent power 150VA (at max. load) 110VA (at max. load) 100VA (at max. load)
Power consumption
64W or less
46W or less
39W or less
With backlight off
38W or less
32W or less
30W or less
Performance specifications
Item
GT1695M-XTBA
For Initial Startup &
Operations
0°C to 50°C✽5
0°C to 55°C✽5
-20°C to 60°C
10 to 90%RH, no condensation
10 to 90%RH, no condensation
Frequency
Acceleration Half amplitude Sweep count
Conforming Under intermittent
5 to 8.4Hz
–
3.5mm
10 times each in X,
to JIS B 3502 vibration
Y and Z directions
8.4 to 150Hz
9.8m/s2
–
and
–
5 to 8.4Hz
1.75mm
IEC 61131-2 Under continuous
–
vibration
4.9m/s2
8.4 to 150Hz
–
Conforming to JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2 (147m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y and Z directions)
No oily smoke, corrosive gas or combustible gas, less conductive dust,
away from direct sunlight (the same in storage)
2000m or less
In control panel✽6
2 or lower
2 or less
Self-cooling
Type D grounding (100Ω or less). Connect to panel if unable to ground.
For Designers
Specification
GT1675M-STBD
GT1675M-VTBD
GT1675-VNBD
GT1672-VNBD
GT1665M-STBD
GT1665M-VTBD
GT1662-VNBD
INDEX
Item
Operating ambient Display
temperature✽1
Other than display
Storage ambient temperature
Operating ambient humidity
Storage ambient humidity
GT1675M-STBA
GT1675M-VTBA
GT1675-VNBA
GT1672-VNBA
GT1665M-STBA
GT1665M-VTBA
GT1662-VNBA
53
Specifications
Power supply specifications
GT15
Specification
General specifications
Vibration resistance✽3
Impact resistance
Operating atmosphere
Operating altitude✽4
Installation location
Overvoltage category✽5
Contamination level✽6
Cooling method
Grounding
✽1 : The maximum operating ambient temperature should be 5°C lower than that
shown in the table on the left when connecting to a MELSECNET/H
communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25 or GT15-J71BR13) or CC-Link
communication unit (GT15-J61BT13).
✽2 : Water bulb temperature for STN display type must be 39°C or lower.
✽3 : Refer to the Communication Unit User's Manual for vibration resistance
specifications when using the MELSECNET/10 communication unit
(GT15-75J71LP23-Z or GT15-75J71BR13-Z) or CC-Link communication unit
(GT15-75J61BT13-Z). (The specifications of communication units are different
from those of the GOT main unit.)
✽4 : Do not operate or store the GOT unit in pressurized environments where the
pressure exceeds 0m elevation atmospheric pressure, as this could result in
abnormal operation.
Do not pressurize inside the control panel for air purge cleaning. The pressure
could raise the surface sheet, making the touch panel difficult to operate or
causing the sheet to come off.
✽5 : Assuming that the device is connected at some point between a public power
distribution network and local system equipment.
Category2 applies to devices that are supplied with power from fixed equipment.
The surge withstand voltage is 2,500V for devices with ratings up to 300V.
✽6 : Index that indicates the level of foreign conductive matter in the operating
environment of the device.
Contamination level 2 denotes an environment contaminated only by
non-conductive matter which may, under certain conditions, become temporarily
conductive due to condensation.
Do not use or store the GOT under direct sun light or in an environment
with excessively high temperature, dust, humidity or vibration.
For inquiries relating to products which conform to UL, cUL, and CE
directives and shipping directives, please contact your local sales office.
Performance specifications
Specification
GT1595-XTBA
GT1595-XTBD
TFT color LCD
Display
Right/left: 75°,
Up: 50°,
Down: 60°
256 colors
16 colors
Right/left: 45°,
Up: 30°,
Down: 20°
Right/left/up/down:
85°
65,536 colors
16 colors
Right/left: 65°,
Up: 50°,
Down: 60°
Right/left: 45°,
Up: 20°,
Down: 20°
GT1585V: 350 [cd/m2]
400 [cd/m2]
GT1585: 400 [cd/m2]
8-step adjustment
200 [cd/m2]
380 [cd/m2]
150 [cd/m2]
4-step adjustment
8-step adjustment
4-step adjustment
380 [cd/m2]
Approx. 50,000 hours
(operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
28W or less
32W or less
(1330mA/24VDC)
30W or less
(1250mA/24VDC)
30W or less
(1250mA/24VDC)
Inrush current
Approx. 41,000 hours
(operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
Within 20ms (100VAC or more)
Within 10ms
Noise resistance
Noise voltage 1500Vp-p, noise width 1µs
by noise simulator with noise frequency 25 to 60Hz
Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1µs
by noise simulator with noise frequency 25 to 60Hz
Withstand voltage
1500VAC for 1 minute
between power supply terminal and ground
500VDC for 1 minute between power supply terminal and ground
Insulation resistance
Applicable wire size
Clamp terminal
10MΩ or higher with an insulation resistance tester (500VDC between power supply terminal and ground)
0.75 to 2 [mm2]
Clamp terminals for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A
Tightening torque (terminal
block's terminal screws)
0.5 to 0.8 [N·m]
Item
Screen size
Resolution
Display size
Simultaneous touch
prohibited✽5
(1 point only)
✽1 ✽2
Contrast adjustment
Intensity
Intensity adjustment
Backed up data
Life
Built-in
USB
interface
CF card
Optional function board
Extension unit✽8
Buzzer output
Protective construction
External dimensions
(without USB port cover)
Panel cut dimensions
Weight
(excl. mounting brackets)
Applicable software package
Key size
✽9
No. of simultaneous
touch points
sensor
5MB built-in flash memory
(for saving project data and OS)
9MB built-in flash
5MB built-in flash
memory (for saving memory (for saving
project data and OS) projectdata and OS)
397(W) × 296(H) × 61(D) [mm] 316(W) × 242(H) × 52(D) [mm]
303(W) × 214(H) × 49(D) [mm]
241(W) × 190(H) × 52(D) [mm]
383.5(W) × 282.5(H) [mm] 302(W) × 228(H) [mm]
289(W) × 200(H) [mm]
227(W) × 176(H) [mm]
GT1575V: 2.3 [kg]
GT1575: 2.4 [kg]
2.4 [kg]
GT Works3 Version1.31H or later
2.3 [kg]
✽6
Life (No. of writings)
Battery Backed up data
Life
RS-232✽8
USB (full-speed 12Mbps), device 1ch
Connector shape: Mini-B Application: Connection to personal computer (project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
Compact flash slot, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE
Application: Data transfer, data storage, GOT startup FAT16 format: max. 2GB, FAT32 format: not usable
1ch for optional function board installation
2ch for communication unit/optional unit installation
Single tone (tone length adjustable)
Front: IP67f ✽7 In panel: IP2X
2.8 [kg]
Detection
temperature
Memory C drive
RS-232, 1ch Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)
Application: Communication with connected devices, connection to personal computer (project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
5.0 [kg]
Touch
panel
Life
100,000 times
GT15-BAT type lithium battery (optional)
Clock data and maintenance time notification data
Approx. 5 years (operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
Life (No. of writings)
RS-232✽8
Type
Detection distance
Detection range
Human
Detection delay time
–
1.9 [kg]
GT1555-QTBD
TFT color LCD
(high-brightness, wide viewing angle)
VGA: 640 × 480 [dots]
Built-in USB
interface
CF card
Optional function board
Extension unit✽8
Buzzer output
Protective construction
External dimensions
(without USB port cover)
Panel cut dimensions
GT1555-QSBD
GT1550-QLBD
STN color LCD
STN monochrome
(black/white) LCD
4,096 colors
Right/left: 55°,
Up: 65°,
Down: 70°
65,536 colors
Right/left: 80°,
Right/left: 70°,
Up: 80°,
Up: 70°,
Down: 70°
Down: 50°
–
350 [cd/m2]
GT1595/GT1585/GT157M/GT156M
Reset switch
5.7"
QVGA: 320 × 240 [dots]
115(W) × 86(H) [mm]
16-dot standard font: 20 chars. × 15 lines (2-byte)
12-dot standard font: 26 chars. × 20 lines (2-byte)
Monochrome 16 gray scale
Right/left: 45°,
Up: 20°,
Down: 40°
16-step adjustment
220 [cd/m2]
380 [cd/m2]
400 [cd/m2]
Extension interface
Optional function
board interface
Power supply
terminal
Human sensor
GT1595 and
GT1585(V) only
(
)
POWER LED
S.MODE
(OS installation switch)
(GT1595 only)
CF card interface
Battery holder
CF card access LED
CF card access switch
Video/RGB interface
GT1585V and
GT1575V only
(
)
Display, touch key
USB interface
8-step adjustment
Approx. 50,000 hours
(operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
Life
No. of touch
keys
1,000,000 times or more (operating force 0.98N or less) ✽10
–
–
–
GT1555-VTBD
Cold-cathode fluorescent tube (not replaceable), with backlight OFF detection function.
Backlight off time and screen save time can be set.
Approx. 75,000 hours or more
Approx. 58,000 hours or more
(Time for display intensity reaches 50% at operating ambient temperature of 25°C)
Matrix resistive type
1200 keys/screen
(30 lines × 40 columns)
300 keys/screen
(15 lines × 20 columns)
RS-232 interface
✽ : This illustration shows GT1585V-STBA.
GT155M
Extension interface
Optional function
board interface
Min. 16 × 16 [dots]
(per key)
Max. 2 points
1,000,000 times or more (operating force 0.98N or less)
–
–
–
CF card access LED
CF card access switch
Reset switch
CF card
interface
Display, touch key
POWER LED
USB interface
–
9MB built-in flash memory
(for saving project data and OS)
100,000 times
GT15-BAT type lithium battery (optional)
Clock data and maintenance time notification data
Approx. 5 years (operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
RS-232, 1ch Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)
Application: Communication with connected devices, connection to personal computer
(project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
USB (full-speed 12Mbps), device 1ch Connector shape: Mini-B
Application: Connection to personal computer
(project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
Compact flash slot, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE
Application: Data transfer, data storage, GOT startup FAT16 format: max. 2GB, FAT32 format: not usable
1ch for optional function board installation
1ch for communication unit/optional unit installation
Single tone (tone length adjustable)
Front: IP67f ✽7 In panel: IP2X
167(W) × 135(H) × 60(D) [mm]
153(W) × 121(H) [mm]
Weight
(excl. mounting brackets)
1.1 [kg]
Applicable software package
GT Works3 Version1.31H or later
RS-232 interface
Power supply
terminal
Battery holder
✽1 : On LCD screens, bright dots (permanently lit) and black dots (not to be lit) generally
appear.
Because the large number of display elements exist on an LCD screen, it is not
possible to reduce appearance of the bright and black dots to zero.
Note that the existence of bright and black dots is a standard characteristic of LCD
screens, and it does not mean that the products are defective or damaged.
✽2 : Flickering may occur depending on the display colors.
✽3 : LC panels have characteristics of tone reversal. Note that even within the indicated view
angles, the screen display may not be clear enough depending on the display color.
✽4 : Using the GOT screen save/backlight OFF functions prevents screen burn-in and
extends the backlight life.
✽5 : An analog resistive touch display is used. When 2 points on the screen are touched
simultaneously, if a switch is located the middle of the 2 points then the switch will be
activated. Therefore, avoid touching 2 points on the screen simultaneously.
✽6 : The memory is ROM that permits overwriting of new data without having to delete the
existing data.
✽7 : IP67f is supported when the USB environmentally protective cover is on. (The USB
interface conforms to IP2X when a USB cable is connected.) However, this does not
guarantee protection in all users' environments.
The unit may not be used in an environment where it is exposed to splashing oil or
chemicals for a long time or it is soaked with oil mist.
✽8 : Where more than one extension unit, barcode reader, and RFID controller are used,
the sum of their current consumptions should be within the current level which the
GOT can supply. For the currents which the extension units, barcode reader, and
RFID controller consume and the current level which the GOT can supply,
see "Notes for use" (page 81).
✽9 : If necessary, use a stylus pen meeting the following specifications.
• Material: Polyacetal resin • Pen point radius: 0.8mm or more
✽10: When using a stylus pen with GT1595-XTBM, it will be 100,000 times or more
(operating force 0.98N max.). Since the touch panel is a consumable product
structurally, it may not be used even fewer than above, depending on the usage method
and environment.
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
✽6
Display colors
View angle✽3
Max. 2 points
9MB built-in flash memory
(for saving project data and OS)
Memory C drive
Component names
Specification
16-dot standard font:
40 chars. × 30 lines
No. of displayed
(2-byte)
12-dot standard font:
characters
53 chars. × 40 lines
Display
(2-byte)
Life✽4
Min. 16 × 16 [dots]
(per key)
60A or less
(1ms, at max. load)
Specifications,
External Dimensions
No. of simultaneous
touch points
Min. 16 × 16 [dots]
(per key) (16 × 8 only on lowermost line)
13W or less
(540mA/24VDC)
MELSEC Process
Control
Key size
Min. 2 × 2 [dots]
(per key)
14W or less
(580mA/24VDC)
50A or less
100A or less
115A or less
115A or less
67A or less
45A or less
40A or less
(4ms, at max. load) (4ms, at max. load) (4ms, at max. load) (4ms, at max. load) (1ms, at max. load) (1ms, at max. load) (1ms, at max. load)
Permissible instantaneous
failure time
Approx. 50,000 hours or more
Life
Detection distance
1 [m]
Detection range
Right/left/up/down: 70°
Human
Detection delay time
0 to 4 [sec]
sensor
Temperature difference to be 4°C or more
Detection
between human body and ambient air
temperature
54
28W or less
Backlight
Approx. 40,000 hours or more
(Time for display intensity reaches 50% at operating ambient temperature of 25°C)
Analog resistive type
Matrix resistive type
Type
–
1900 keys/screen (38 lines × 50 columns)
1200 keys/screen (30 lines × 40 columns)
No. of touch keys
Battery
30W or less
Cold-cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable), with backlight OFF detection function. Backlight off time and screen save time can be set.
Life✽4
✽9
With backlight off
iQ Platform
Approx. 52,000 hours
(operating ambient
temperature: 25°C)
Backlight
Touch
panel
43W or less
(1790mA/24VDC)
–
450 [cd/m2]
Intensity adjustment
Life
57W or less
(2380mA/24VDC)
TFT color LCD
171(W) × 128(H) [mm]
15W or less
(620mA/24VDC)
39W or less
Type
16-dot standard font: 40 chars. × 30 lines (2-byte)
12-dot standard font: 53 chars. × 40 lines (2-byte)
17W or less
(710mA/24VDC)
41W or less
8.4"
211(W) × 158(H) [mm]
GT1550-QLBD
56W or less
Input maximum apparent power
GT1562-VNBA
GT1562-VNBD
TFT color LCD
(high-brightness,
wide viewing angle)
GT1555-QSBD
Power consumption
Input frequency
VGA: 640 × 480 [dots]
Contrast adjustment
Intensity
GT1565-VTBA
GT1565-VTBD
10.4"
16-dot standard font:
50 chars. × 37 lines (2-byte)
12-dot standard font:
66 chars. × 50 lines (2-byte)
65,536 colors
GT1585V
Right/left: 60°,
Up: 40°, Down: 50°
GT1585
Right/left: 65°,
Up: 45°, Down: 55°
GT1572-VNBA
GT1572-VNBD
GT1555-QTBD
24VDC (+25%, -20%)
–
–
41W or less
18W or less
19W or less
(1710mA/24VDC) (790mA/24VDC)
(750mA/24VDC)
100 to 240VAC (+10%, -15%)
50/60Hz ±5%
110VA (at max. load)
Input power supply voltage
Performance specifications
GT1575-VNBA
GT1575-VNBD
GT1555-VTBD
GT10
Display colors
View angle✽3
GT1575-VTBA
GT1575-VTBD
12.1"
15"
XGA: 1024 × 768 [dots]
SVGA: 800 × 600 [dots]
304.1(W) × 228.1(H) [mm] 246(W) × 184.5(H) [mm]
16-dot standard font:
No. of displayed 64 chars. × 48 lines (2-byte)
characters
12-dot standard font:
85 chars. × 64 lines (2-byte)
✽1
GT1575V-STBA
GT1575V-STBD
GT1575-STBA
GT1575-STBD
TFT color LCD (high-brightness, wide viewing angle)
Type
Screen size
Resolution
Display size
GT1585V-STBA
GT1585V-STBD
GT1585-STBA
GT1585-STBD
GT1595-XTBD
For Maintenance
Personnel
Item
GT1595-XTBA
For Initial Startup &
Operations
0°C to 50°C
0°C to 55°C
-20°C to 60°C
10 to 90%RH, no condensation
10 to 90%RH, no condensation
Frequency
Acceleration Half amplitude Sweep count
Conforming
5 to 8.4Hz
–
3.5mm
10 times each in X,
Under intermittent
to JIS B 3502
Y and Z directions
vibration
8.4 to 150Hz
9.8m/s2
–
and
–
5 to 8.4Hz
1.75mm
IEC 61131-2 Under continuous
–
vibration
4.9m/s2
8.4 to 150Hz
–
Conforming to JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2 (147m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y and Z directions)
No oily smoke, corrosive gas or combustible gas, less conductive dust,
away from direct sunlight (the same in storage)
2000m or less
In control panel
or lower
2 or less
Self-cooling
Type D grounding (100Ω or less). Connect to panel if unable to ground.
GT1575V-STBD
GT1575-STBD
GT1575-VTBD
GT1585V-STBD
GT1575-VNBD
GT1585-STBD
GT1572-VNBD
GT1565-VTBD
GT1562-VNBD
For Designers
Specification
GT1585V-STBA
GT1585-STBA
INDEX
Item
Operating ambient Display
temperature✽1
Other than display
Storage ambient temperature
Operating ambient humidity✽2
Storage ambient humidity✽2
Item
GT1575V-STBA
GT1575-STBA
GT1575-VTBA
GT1575-VNBA
GT1572-VNBA
GT1565-VTBA
GT1562-VNBA
55
Specifications
Power supply specifications
GT12
Item
General specifications
Impact resistance
Operating atmosphere
Operating altitude�1
Installation location
Overvoltage category�2
Contamination level�3
Cooling method
Grounding
Do not use or store the GOT under direct sun light or in an environment
with excessively high temperature, dust, humidity or vibration.
For inquiries relating to products which conform to UL, cUL, and CE
directives and shipping directives, please contact your local sales office.
Specification
Item
GT1275-VNBA
GT1275-VNBD
GT1265-VNBA
GT1265-VNBD
10.4"
8.4"
VGA: 640 × 480 [dots]
211.2(W) × 158.4(H) [mm]
170.9(W) × 128.2(H) [mm]
16-dot standard font: 40 chars. × 30 lines (2-byte)
12-dot standard font: 53 chars. × 40 lines (2-byte)
No. of displayed
Display characters
�1
Display colors
256 colors
Right/left: 45°, Up/down: 20°
200 [cd/m2]
4-step adjustment
View angle�2
Intensity
Intensity adjustment
Approx. 52,000 hours (operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
Cold-cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable), 1CCFL light
40,000 hours or more (at standard lamp current = 7.0 [mA])
50,000 hours or more (at standard lamp current = 6.0 [mA])
(Time for display intensity reaches 50% at operating ambient temperature of 25˚C)
Analog resistive type
Min. 2 × 2 [dots] (per key)
No. of simultaneous
touch points
Simultaneous touch prohibited�4
(1 point only)
1,000,000 times or more (operating force 0.98N or less)
–
–
–
–
6MB built-in flash memory (for saving project data and OS)
100,000 times
GT11-50BAT type lithium battery (optional)
Clock data, alarm history, and recipe data
Approx. 5 years (operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
Backed up data
Life
RS-232, 1ch
RS-232�6
Inrush current
Permissible instantaneous
failure time
Noise resistance
Withstand voltage�1
Within 20ms (100VAC or more)
Within 10ms
Noise voltage 1500Vp-p, noise width 1µs
by noise simulator with noise frequency 25 to 60Hz
Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1µs
by noise simulator with noise frequency 25 to 60Hz
1500VAC for 1 minute
between power supply terminal and ground
500VDC for 1 minute
between power supply terminal and ground
Insulation resistance�1
Applicable wire size
Clamp terminal
10MΩ or higher with an insulation resistance tester (500VDC between power supply terminal and ground)
0.75 to 2 [mm2]
Clamp terminals for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A
Tightening torque (terminal
block's terminal screws)
0.5 to 0.8 [N·m]
POWER LED
Display, touch panel
S.MODE
(OS installation switch)
Battery holder
CF card interface
Dip switch for setting
terminal resistance
(inside cover)
CF card access LED
CF card access switch
Ethernet interface
Power supply terminal
RS-422/485 interface
USB interface
RS-232 interface
Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)
Application: Communication with connected devices, connection to personal computer (project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
RS-422/485, 1ch
RS-422/485
Built-in
interface Ethernet
Data transfer system: 100BASE-TX, 1ch Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack)
Application: Communication with connected devices, connection to personal computer (project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent)
USB (Full Speed 12 Mbps), device 1ch Connector shape: Mini-B
Application: Connection to personal computer (project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
USB
CF card
Compact flash slot, 1ch
Connector shape: TYPE
Optional function board
Weight (excl. mounting brackets)
Applicable software package
FAT16 format: max. 2GB, FAT32 format: not usable
241(W) × 190(H) × 58(D)
227(W) × 176(H) [mm]
1.7 [kg]
303(W) × 214(H) × 53(D)
289(W) × 200(H) [mm]
2.3 [kg]
GT Works3 Version1.31H or later
�1 : On LCD screens, bright dots (permanently lit) and black dots (not to be lit) generally appear. Because the large number of display elements exist on an LCD screen, it is not possible to reduce appearance of the bright and
black dots to zero. Note that the existence of bright and black dots is a standard characteristic of LCD screens, and it does not mean that the products are defective or damaged.
�2 : LCD panels have characteristics of tone reversal. Note that even within the indicated view angles, the screen display may not be clear enough depending on the display color.
�3 : Using the GOT screen save/backlight OFF functions prevents screen burn-in and extends the backlight life.
�4 : An analog resistive touch display is used. When 2 points on the screen are touched simultaneously, if a switch is located the middle of the 2 points then the switch will be activated. Therefore, avoid touching 2 points on the
screen simultaneously.
�5 : The memory is a ROM that permits overwriting of new data without having to delete the existing data.
�6 : Where more than one extension unit, barcode reader, and RFID controller are used, the sum of their current consumptions should be within the current level which the GOT can supply.
For the currents which the extension units, barcode reader, and RFID controller consume and the current level which the GOT can supply, see "Notes for use" (page 81).
�7 : If necessary, use a stylus pen meeting the following specifications.
• Material: Polyacetal resin • Pen point radius: 0.8mm or more
�8 : When using a stylus pen, it will be 100,000 times or more (operating force 0.98N max.).
Since the touch panel is a consumable product structurally, it may not be used even fewer than above, depending on the usage method and environment.
56
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
Extension unit�6
Buzzer output
Protective construction
External dimensions
Panel cut dimensions
Application: Data transfer, data storage, GOT startup
–
–
Single tone (tone length adjustable)
IP67f
Specifications,
External Dimensions
Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)
Application: Communication with connected devices
MELSEC Process
Control
Life�8
Detection distance
Human Detection range
sensor Detection delay time
Detection temperature
Memory C drive
�5
Life (No. of writings)
Battery
29A or less
(2ms, at max. load)
iQ Platform
�7
6W or less
40A or less
(4ms, at max. load)
GT10
Life
Backlight
Type
Key size
11W or less
15W or less
For Maintenance
Personnel
TFT color LCD
Type
Screen size
Resolution
Display size
Touch
panel
18W or less
With backlight off
�1 : In DC type products, the surge absorber is connected between the power supply and the ground to avoid a malfunction due
to noise caused by the application of lightning surge.
The values of the dielectric withstand voltage and insulation resistance are recorded when the surge absorber is not
connected.
Performance specifications
Life�3
Power consumption
GT1275/GT1265
For Initial Startup &
Operations
0°C to 50°C
0°C to 55°C
-20°C to 60°C
10 to 90%RH, no condensation
10 to 90%RH, no condensation
Frequency
Acceleration Half amplitude Sweep count
Conforming
5 to 8.4Hz
–
3.5mm
10 times each in X,
Under intermittent
to JIS B 3502
Y and Z directions
vibration
8.4 to 150Hz
9.8m/s2
–
and
–
5 to 8.4Hz
1.75mm
IEC 61131-2 Under continuous
–
vibration
4.9m/s2
8.4 to 150Hz
–
Conforming to JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2 (147m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y and Z directions)
No oily smoke, corrosive gas or combustible gas, less conductive dust, away from direct sunlight (the same in storage)
2,000m or lower
In control panel
or lower
2 or less
Self-cooling
Type D grounding (100Ω or less). Connect to panel if unable to ground.
Input frequency
For Designers
Operating ambient Display
temperature
Other than display
Storage ambient temperature
Operating ambient humidity
Storage ambient humidity
�1 : Do not operate or store the GOT unit in pressurized environments where
the pressure exceeds 0 m elevation atmospheric pressure, as this could
result in abnormal operation.
Do not pressurize inside the control panel for air purge cleaning. The
pressure could raise the surface sheet, making the touch panel difficult to
operate or causing the sheet to come off.
�2 : Assuming that the device is connected at some point between a public
power distribution network and local system equipment. Category
applies to devices that are supplied with power from fixed equipment.
The surge withstand voltage is 2,500V for devices with ratings up to
300V.
�3 : Index that indicates the level of foreign conductive matter in the operating
environment of the device. Contamination level 2 denotes an
environment contaminated only by non-conductive matter which may,
under certain conditions, become temporarily conductive due to
condensation.
Component names
INDEX
Specification
Vibration resistance
Input maximum apparent power
GT1265/75-VNBD
24VDC (+25%, -20%)
–
–
Input power supply voltage
Item
Specification
GT1265/75-VNBA
100 to 240VAC (+10%, -15%)
50/60Hz ±5%
44VA (at max. load)
57
Specifications
GT11
Power supply specifications
GT10
Specification
General specifications
Specification
Operating ambient Display
temperature
Other than display
Storage ambient temperature
0°C to 55°C (horizontal installation), 0°C to 50°C (vertical installation)✽5
0°C to 50°C✽5
-20°C to 60°C
humidity✽1
10 to 90%RH, no condensation
Storage ambient humidity✽1
10 to 90%RH, no condensation
Frequency
Impact resistance
Operating atmosphere
Conforming
to JIS B 3502
and
IEC 61131-2
Under intermittent
vibration
Under continuous
vibration
Half amplitude
Sweep count
10 times each in X,
Y and Z directions
5 to 8.4Hz
–
3.5mm
8.4 to 150Hz
9.8m/s2
–
5 to 8.4Hz
–
1.75mm
8.4 to 150Hz
4.9m/s2
–
–
Conforming to JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2 (147m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y and Z directions)
Free from oil mist, corrosive gases, flammable gases and excessive conductive dusts or direct sun beams (The same applies to unit storage.)
Operating altitude✽2
2000m or less
Installation location
In control panel✽6
Do not use or store the GOT under direct sun light or in an environment
with excessively high temperature, dust, humidity or vibration.
or lower
Overvoltage category✽3
Cooling method
Self-cooling
Grounding
Input maximum apparent power
Power consumption
With backlight off
Inrush current
Permissible instantaneous failure time
Noise resistance
Withstand voltage
Insulation resistance
Applicable wire size
Clamp terminal
Screen size
Resolution
Display size
No. of displayed characters
TFT color LCD
View angle
Contrast adjustment
Intensity
Backlight
Life✽2
No. of simultaneous touch points
Life
Memory
Backed up data
Life
Bus
RS-422/485
RS-232
USB
CF card
Optional function board
Buzzer output
Protective construction✽4
External dimensions
(without USB port cover)
Panel cut dimensions
Weight
Applicable software package
58
STN color LCD
STN monochrome
(black/white) LCD
Type
STN monochrome
(black/white) LCD
STN color LCD
Screen size
Resolution
Display size
400 [cd/m2]
• 350 [cd/m2]
(Hardware versions A and B)
• 380 [cd/m2]
(Hardware version C or later)
220 [cd/m2]
Monochrome (black/white)
16 gray scale
256 colors
Right/left: 55°,
Up: 65°, Down: 70°
(in horizontal
display mode)
• Right/left: 50°,
Up: 50°, Down: 60°
(Hardware versions A and B)
• Right/left: 55°,
Up: 65°, Down: 70°
(Hardware version C or later)
16-step adjustment
• 350 [cd/m2]
(Hardware versions A and B)
220 [cd/m2]
• 380 [cd/m2]
(Hardware version C or later)
Right/left: 45°,
Up: 20°, Down: 40°
(in horizontal
display mode)
–
400 [cd/m2]
Monochrome (black/white)
16 gray scale
256 colors
380 [cd/m2]
Application: Data transfer, data storage, GOT startup
Life
FAT16 format: max. 2GB, FAT32 format: not usable
Embedded in main unit
Single tone (tone length adjustable)
Front: IP67f In panel: IP2X
Front: IP67f In panel: IP2X
IP65f
(when external connection cable is connected)
164(W) × 135(H) × 56(D) [mm]
167(W) × 135(H) × 65(D) [mm]
176(W) × 220(H) × 93(D) [mm]
153(W) × 121(H) [mm]
0.7 [kg] (excl. mounting brackets)
153(W) × 121(H) [mm]
0.9 [kg] (excl. mounting brackets)
1.0 [kg] (main unit only)
GT Works3 Version1.31H or later
View angle
220 [cd/m2]
–
Connector shape: TYPE
Display colors
Contrast adjustment
Intensity
RS-422/232, 1ch (Select one when using.)
Transmission speed: 115200/
57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
Connector shape: Round type, 32-pin (male)
Application: Communication with connected devices
RS-232, 1ch
RS-232, 1ch
RS-232, 1ch, Transmission speed: 115200/
Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)
Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)
Connector shape: Mini-DIN 6-pin (female)
Application: Connection to barcode reader/personal computer
Application: Communication with connected devices,
Application: Connection to personal computer
(project data read/write, OS installation,
connection to personal computer
(project data read/write, OS installation,
FA transparent function, etc.)
(project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function, etc.)
FA transparent function, etc.)
USB (full-speed 12Mbps), device 1ch Connector shape: Mini-B
Application: Connection to personal computer (project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
Compact flash slot, 1ch
Display✽1
Right/left: 45°,
Up: 20°, Down: 40°
8-step adjustment
Approx. 50,000 hours (operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
Cold-cathode fluorescent tube (not replaceable), with backlight OFF detection function. Backlight off time and screen save time can be set.
Approx. 75,000 hours or more
Approx. 75,000 hours or more
Approx. 54,000 hours or more
Approx. 54,000 hours or more Approx. 75,000 hours or more Approx. 54,000 hours or more
(Time for display intensity reaches 50% at operating ambient temperature of 25°C)
Matrix resistive type
300 keys/screen (matrix consisting of 15 lines × 20 columns)
Min. 16 × 16 [dots] (per key)
Max. 2 points
1,000,000 times or more (operating force 0.98N or less)
3MB built-in flash memory (for saving project data and OS)
100,000 times
512KB built-in SRAM (battery backup)
GT11-50BAT type lithium battery
Clock data, alarm history, recipe data, time action set values
Replacement guideline approx. 5 years (operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
1ch for QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q series) or
–
–
1ch for QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A series)
Application: For bus connection of PLC
RS-422/485, 1ch
Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)
–
–
Application: Communication with PLCs
Terminal resistance✽5: OPEN/110Ω/330Ω
(switching by terminal resistance transfer switch)
–
No. of displayed
characters
–
Life✽2
Memory
Battery
GT1050-QBBD
STN color LCD
STN monochrome
(blue/white) LCD
GT1045-QSBD
GT1040-QBBD
STN color LCD
STN monochrome
(blue/white) LCD
4.7"
QVGA: 320 × 240 [dots]
115(W) × 86(H) [mm] (in horizontal display mode) 96(W) × 72(H) [mm] (in horizontal display mode)
16-dot standard font: 20 chars. × 15 lines (2-byte),
12-dot standard font: 26 chars. × 20 lines (2-byte) (in horizontal display mode)
256 colors
Monochrome (blue/white)
16 gray scale
256 colors
Monochrome (blue/white)
16 gray scale
Right/left: 55°,
Up: 65°, Down: 70°
(in horizontal
display mode)
Right/left: 45°,
Up: 20°, Down: 40°
(in horizontal
display mode)
Right/left: 50°,
Up: 40°, Down: 70°
(in horizontal
display mode)
Right/left: 45°,
Up: 20°, Down: 40°
(in horizontal
display mode)
16-step adjustment
260 [cd/m2]
150 [cd/m2]
300 [cd/m2]
Approx. 50,000 hours
(Time for display contrast reaches 20% at operating ambient temperature of 25°C)
380 [cd/m2]
Approx. 75,000
hours or more
LED (no need to replace)
Backlight off time and screen save
time can be set.
Approx. 54,000
hours or more
CF card cover
Battery
(Time for display intensity reaches 50% at
operating ambient temperature of 25°C)
Power supply terminal
B
Display, touch key
USB interface
GT115M-QMBD
A
B
C
RS-232 interface
RS-422 interface
Terminal resistance transfer switch
(inside cover)
GT115M-QMBDQ
GT115M-QMBDA
Bus interface
RS-232 interface
–
✽ : GT115M-QMBDQ and GT115M-QMBDA do not have a reset switch.
GT115MHS (Handy)
USB interface
Max. 2 points
1,000,000 times or more (operating force 0.98N or less)
CF card interface
RS-232 interface
Emergency stop switch
Hook for wall
mounting
Neck strap hook
Key type selector
switch
Built-in flash memory for saving project data (3 MB or less) and OS
100,000 times
GT11-50BAT type lithium battery
Clock data, alarm history, recipe data, time action set values
Replacement guideline approx. 5 years (operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
C
A
POWER LED
–
No. of simultaneous touch points
Reset switch
CF card interface
Interface protective
cover
Matrix resistive type
Max. 50 keys/screen
Min. 16 × 16 [dots] (per key)
Backed up data
Life
CF card access switch
CF card access LED
–
Type
No. of touch keys
Key size
Life
User memory✽3
Life (No. of writings)
GT11
5.7"
Cold-cathode fluorescent tube (not replaceable)
with backlight OFF detection function.
Backlight off time and screen save time can be set.
Backlight
Touch
panel
GT1055-QSBD
Rear face protective
cover
Display, touch key
POWER LED
Battery
Operation switches
(6 switches)
RS-422/232
interface
Hand strap
Grip switch
RS-422/485, 1ch
RS-422/485
Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)
Application: Communication with PLCs
Terminal resistance✽5: OPEN/110Ω/330Ω (switched by terminal resistance transfer switch)
GT105M
Memory board interface
RS-232, 1ch
RS-232
Built-in
interface
USB
Memory board
Buzzer output
Protective construction✽4
External dimensions
Panel cut dimensions
Weight (excl. mounting brackets)
Applicable software package
Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)
Application: Communication with PLCs, connection with barcode readers,
communication with personal computers
(project data read/write, OS installation, transparent function)
Battery
Power supply terminal
USB (full-speed 12Mbps), device 1ch
Connector shape: Mini-B
Application: Communication with personal computer
(project data read/write, OS installation, transparent function)
For installing memory board (GT10-50FMB) 1ch
Single tone (tone length adjustable/none)
USB interface
Terminal resistance transfer
switch (inside cover)
RS-232 interface
RS-422 interface
POWER LED
Display, touch key
Conforming to IP67f (front panel)
139(W) × 112(H) × 41(D)[mm]
164(W) × 135(H) × 56(D)[mm]
153(W) × 121(H)[mm]
130(+1 -0)(W) × 103(+1 -0)(H)[mm]
0.7[kg]
0.45[kg]
GT104M
GT Works3 Version1.31H or later
✽1 : On LCD screens, bright dots (permanently lit) and black dots (not to be lit) generally appear.
Because the large number of display elements exist on an LCD screen, it is not possible to reduce appearance of the bright
and black dots to zero.
Flickering may occur depending on the display colors.
Note that the existence of bright and black dots is a standard characteristic of LCD screens, and it does not mean that the
products are defective or damaged.
Displaying one single screen for a long time can lead to burn-in, causing afterimages or image irregularities that could not
disappear. Use the screen saver that is effective to prevent burn-in.
✽2 : Using the GOT screen save/backlight OFF functions prevents screen burn-in and extends the backlight life.
✽3 : The memory is ROM that permits overwriting of new data without having to delete the existing data.
✽4 : This does not guarantee protection in all users’ environments. The specification is not applied when the interface protective
cover and rear face protective cover are removed. The unit may not be used in an environment where it is exposed to
splashing oil or chemicals for a long time or it is soaked with oil mist.
✽5 : In the case of GOT multi-drop connection, set the terminal resistance transfer switch on the GOT main unit according to the
connection configuration.
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
Built-in RS-422/232
interface
TFT color LCD
GT1150-QLBDQ
GT1155HS-QSBD GT1150HS-QLBD
GT1150-QLBDA
Specifications,
External Dimensions
Battery
C drive✽3
Life (No. of writings)
D drive
GT1155-QSBDQ
GT1155-QSBDA
Right/left: 70°,
Up: 70°, Down: 50°
(in horizontal
display mode)
Component names
MELSEC Process
Control
Touch
panel
Type
No. of touch keys
Key size
• Right/left: 50°, Up: 50°, Down: 60°
(Hardware versions A and B)
Right/left: 70°,
Right/left: 45°,
(In horizontal display mode) Up: 20°, Down: 40°
Up: 70°, Down: 50°
•
Right/left:
55°,
Up:
65°,
Down:
70°
(in horizontal
(in horizontal
(Hardware version C or later)
display mode)
display mode)
(In horizontal display mode)
–
16-step adjustment
0.22 to 0.25 [N·m]
iQ Platform
Intensity adjustment
Life
GT1155-QTBDQ
GT1155-QTBDA
Monochrome (black/white)
16 gray scale
256 colors
GT1040-QBBD
GT10
✽1
STN monochrome
(black/white) LCD
0.5 to 0.8 [N·m]✽1
Specification
Item
5.7"
QVGA: 320 × 240 [dots]
115(W) × 86(H) [mm] (in horizontal display mode)
115(W) × 86(H) [mm] (in horizontal display mode)
115(W) × 86(H) [mm]
16-dot standard font: 20 chars. × 15 lines (2-byte) 12-dot standard font: 26 chars. × 20 lines (2-byte) (in horizontal display mode)
Display colors
Display
STN color LCD
GT1045-QSBD
For Maintenance
Personnel
Type
GT1150-QLBD
GT1050-QBBD
24VDC (+10%, -15%), ripple voltage of 200mV or less
–
–
3.6W or less
9.84W or less
9.36W or less 11.16W or less 9.72W or less 7.92W or less
9.84W or less
9.36W or less
(150mA/24VDC)
(410mA/24VDC) (390mA/24VDC) (465mA/24VDC) (405mA/24VDC) (330mA/24VDC) (410mA/24VDC) (390mA/24VDC)
4.32W or less (180mA/24VDC)
5.04W or less (210mA/24VDC)
4.32W or less (180mA/24VDC)
2.9W or less (120mA/24VDC)
15A or less (2ms, at max. load)
26A or less (4ms, at max. load)
15A or less (26.4V) 2ms
Within 5ms
Within 10ms
Within 5ms
Noise voltage 1000Vp-p, noise width 1µs
Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1µs
Noise voltage 1000Vp-p, noise width 1µs
by noise simulator with noise frequency 30 to 100Hz by noise simulator with noise frequency 25 to 60Hz
by noise simulator with noise frequency 30 to 100Hz
500VAC for 1 minute between power supply terminal and ground
10MΩ or higher with an insulation resistance tester (500VDC between power supply terminal and ground)
0.14 to 1.5 [mm2], AWG26 to AWG16 (single wire)
Single-wire
0.14 to 1.0 [mm2], AWG26 to AWG16 (stranded wire)
installation
0.25 to 0.5 [mm2], AWG24 to AWG20 (bar terminal with insulation sleeve)
0.75 to 2 [mm2]✽1
Two-wire 0.14 to 0.5 [mm2], AWG26 to AWG20 (single wire)
installation 0.14 to 0.2 [mm2], AWG26 to AWG24 (stranded wire)
Clamp terminals for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A✽1
AI2.5-6BU, AI0.34-6TQ, AI0.5-6WH (made by Phoenix Contact)
Tightening torque (terminal
block's terminal screws)
Specification
GT1155-QSBD
GT1055-QSBD
Performance specifications
Performance specifications
GT1155-QTBD
GT1150-QLBDQ
GT1150-QLBDA
✽1 : Excluding GT115MHS
Type D grounding (100Ω or less). Connect to panel if unable to ground.✽7
Item
GT1155-QSBDQ
GT1155-QSBDA
For Initial Startup &
Operations
For inquiries relating to products which conform to UL, cUL, and CE
directives and shipping directives, please contact your local sales office.
2 or less
Contamination level✽4
Input power supply voltage
Input frequency
GT1155-QTBDQ
GT1155-QTBDA
For Designers
Vibration resistance
Acceleration
✽1 : Water bulb temperature for STN display type must be 39°C or lower.
✽2 : Do not operate or store the GOT unit in pressurized environments
where the pressure exceeds 0m elevation atmospheric pressure,
as this could result in abnormal operation.
✽3 : Assuming that the device is connected at some point between a
public power distribution network and local system equipment.
Category applies to devices that are supplied with power from
fixed equipment. The surge withstand voltage is 2500V for devices
with ratings up to 300V.
✽4 : Index that indicates the level of foreign conductive matter in the
operating environment of the device. Contamination level 2
denotes contamination by non-conductive matter only, though
momentary conductivity may occur due to occasional
condensation.
✽5 : 0 to 40°C for GT115MHS
✽6 : Excluding GT115MHS
✽7 : The 5VDC type requires no grounding.
GT1150-QLBD
GT1150HS-QLBD
INDEX
Item
Operating ambient
GT1155-QTBD
GT1155-QSBD
GT1155HS-QSBD
Item
Battery
Memory board
interface
Terminal resistance transfer switch
(inside cover)
USB
interface
Power supply terminal
RS-232 interface
Display, touch key
RS-422 interface
59
Specifications
External dimensions
GOT main units
GT166
241
175.5
10
252
10
397
320
303
175
214
199
242
227
296
281
E
190
D
–
–
2.2W or less (90mA/24VDC)
1.9W or less (80mA/24VDC)
1.1W or less (220mA/5VDC)
1.7W or less (70mA/24VDC)
1.2W or less (50mA/24VDC)
0.6W or less (120mA/5VDC)
18A or less (26.4DCV) 1ms
13A or less (26.4DCV) 1ms
–
Within 5ms
–
Noise voltage 1000Vp-p, noise width 1µs
by noise simulator with noise frequency 30 to 100Hz
500VAC for 1 minute between power supply terminal and ground
–
10MΩ or higher with an insulation resistance tester
–
(500VDC between power supply terminal and ground)
0.14 to 1.5mm2, AWG26 to AWG16 (single wire), 0.14 to 1.0mm2, AWG26 to AWG16 (stranded wire),
0.25 to 0.5mm2, AWG24 to AWG20 (bar terminal with insulation sleeve)
0.14 to 0.5mm2, AWG26 to AWG20 (single wire), 0.14 to 0.2mm2, AWG26 to AWG24 (stranded wire)
AI2.5-6BU, AI0.34-6TQ, AI0.5-6WH (made by Phoenix Contact)
Display,
touch key
10
10
GT1595
56
49
56
226
GT1585
GT157
397
320
303
252
Specification
10
10
5
5
49
6
56
6
56
52
5
6
61
10
10
175
214
190
10
10
199
135
5
GT16 Handy
GT11 Handy
62
167
110
47
204
10
5
10
110
48
65
6
3.5
74
168
152
152
86
10
152
5
Panel
thickness:
5mm
or less
145
84
10
4.5
10
84
10 21
76
102
17.5
Panel
thickness:
5mm
or less
29.5
25
10
9.5
10
120
41
GT Works3 Version1.31H or later
112
120
105(W) × 66(H)[mm]
GT1020-LMD(W): 0.2kg (excl. mounting brackets)
0.2kg (excl. mounting brackets)
GT1020-LML(W): 0.18kg (excl. mounting brackets)
10
80 or more
10
113
76
10
5
7.5
10
76
10
9.5
74
10
Panel
thickness:
1 to 4mm
27
23
86
113(W) × 74(H) × 27(D)[mm]
135
137(W) × 66(H)[mm]
10
GT1020
15.5
65
84
10
Conforming to IP67f (front panel)
145(W) × 76(H) × 29.5(D)[mm]
GT1030
139
80 or more
65
84
GT104
164
120
9.5
GT105
Single tone (tone length adjustable/none)
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
62
75
72
62
120
135
50
18
176
50
16
21
201
120
135
120
52
226
13
GT115-QBDQ
GT115-QBDA
GT115-QBD
58
53
51
6
288
152
226
164
120
6
6
5
175.5
Specifications,
External Dimensions
Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
Connector shape: Mini DIN 6-pin (female)
Application: Communication with personal computer (project data read/write, OS installation, transparent function)
✽1 : On LCD screens, bright dots (permanently lit) and black dots (not to be lit) generally appear.
Because the large number of display elements exist on an LCD screen, it is not possible to reduce appearance of the bright and black dots to zero.
Flickering may occur depending on the display colors.
Note that the existence of bright and black dots is a standard characteristic of LCD screens, and it does not mean that the products are defective or damaged.
Displaying one single screen for a long time can lead to burn-in, causing afterimages or image irregularities that could not disappear. Use the screen saver that is effective to prevent burn-in.
✽2 : The memory is ROM that permits overwriting of new data without having to delete the existing data.
✽3 : In the case of GOT multi-drop connection, set the terminal resistance transfer switch on the GOT main unit according to the connection configuration.
✽4 : This does not guarantee protection in all users’ environments. The specification is not applied when the interface protective cover and rear face protective cover are removed.
The unit may not be used in an environment where it is exposed to splashing oil or chemicals for a long time or it is soaked with oil mist.
60
222
RS-232, 1ch
GT1030-HMD(W): 0.3kg (excl. mounting brackets)
0.3kg (excl. mounting brackets)
GT1030-HML(W): 0.28kg (excl. mounting brackets)
Applicable software packages
GT Works3 Version1.31H or later (not supported GT Works2/GT Designer 2)
Weight
110
–
Replacement guideline approx. 5 years (operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
175.5
209
Built-in flash memory for saving project data (512KB or less), OS, alarm history, recipe data, time action set values
100,000 times
–
–
241
252
230
1,000,000 times or more (operating force 0.98N or less)
GT1265
303
10
Impossible
(If there is a switch near the center of the pressed keys, the switch may function.)
6
56
Min. 2 × 2 [dots] (per key)
Max. 2 points
GT1030-HBD/HWD, GT1030-HBDW/HWDW
GT1020-LBD/LWD, GT1020-LBDW/LWDW
RS-422/485, 1ch Transmission speed:
RS-422/485 1ch Transmission speed:
115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
Connector shape: Connecter terminal block, 9-pin
Connector shape: Connector terminal block, 9-pin
Application: Communication with PLC
Application: Communication with PLC
RS-232, 1ch Transmission speed: 115200/
RS-232, 1ch Transmission speed: 115200/
For
Terminal resistance✽3: OPEN/110Ω/330Ω
Terminal resistance✽3: OPEN/110Ω/330Ω
57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
communication (switched by terminal resistance transfer switch)
Connector shape: Connecter terminal block, 9-pin (switched by terminal resistance transfer switch) Connector shape: Connecter terminal block, 9-pin
with PLC
Built-in
Application: Communication with PLC
Application: Communication with PLC
GT1030-HBL/HWL, GT1030-HBLW/HWLW
GT1020-LBL/LWL, GT1020-LBLW/LWLW
interface
RS-422, 1ch Transmission speed:
RS-422 1ch Transmission speed:
115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps
Connector shape: Connector terminal block, 9-pin
Connector shape: Connector terminal block, 9-pin
Application: Communication with PLC
Application: Communication with PLC
For
communication
with personal
computer
Buzzer output
Protective construction✽4
External dimensions
Panel cut dimensions
190
175
Max. 50 keys/screen
Min. 16 × 16 [dots] (per key)
GT11-50BAT type lithium battery
Clock data, alarm history, recipe data, time action set values
175.5
10
Status control (color, on/flashing/off) is available and screen save time setting can be set. PLC can control color and status of backlight based on system information.
Matrix resistive type
Analog resistive type
60
3-color LED
(white, pink and red)
(no need to replace)
120
Approx. 50,000 hours (Time for display contrast reaches 20% at operating ambient temperature of 25°C)
3-color LED
3-color LED
3-color LED
3-color LED
3-color LED
3-color LED
(white, pink and red) (green, orange and red) (white, pink and red) (green, orange and red) (white, pink and red) (green, orange and red)
(no need to replace)
(no need to replace)
(no need to replace)
(no need to replace)
(no need to replace)
(no need to replace)
10
300 [cd/m2] (in white)
52
200 [cd/m2] (in green)
10
10
300 [cd/m2] (in white)
–
Built-in flash memory for saving project data (1.5MB or less) and OS
GT1275
167
110
10
200 [cd/m2] (in green)
8-step adjustment
47
56
500 [cd/m2] (in white)
Life (No. of writings)
Backed up data
Life
GT155
47
56
Life
User memory✽2
200 [cd/m2] (in green)
288
10
241
5
No. of simultaneous
touch points
GT156
382
175.5
16-step adjustment
500 [cd/m2] (in white)
222
301
10
Monochrome (black/white)
Right/left: 30°, Up: 20°, Down: 30°(in horizontal display mode)
250
320
152
53
6
Function
Type
No. of touch keys
Key size
116
10
GT1020-LBDW2
GT1020-LWDW2
60
GT1020-LBD2
GT1020-LWD2
6
GT1020-LBDW
GT1020-LWDW
GT1020-LBLW
GT1020-LWLW
10
GT1020-LBD
GT1020-LWD
GT1020-LBL
GT1020-LWL
MELSEC Process
Control
Battery
GT1030-HBDW2
GT1030-HWDW2
iQ Platform
Memory
GT1030-HBD2
GT1030-HWD2
Type
STN monochrome (black/white) LCD
4.5"
3.7"
Screen size
288 × 96 [dots] (in horizontal mode)
160 × 64 [dots] (in horizontal mode)
Resolution
86.4(W) × 34.5(H)[mm](in horizontal mode)
109.42(W) × 35.98(H)[mm](in horizontal mode)
Display size
16-dot standard font: 20 chars. × 4 lines (1-byte) or 10 chars. × 4 lines (2-byte)
No. of displayed 16-dot standard font: 36 chars. × 6 lines (1-byte) or 18 chars. × 6 lines (2-byte) (in horizontal mode)
(in horizontal mode)
characters
12-dot standard font: 48 chars. × 8 lines (1-byte) or 24 chars. × 8 lines (2-byte) (in horizontal mode)
Display colors
View angle
Contrast adjustment
Intensity
200 [cd/m2] (in green)
Intensity adjustment
Life
3-color LED
(green, orange and red)
Color
Backlight
(no need to replace)
Touch
panel
GT1030-HBDW
GT1030-HWDW
GT1030-HBLW
GT1030-HWLW
GT10
Display✽1
GT1030-HBD
GT1030-HWD
GT1030-HBL
GT1030-HWL
53
6
Item
For Maintenance
Personnel
214
10
10
316
263
199
167
116
52
6
6
GT1655
288
301
10
242
382
RS-232 interface
Performance specifications
52
–
10
227
For inquiries relating to products which conform to UL, cUL, and CE
directives and shipping directives, please contact your local sales office.
–
175.5
6
Terminal resistance
transfer switch
56
E
222
296
RS-422 interface
GT1030-HBD2
GT1030-HWD2
GT1030-HBDW2
GT1030-HWDW2
GT1020-LBD2
GT1020-LWD2
GT1020-LBDW2
GT1020-LWDW2
Power supply terminal
240
10
D
GT1030-HBL
GT1030-HWL
GT1030-HBLW
GT1030-HWLW
GT1020-LBL
GT1020-LWL
GT1020-LBLW
GT1020-LWLW
–
RS-422 interface,
Power supply terminal
10
320
6
C
GT1030-HBD
GT1030-HWD
GT1030-HBDW
GT1030-HWDW
GT1020-LBD
GT1020-LWD
GT1020-LBDW
GT1020-LWDW
Power supply terminal
0.22 to 0.25 [N·m]
Do not use or store the GOT under direct sun light or in an environment with
excessively high temperature, dust, humidity or vibration.
GT167
316
240
For Initial Startup &
Operations
Single-wire
Applicable
installation
wire size
Two-wire installation
Clamp terminal
Tightening torque (terminal
block's terminal screws)
GT1685
281
Insulation resistance
Interface for connection
with personal computer
(RS-232)
135
Withstand voltage
C
5VDC (±5%), supplied from
PLC communication cable
24VDC (+10%, -15%), ripple voltage of 200mV or less
GT1695
GT1030/GT1020
61
Noise resistance
GT1020-LBL
GT1020-LWL
GT1020-LBLW
GT1020-LWLW
10
Permissible instantaneous failure time
GT1030-HBL
GT1030-HWL
GT1030-HBLW
GT1030-HWLW
For Designers
Power consumption
With backlight off
Inrush current
GT1020-LBDW
GT1020-LWDW
GT1020-LBDW2
GT1020-LWDW2
10
Input maximum apparent power
GT1020-LBD
GT1020-LWD
GT1020-LBD2
GT1020-LWD2
120
Input frequency
GT1030-HBDW
GT1030-HWDW
GT1030-HBDW2
GT1030-HWDW2
INDEX
Input power supply voltage
GT1030-HBD
GT1030-HWD
GT1030-HBD2
GT1030-HWD2
(Unit: mm)
10
Specification
Item
External dimensions
Component names
10
Power supply specifications
Panel
thickness:
1 to 4mm
129
61
External dimensions
Panel cut dimensions
[Fig. A]
50 or more
80 or more
C
When CF card When CF card
is not used
is used
50 or more
50 or more
100 or more
50 or more
(20 or more)
B
more✽1
80 or
(20 or more)
C
When CF card When CF card
is not used
is used
more✽2
50 or
(20 or more)
100 or more
GT10
GOT main unit
GT105M
GT104M
GT1030
GT1020
Cable length (L)
0.2m
3m
10, 20, 30m
1, 3, 10, 20, 30m
1, 3, 10, 20, 30m
3, 10, 20, 30m
1m
0.2m
49
Fig.11
External
dimensions
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Fig. 15
Fig. 16
Fig. 17
Fig. 18
Cable length (L)
Fig.12
16
50 or more
(20 or more)
80 or more
(20 or more)
50 or more
(20 or more)
50 or more
100 or more
(20 or more) (20 or more✽3)
50 or more
50 or more
(20 or more✽1) (20 or more)
50 or more
(20 or more)
80 or more
(20 or more✽2)
50 or more
58
A0J2-PW side
Ferrite core, approx. Ø35 × 40, GOT side
green holder tube
200
38
Fig.18
8
52
200
50
3000
53
Fig.19
16
16
50
Ø7
16
15
45.5
50
3000
L
53
Fig.14
16
50
13
Fig.20
16
16
50
3000
50
16
Ø6
L
40
Ø6
40
Ø20 × 28
Ø7
Ø7
E
C
Other device
or control panel
D
FA-LTBGTR4CBLM
Cable length (L)
0.5, 1, 2m
External
dimensions
Fig.15
30
Fig.21
13
16
50
3000
53
Ø25 × 33
16
Ø6
L
Fig.22
40
30
3000
40
200
250
Approx. Ø30
Fig. 23
Ø13
Ø7
Ø13
Approx. 48
Ø25 × 33
Ø7
A
Fig.16
30
L
16
8
35
L
47
4
50
Ø8.1
55
Ø7
Ø25 × 33
E
Dimensions shown in parentheses apply when there are no devices nearby (contactor, etc.) which produce radiated noise or heat. Even with these dimensions, however, the ambient temperature must
never exceed 55°C.
Depending on the unit and cable being used, a cable length longer than dimension A (or dimension D for the GT10) in above [Fig. A] may be required.
18
Fig.23
53
250
(Unit: mm)
D
60
49
45.5
Thickness:
2 to 4mm
C
A7GT-CNB side
Ø5
External
dimensions
Fig. 19
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
3m
3m
3m
3m
15
Fig.13
RS-232 cables
Model name
100 or more
(20 or more)
B
49
49
Ferrite core, approx. Ø35 × 40,
green holder tube
RS-485 terminal block conversion unit
E
A
11.5
70
13
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C30R4-25P
GT01-CMR4-25P
GT01-CMR4-8P
GT10-CMR4-8P
GT10-CMR4-25P
GT10-C10R4-8PL
GT10-C02H-9SC
GT01-C30R2-6P
GT01-C30R2-9S
GT01-C30R2-25P
GT10-C30R2-6P
✽1 : 50 or more when a RS-232/USB conversion adapter is used.
✽2 : 80 or more when a personal computer connection cable is used or when a personal computer RS-232
interface is used for connecting multiple GOTs.
50 or more when a RS-232 interface is used for using an RS-232/USB conversion adapter.
✽3 : 80 or more when using a USB cable or a memory board.
62
Cable model name
B
100 or more
✽1 : 50 or more (20 or more) in the case of vertical installation
✽2 : 80 or more (20 or more) in the case of vertical installation
32
Cable approx. Ø8.0
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
GT1155
GT1150
A, D
1000
100
(Unit: mm)
RS-422 cables
Cable model name
E
(Unit: mm)
Motion controller
CPU side
35
B
Fig.10
20
49
GT155M
[Fig. A]
60
50
Cable approx. Ø8.0
Specifications,
External Dimensions
A, D
GT11
GOT main unit
110
MELSEC Process
Control
(Unit: mm)
L
32
110
Ferrite core, approx. Ø35 x 40,
blue holder tube
35
GT156M
11.5
32.5
GT157M
L
FG cable
iQ Platform
GT12
GT1265
Fig.5
GOT side
160
35
GT1585
✽1 : The distance varies depending on the cable to be used. For details, consult your local sales office.
The values in the table are given for your reference only and may not reflect actual conditions.
✽2 : The distances required when the coaxial cable 3C-2V (JIS C 3501) is used.
✽3 : The distance varies depending on the cable to be used. When the bending radius of the cable is larger than the indicated value, keep a space appropriate to the bending radius.
✽4 : When using a battery, the required dimension is greater than when using a CF card.
GT1275
GT15-CMBS (Fig. 9)
33
Cable approx. Ø9.0
35
GT1595
50 or more (21 or more) 49 or more
50 or more (20 or more)
50 or more (20 or more)
61 or more
GOT only
50 or more (20 or more) 50 or more (24 or more) 50 or more (33 or more) 50 or more (43 or more) 50 or more
50 or more (20 or more) 50 or more (35 or more) 50 or more (40 or more) 50 or more
When a bus connection unit is installed
50 or more (20 or more)
49 or more
50 or more (20 or more)
When a serial communication unit is installed
50 or more (21 or more) 49 or more
50 or more (20 or more) 50 or more (39 or more) 50 or more (48 or more) 58 or more
50 or more (20 or more) 50 or more (39 or more) 53 or more
58 or more
–
–
When a RS-422 conversion unit is installed
When an Ethernet communication unit is installed
–
50 or more (20 or more)
50 or more (24 or more)
When the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) is installed
50 or more (20 or more)
50 or more (20 or more)
50 or more (24 or more)
50 or more (25 or more) 50 or more (35 or more) 64 or more
50 or more (30 or more) 50 or more (35 or more) 64 or more
50 or more (20 or more)
50 or more (20 or more)
When a MELSECNET/H communication unit (coaxial) is installed
When a MELSECNET/H communication unit (optical) is installed 50 or more (20 or more)✽1 50 or more (23 or more)✽1 50 or more (32 or more)✽1 50 or more (42 or more)✽1 79 or more 50 or more (20 or more)✽1 50 or more (23 or more)✽1 50 or more (37 or more)✽1 50 or more (42 or more)✽1 79 or more✽1
50 or more (23 or more) 50 or more (28 or more) 57 or more
50 or more (20 or more)
50 or more (20 or more)
57 or more
When a CC-link IE Controller Network communication unit is installed
50 or more (23 or more) 50 or more (28 or more) 57 or more
50 or more (20 or more)
50 or more (20 or more)
57 or more
When a CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit is installed
50 or more (29 or more)
50 or more (20 or more)
50 or more (29 or more)
50 or more (20 or more)
When a printer unit is installed
–
50 or more (20 or more)✽2 61 or more✽2 70 or more✽2 80 or more✽2
When a multimedia unit is installed
✽2
✽2
✽2
✽2
✽2
✽2
–
–
50 or more (20 or more) 61 or more
70 or more
80 or more
61 or more
75 or more
When a video input unit is installed
–
–
50 or more (25 or more)✽3
50 or more (20 or more)✽3
50 or more (20 or more)✽3
When a RGB input unit is installed
✽2
✽3
✽2
✽3
✽2
✽3
✽2
✽3
✽2
✽3
✽2
✽3
–
–
50 or more (20 or more)
61 or more
70 or more
80 or more
61 or more
75 or more
When a video/RGB input unit is installed
–
–
50 or more (25 or more)✽3
50 or more (20 or more)✽3
50 or more (20 or more)✽3
When a RGB output unit is installed
50 or more (20 or more)
When a CF card unit is installed
68 or more
68 or more
50 or more (20 or more) 50 or more (49 or more) 58 or more
50 or more 50 or more (20 or more) 50 or more (49 or more) 63 or more
97 or more
When a CF card extension unit is installed
50 or more
50 or more (20 or more)
50 or more (20 or more)
When an audio output unit is installed
50 or more (29 or more) 50 or more
50 or more (20 or more)
50 or more (20 or more) 50 or more (24 or more) 50 or more (29 or more) 58 or more
When an external input/output unit is installed
80 or more (20 or more)
50 or more (20 or more)
50 or more (20 or more)✽4
50 or more (20 or more)
(When a CF card is not used)
100 or more
50 or more (20 or more)
100 or more
50 or more (20 or more)
(When a CF card is used)
50 or more (20 or more)
100 or more (20 or more)
GOT main unit
GT15-EXCNB (Fig. 8)
500
Cable approx. Ø9.0
GT10
D
E
GT1655
11.5
20.5
75
For Maintenance
Personnel
B
C
CON2
A
GT166M
Fig.9
A7GT-CNB side
FG cable
1000
32
Ferrite core, approx. Ø35 × 40,
green holder tube
(Unit: mm)
GT167M
11.5
50
Cable approx. Ø8.0
20
50
Ferrite core, approx. Ø35 × 40,
green holder tube
PLC side
L
32
GOT side
GT16/GT15
GT1685
11.5
GOT side
CON1
The GOT must have the clearances from other devices as shown in [Fig. A]. The GOT may require more distance than the dimensions shown in the table
depending on the types of connection cables. Consider the connector dimensions and cable bending radius when designing the installation.
Fig.8
70
Cable approx. Ø17.0
Ferrite core, approx. Ø32 × 16,
green holder tube
110
Product installation spacing
GT1695
50
Fig.4
PLC side
PLC side
L
60
✽1 : GT15-CMEXSS-1 is a set consisting of GT15-EXCNB and GT15-CMBS.
(See Fig. A.)
For compatibility with GOT900 series, see ''Backward compatibility'' (page 81).
Item
20
60
Cable approx. Ø8.0
32.5
33.0
Fig.3
L
32
110
GOT side
Ferrite core, approx. Ø35 × 40,
green holder tube
PLC side
11.5
55
94.0
When installing the CF card extension unit on the control panel, make sure that the extension unit does not interfere with the extension unit
cable or the CF card interface of the GOT. Place the CF card extension unit at a distance of 25mm or more from the GOT.
For installation locations, see the GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) or the GT15 User's Manual.
Fig.7
93
115
GT15-CFEX-C08SET
Cautions when installing and uninstalling
11.5
32
50
Cable approx. Ø8.0
For Initial Startup &
Operations
B
L
70
CON2
A
60
GOT side
Type
20
CON1
When the CF card extension unit (mounting unit on control panel) is installed
Fig.2
50
103
66
66
✽1 : Same dimensions as A985GOT(-V)
✽2 : Same dimensions as A975/970GOT(-B)
✽3 : Same dimensions as F940GOT
✽4 : For the GT104M, GT1030 and GT1020, the tolerances are +1/0.
Ferrite core, approx. Ø35 × 40,
green holder tube
Ferrite core, approx. Ø35 × 40,
red holder tube
22
130
137
105
Fig. 1
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Figs. 8 & 9
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
35
121
0.6, 1.2, 3, 5, 10m
15, 20, 25, 30, 35m
1.2, 3, 5m
0.6, 1.2, 3, 5m
1.2, 2.5m
1.2, 2.5m
0.7, 1.2, 3, 5m
0.45, 0.7, 3, 5m
10.6, 20.6, 30.6m
0.5m
0.7, 1.2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30m
1m
35
153
GT15-QCMB
GT15-QCMBS
GT15-CMNB
GT15-ACMB
GT15-A370CMB-S1
GT15-A370CMB
GT15-A1SCMB
GT15-A1SCMNB
GT15-CMEXSS-1✽1
GT15-EXCNB
GT15-CMBS
GT15-J2C10B
110
Cable approx. Ø8.0
35
176
+2 ✽4
0
33
21
227
B
Panel opening
L
160
49
200
95
Cable approx. Ø10
11.5
58
289
Cable length (L)
Cable model name
145
21
4.7"
4.5"
3.7"
228
Fig.6
L
For Designers
5.7"
302
External
dimensions
34.5
10
55
8.4"
282.5
Fig.1
55
10.4"
(Unit: mm)
Bus connection cables
13
12.1"
383.5
+2 ✽4
0
42
15"
A
INDEX
GT1695
GT1595
GT1685✽1
GT1585✽1
GT167M✽2
GT157M✽2
GT1275
GT166M
GT156M
GT1265
GT1655✽3
GT155M✽3
GT115M✽3
GT105M✽3
GT104M
GT1030
GT1020
B
58
A
58
(Unit: mm)
Type of GOT main unit
Screen size
49
When the GOT is installed
29
Fig.17
30
1000
38
250
30
Ø7 Ø25 × 33
Ø13
63
GOT main unit
3
Fig.12
63
Fig.14
3
6
X
24 21
98
112
80
92
39
GOT main unit
3
105
98
133
8
19.5
✽1
✽3
18 18
34
26 19
✽1
✽3
GT15V-75V4R1 shown.
GOT side
8
8.5
58
14 32
98
105
6
9
62.5
29.5
10.5
29
63
X
✽18
✽20
✽18
✽20
L02CPU-P
✽18
WS0-CPU1
✽18
✽19
✽18
✽22
✽18
✽19
✽18
✽22
Motion
controller
CPU
(A series)
(small type)
✽10
✽18
Fig.28
82
18 19.5
56
55
110
77±0.5
85±0.5
113
91
Panel cut
Unit: mm
4 drilled holes
Ø5±0.5
37.5
✽5
✽18
4-R3 or less
(opening)
61+1.0 (opening)
panel cut
✽4
CC-Link (via G4)
CPU direct
connection
✽24
Ethernet
✽4
CC-Link (via G4)
✽1 ✽4
CC-Link (ID)
CC-Link IE
Controller Network ✽1
✽1 ✽3
MELSECNET/10
✽1
CC-Link IE
Field Network ✽1
✽18
✽14
✽18
✽14
✽18
✽18
✽14
✽18
✽18
✽23
✽18
✽18
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU-S3
A171SCPU-S3N
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
✽17
A172SHCPUN
FX1S
✽5
FX1N
✽18
✽5
✽18
MELSECFX series
FX1NC
FX2N
✽18
✽18
FX2NC
FX3G
FX3U
FX3UC
QJ72LP25-25
MELSEC
QJ72LP25G
NET/H
remote I/O station QJ72BR15
✽18
✽18
CC-Link IE Field
LJ72GF15-T2
Network head unit
CC-Link IE Field Network
NZ2GF-ET8
Ethernet adaptor unit
✽6
✽7
✽8
✽9
A3ACPUR21
A1NCPU
:
:
:
:
✽10 :
✽11 :
✽11
✽18
✽11
✽18
✽12 :
✽13 :
A3NCPU
✽14 :
A3NCPUP21
✽15 :
A3NCPUR21
126
4 drilled holes
Ø3.5
18
✽18
FX0N
✽18
A3ACPUP21
A2NCPUP21-S1
✽16
✽18
FX0S
✽9
A3ACPU
A2NCPU-S1
✽16
✽18
A173UHCPU-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
87+1,0 (opening)
28
✽3
✽16
✽18
A173UHCPU
✽5
✽18
A2NCPUP21
✽3
MELSECNET/H
✽2 ✽25
✽4
✽18
A2NCPU
60
✽16
A171SCPU
L26CPU-BT
A2ACPUR21-S1
MELSECA series
(AnCPU type)
Bus connection
CC-Link (via G4)
CPU direct
connection
✽24
Ethernet
✽4
CC-Link (via G4)
✽1 ✽4
CC-Link (ID)
CC-Link IE
Field Network ✽1
CC-Link IE
Controller Network ✽1
✽18
A1NCPUR21
52
43
63
25
✽3
Q06HCPU-A
✽18
A2NCPUR21
60
7
✽3
Q02HCPU-A
A1NCPUP21
X
30.5
21.5
5
22
X
13
30.5
21.5
For GT15
Ø18
Q02CPU-A
A2ACPUP21-S1
X
✽16
MR-MQ100
Motion
controller
CPU
(A series)
(large type)
A2ACPUP21
1.8
✽16
Q173DCPU
Q50UDEHCPU
A2ACPU-S1
✽16
Q172DCPU
Q170MCPU
A2ACPUR21
✽16
✽14
✽18
Q173HCPU
Q173DCPU-S1
A4UCPU
114.5
✽16
✽18
✽18
Q172DCPU-S1
A3UCPU
Control panel side
✽15
✽18
Q172HCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
A2UCPU
1.3
8
18
2.5
✽18
✽19
Q2ASHCPU-S1
105
98
30.5
21.5
105
1.8
Fig.27
3
98
112
2.5
✽5 : Dimension X when GOT is installed
15", 10.4" 8
5
12.1"
8.4", 5.7" 10
Fig.26
98
110
Fig.25
✽18
✽19
✽15
✽1 : Supported by the GT16 and GT15 only. (GT16 Handy can be connected only through Ethernet.)
✽2 : When connecting multiple GOTs, note that the following GOT models cannot be used together: GOT1000 series,
GOT-A900 series, GOT800 series and A77GOT.
✽3 : When MELSECNET/H is used in NET/10 mode, the GOT terminal cannot be connected directly to a remote I/O station.
✽4 : CC-Link (ID): Connected as CC-Link (intelligent device station)
CC-Link (via G4): Connected to a CC-Link system via AJ65BT-G4-S3 or AJ65BT-R2N
✽5 : When using A series computer link or an Ethernet module with a QnACPU, only the device ranges within AnACPU
specifications are supported. The following devices cannot be monitored:
• Devices that have been newly added to the QnACPU
• Latch relays (L) and step relays (S)
(In the QnACPU, the latch relay (L) and step relay (S) are separate devices from the internal relay (M), but the
internal relay is nonetheless accessed when either a latch relay or step relay is specified.)
• File register (R)
✽16 :
✽17 :
✽18 :
✽19 :
✽20 :
✽21 :
✽22 :
✽23 :
✽24 :
✽25 :
Use CPU function version B or later in a multi-CPU system.
When using a bus extension connector box, it must be installed on an extension base. (It cannot be installed on the main base.)
Use function version B or later for the CPU and MELSECNET/H network unit.
In a Q4ARCPU redundant system, the GOT must be connected via bus connection to the last stage's redundant
system extension base A68RB version B or later.
Computer link unit software version U or later must be used for the A2SCPU, A2SHCPU, A1SHCPU, A1SJHCPU,
A0J2HCPU, A171SHCPU and A172SHCPU computer link connections.
A0J2-C214-S1 (dedicated computer link unit for A0J2HCPU) cannot be used.
Only the following software version or later can be used to write data to the AnNCPU(S1), A2SCPU, A0J2HCPU and
A2CCPU. Earlier versions cannot be used.
• AnNCPU(S1)
: Version L or later for CPUs with link, and version H or later for CPUs without link
• A2SCPU
: Version H or later
• A0J2HCPU (with/without link) : Version E or later
• A0J2HCPU-DC24
: Version B or later
• A2CCPU
: Version H or later
Cannot connect to bus if an extension base is connected.
Use of SV13, SV22 or SV43 requires a motion controller with the following OS version installed.
SW6RN-SV13QM : 00H or later (00E or later in the case of bus connection or CPU direct connection with Q172CPU or Q173CPU)
SW6RN-SV22QM : 00H or later (00E or later in the case of bus connection or CPU direct connection with Q172CPU or Q173CPU)
SW6RN-SV43QM : 00B or later
Only a USB interface is available on the CPU unit. The CPU can be accessed via RS-232 of the QCPU of a
multi-CPU system.
Use a unit with the following Serial No.
Q172CPU Serial No. K✽✽✽✽✽✽✽ or later Q173CPU Serial No. J✽✽✽✽✽✽✽ or later
Use a unit with the following Serial No.
Q172CPU Serial No. N✽✽✽✽✽✽✽ or later Q173CPU Serial No. M✽✽✽✽✽✽✽ or later
When an expansion base is used, use A168B.
Applicable to GOT multi-drop connection. If a large number of devices are monitored on a GOT, the device updating
cycles on the screen may be delayed. (In general, it is recommended to monitor up to 250 device points per GOT, up to
750 device points in total)
The GT11 Handy is not applicable to GOT multi-drop connection.
Access these units through multi-CPU, QCPU (RS-232).
L6ADP-R2 is required.
Use Q12DCCPU-V having a serial number (first five digits) "12042" or later.
Use C24 serial port controlled by another CPU in a multi-CPU system.
Monitoring is possible only for the PLC CPU.
Supported by the GT16, GT15, and GT12 only.
Supported by the GT16, GT15, and GT11 only.
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
A
2.5
2.5
4
4
63
Motion
controller
CPU
(Q series)
A2UCPU-S1
Fig.24
GOT main unit
30
1.3
Fig.23
(Unit: mm)
GOT main unit
✽13
Q2ASCPU
8.5
26 19
✽3
One-layer configuration: Y (main unit factor) + Z (option factor)
Two-layer configuration: Y (main unit factor) + Z (option factor) + Z (option factor)
Three-layer configuration: Y (main unit factor) + Z (option factor) + Z (option factor) + Z (option factor)
Q173CPUN
Q2ACPU
X
19
35.5
✽13
✽18
MELSECQ2ACPU-S1
QnA series
Q3ACPU
(QnACPU type) Q4ACPU
63
21.5
✽13
Q172CPUN
✽18
A2ACPU
2.5
20.5
A2CJCPU-S3
✽13
Q12DCCPU-V ✽21
93
Z (option factor)
A2CCPUC24-PRF
Q173CPU
C controller
✽18
A2CCPUR21
Q20UDHCPU
WS0-CPU0
✽18
A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUC24
✽18
✽18
MELSECQ2ASCPU-S1
QnA series
Q2ASHCPU
(QnASCPU type)
X
X
8
GOT main unit
3
34
GT16M-V4R1 shown.
Option factor for communication units / option units
3
MELSECA series✽10
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU
MELSECWS series
✽11
✽18
A2CCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q4ARCPU
30.5
21.5
30.5
21.5
8
8.5
2.5
18 18
✽3
133
✽3
8
19.5
14
Fig.22
Fig.21
2.5
26
86
111
13
30.5
21.5
8
GOT main unit
3
133
Fig.20
24
X
32
46
X
13.5
(Unit: mm)
63
A0J2HCPU-DC24
L26CPU-PBT
28.5
80
9
-2
-0.5
-3.5
-0.5
1.5
MELSECL series
50
2
126
2.4
GOT main unit
133
23
GT1695
GT1595
GT1685, GT1585
GT167M, GT157M
GT166M, GT1655, GT156M, GT155M
✽4 : Dimension A for each communication unit
A0J2HCPUR21
✽7
L02CPU
68
17
101
136
(Mounting
pitch)
✽11
✽18
A0J2HCPUP21
Q20UDEHCPU
GOT main unit
3
✽18
A0J2HCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
63
Fig.18
✽18
✽12
A1SJHCPU
✽8
MELSEC-QS series QS001CPU
22
44
35
Y (main unit factor)
Calculation of dimension X
A1SJCPU-S3
Q10UDEHCPU
MELSECQ series
(A mode)
✽11
✽18
A2SHCPU
A1SJCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
✽3
A2SCPU-S1
Q25PHCPU
Q04UDEHCPU
X
✽11
✽18
A2SCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
Q03UDECPU
✽3
Fig.15
✽18
A1SHCPU
Q12PHCPU
✽18
✽18
A1SCPUC24-R2
Specifications,
External Dimensions
1st stage
2nd stage
3rd stage
Type of GOT
GT15-CFCD, GT15-CFEX-C08SET
GT16M-V4, GT16M-R2, GT16M-V4R1, GT16M-ROUT,
GT15V-75V4, GT15V-75R1, GT15V-75V4R1, GT15V-75ROUT,
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2,
GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE, GT15-J71LP23-25,
GT15-J71E71-100, GT15-J71BR13, GT15-J61BT13, GT15-PRN,
GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR, GT15-SOUT
GT16M-MMR, GT15-J71GP23-SX, GT15-J71GF13-T2
✽8
MELSECA series
(AnSCPU
type)✽10
Q06PHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
57
65
7
30.5
21.5
Fig.17
Fig.19
Model name
✽18
Q13UDEHCPU
21
✽3
Fig.16
GOT main unit factor
Model name
2.5
2.5
X
36
GOT main unit
✽18
Q06UDHCPU
8
2.5
31.5
✽3 : Dimension X when GOT is installed
✽3
Dimension
100 or more
X
Q25HCPU
✽6
Q02UCPU
2
✽3
GOT main unit
3
4
–
33.5
–
31
✽6
Q01UCPU
3
90
72
3
105
98
D
✽6
Q12HCPU
✽18
Q00UCPU
✽3
GOT main unit
44
35
19
23.5
✽3
GOT main unit
133
11.5
38
C
31.5
29
29.5
31
✽1 ✽3
✽2 ✽25
44.5
40.5
133
111
98
120
98
15
44
8.5
Fig.13
X
15.5
128
98
B
12
11
15
11
Q06HCPU
A1SCPU
✽18
MELSEC Process
Control
A
✽6
Q10UDHCPU
2.5
35
57.5
X
17
When F type connector is fitted
✽1 : The connector shape varies depending on the model.
✽2 : Dimensions A to D for each communication unit
2.5
2.5
4.5
4.5
Q02HCPU
Q00UJCPU
49.5
3
Handy GOT connector conversion box
2.5
72
64 (Mounting pitch)
External input/output unit
30.5
21.5 (12)
Fig. 18
Fig. 19
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
Fig. 22
Fig. 23
Fig. 24
Fig. 25
Fig. 26
Fig. 26
Fig. 27
Fig. 28
✽6
Q04UDHCPU
2
108
98
GT15-PRN
GT16M-MMR
GT16M-V4
GT15V-75V4
GT16M-R2
GT15V-75R1
GT16M-V4R1
GT15V-75V4R1
GT16M-ROUT
GT15V-75ROUT
GT15-CFCD
GT15-CFEX-C08SET
GT15-SOUT
GT15-DIOR
GT15-DIO
GT11H-CNB-37S
GT16H-CNB-42S
A2USHCPU-S1
Q02CPU
iQ Platform
External
dimensions
✽6
Redundant system Q12PRHCPU
(extension base) Q25PRHCPU
X
9.5
When connector
is fitted
CPU direct
connection
17.5 A
30.5
21.5 (3)
2.5
To bus
connection unit
133
Fig.11
A2USCPU-S1
Q01CPU
Redundant system Q12PRHCPU
(main base)
Q25PRHCPU
GT10
A2USCPU
✽7
✽6
Q03UDCPU
11
CF card unit
CF card extension unit
Audio output unit
64
3
80
71.5
GOT main unit
3
133
GOT main unit
133
Model
name
Q00CPU
Q02PHCPU
20
4.25
Fig.10
20
RGB output unit
6.5
5
8
10
155
Series
GT10
Video/RGB input unit
For GT16
✽1
Fig.9
Mounting hole
48
39.5 4.25
3
RGB input unit
15"
12.1"
10.4"
8.4", 5.7"
20.5
✽3
From base
unit
30.5
21.5
Video input unit
GT15-75QBUSL
GT15-75QBUS2L
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
48
38
98
117
Fig.8
89.7
57
7
20
MELSECQ series
(Q mode)
108
98
Fig.7
X
29.5
48
Printer unit
Multimedia unit
Other device
Q00JCPU
RS-232
11.5
9
✽1
✽3
31.5
Model
name
For Maintenance
Personnel
Model name
Product name
Model name
Fig.6
12
2.5
X
30.5
21.5
30.5
21.5
7
2.5
Optional units
GT15-QBUS
GT15-QBUS2
GT15-ABUS
GT15-ABUS2
✽1
✽4
✽5
Bus connection
102
A
B
30.5
B
21.5
3 GOT main unit
63
Fig.5
64.2
Fig. 6
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Fig. 15
Fig. 16
Fig. 17
✽1
✽2
✽3
C
Series
X
RS-422
46.7
GT15-RS2T4-9P
GT15-RS2T4-25P
A9GT-QCNB
A7GT-CNB
GT15-J71LP23-25
GT15-J71BR13
GT15-J71GP23-SX
GT15-J71GF13-T2
GT15-J61BT13
GT15-J71E71-100
GT01-RS4-M
GT10-9PT5S
GT11H(S)-CCL
GOT main unit
D
98
112
3
7
Fig. 5
107
98
A
30.5
21.5
63
X
For Initial Startup &
Operations
RS-232→RS-422 conversion unit (9-pin)
RS-232→RS-422 conversion unit (25-pin)
Bus extension connector box
Bus connector conversion box
Optical loop unit
MELSECNET/H
communication unit
Coaxial bus unit
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit
CC-Link communication unit Intelligent device station unit
Ethernet communication unit
Serial multi-drop connection unit
Connector conversion adapter
CC-Link interface unit
RS-422
conversion unit
Fig.4
Fig. 4
GT15-RS4-TE
✽1
✽2
✽3
C
Fig. 4
GT15-RS4-9S
2.5
X
117
98
RS-422/485 serial communication unit
(D-sub 9-pin (female))
RS-422/485 serial communication unit
(terminal block)
2.5
Connection configuration
GT16/GT15/GT12/GT11
GT10
For Designers
Serial
communication
unit
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 3
Fig. 3
Fig. 3
Connection configuration
GT16/GT15/GT12/GT11
INDEX
1ch GT15-QBUS
Standard model of bus connection unit for
QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q Series) 2ch GT15-QBUS2
1ch GT15-ABUS
Standard model of bus connection unit for
Bus
QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A Series) 2ch GT15-ABUS2
connection
1ch GT15-75QBUSL
Thin model of bus connection unit for
unit
QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q Series) 2ch GT15-75QBUS2L
1ch GT15-75ABUSL
Thin model of bus connection unit for
QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A Series) 2ch GT15-75ABUS2L
RS-232 serial communication unit
GT15-RS2-9P
(D-sub 9-pin (male))
98
107
External
dimensions
Model name
Connectable to a broad range of product lines.
Computer link
Mitsubishi PLCs/Motion controllers/Safety controllers/ C controllers
GOT main unit
137
Computer link
Fig.3
3
MELSECNET/10
GOT main unit
133
✽1
Fig.2
Communication units/bus extension connector boxes
MELSECNET/H
3
63
Fig.1
The GOT1000 series allows connection to Mitsubishi PLCs and a variety of other FA devices.
Computer link
Communication units/optional units
GOT main unit
Computer link
(Unit: mm)
Product name
For details of connection configurations, see the GOT1000 Series Handbook and the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual.
List of connectable models
CPU direct
connection
External dimensions
65
For details of connection configurations, see the GOT1000 Series Handbook and the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual.
List of connectable models
The GOT1000 series allows connection to Mitsubishi PLCs and a variety of other FA devices.
Modules usable when connected with Mitsubishi PLCs
For computer link connection
Serial communication module/computer link
Model name
CH1
CH2
CPU series
MELSEC-L Series
CC-Link IE Field Network head unit
MELSEC-Q series (A mode)
✽3
✽3
✽4
✽4
✽4
✽4
✽4
✽4
✽4
✽4
✽4
✽4
✽4 ✽6
✽6
✽6
✽4 ✽5
✽5
✽5
✽5 ✽6
✽5 ✽6
✽5
✽4
RS-422/485
RS-232
RS-422/485
RS-232
RS-422/485
RS-232
RS-232
RS-422/485
RS-232
–
–
RS-422/485
RS-232
RS-422/485
RS-422/485
RS-232
RS-422/485
RS-422/485
RS-232
RS-422/485
RS-232
RS-422/485
RS-232
RS-422/485
–
–
RS-422/485
–
–
–
–
–
RS-422/485
CPU series
MELSEC-Q series (Q mode)✽1
MELSEC-QS series
C controller
CPU series
C controller
MELSEC-QnA series
MELSEC-Q series (A mode)
MELSEC-A series
Motion controller CPU (A series)
CPU series
MELSEC-Q series (Q mode)
MELSEC-QS series
C controller
QJ71E71-B5
AJ71QE71N-T
AJ71QE71N-B5T
AJ71QE71
AJ71E71N-T
AJ71E71N-B5T
AJ71E71-S3
QJ71E71-B2
AJ71QE71-B5
A1SJ71QE71N3-T
A1SJ71QE71N-B5
A1SJ71E71N3-T
A1SJ71E71N-B5
A1SJ71E71N-B2
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit
QJ71GF11-T2
KOYO
DirectLOGIC
ELECTRONICS
05 series
INDUSTRIES
✽1
DirectLOGIC
06 series
CC-Link unit
MELSEC-QnA series
MELSEC-Q series (A mode)
MELSEC-A series
Motion controller CPU (A series)
QJ61BT11
QJ61BT11N
LJ61BT11
AJ61QBT11✽1
A1SJ61QBT11✽1
AJ61BT11✽1
A1SJ61BT11✽1
Sharp Manufacturing
Systems
✽1
JTEKT
✽1
✽1 : GOT can communicate only with CC-Link units function version B or later and software version J or later.
QJ71E71
A1SJ71QE71N-B2
A1SJ71QE71N-T
A1SJ71QE71N-B5T
A1SJ71E71N-T
A1SJ71E71N-B5T
Series
A1SJ71E71-B5-S3
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3
CC-Link unit
QJ61BT11
QJ61BT11N
LJ61BT11
PROSEC
T series
Peripheral device unit
AJ65BT-G4-S3
AJ65BT-R2N
TOSHIBA
✽1
✽1 : When using an A series Ethernet with QnACPU, only the device
ranges within AnACPU specifications are supported except for
the following devices.
• Devices that have been newly added to the QnACPU
• Latch relays (L) and step relays (S)
(In the QnACPU, the latch relay (L) and step relay (S) are
separate devices from the internal relay (M), but the internal
relay is nonetheless accessed when either a latch relay or
step relay is specified.)
• File register (R)
The GOT can be used to monitor Mitsubishi CNC C70 and C6/C64 and to set
their parameters.
Model
name
GT16/GT15/GT12/GT11
Connection configuration
Bus CPU direct Computer MELSEC MELSEC CC-Link IE CC-Link IE CC-Link CC-Link
Controller
Ethernet
connection connection link
NET/H NET/10 Network Field Network (ID) (via G4) ✽6
✽7
✽1
✽1 ✽2
✽1
✽1
✽1 ✽3
✽4
✽4
✽4
✽4
Robot controller
Large-sized H
series
Hitachi
Industrial
Equipment
Systems
✽1
H-200 to 252
series
H series
board type
EH-150 series
S10V
Hitachi
S10mini
Fuji Electric FA
MICREX-F
Components
& Systems ✽1
Panasonic Electric Works
Units usable when connected with MELDAS C6/C64
For MELSECNET/10 connection
GT16/GT15/GT12/GT11/GT10
RS-422
RS-232
Series
MR-J3-MA
MR-J3-MT
MR-J2S-MA
MR-J2S-MCP
MR-J2S-MCL
MR-J2M-P8A
MR-J2MMDU
MELDAS C6/C64
MELSECNET/H (NET/10 mode), MELSECNET/10 module
Optical loop
Coaxial bus
FCU6-EX879
FCU6-EX878
For CC-Link (ID) connection
Series
MELDAS C6/C64
CC-Link unit
YASKAWA Electric
✽10
FCU6-HR865
For Ethernet connection
The GOT can be used to monitor Mitsubishi robot
controllers and set their parameters.
Series
MELDAS C6/C64
✽5
Supported by the GT16 and GT15 only. (GT16 Handy can be connected only through Ethernet.)
Supported only when MELSECNET/H is used in NET/10 mode. The GOT terminal cannot be connected to a remote I/O net.
CC-Link (ID): Connected as CC-Link (intelligent device station).
The CRnQ-700 can be accessed via RS-232 of the QCPU of a multi-CPU system.
The CRnQ-700's DISP I/F cannot be used. Access the controller via the Ethernet module or the Ethernet port of the
QCPU of a multi-CPU system.
✽6 : Supported by the GT16, GT15, and GT12 only.
✽7 : Supported by the GT16, GT15, and GT11 only.
Ethernet module
FCU6-EX875
✽ : Applicable GOT varies depending on the connection destination.
GT16 ... When connected via RS-232, RS-422/485 or Ethernet : All models (Use the built-in interface of the GOT main unit.)
When connected via ports other than above : All models (Bus connection and network connection are enabled
by mounting a communication unit on the GOT main unit.)
GT15 ... When connected via RS-232
: All models (Use the built-in interface of the GOT main unit.)
When other than RS-232
: All models (Bus connection and network connection are enabled
by mounting a communication unit on the GOT main unit.)
GT12 ... When connected via RS-232, RS-422/485 or Ethernet : All models (Use the built-in interface of the GOT main unit.)
GT11 ... When connected via RS-232 or RS-422 : GT115M-QMBD
When using bus connection
: GT115M-QMBDQ, GT115M-QMBDA
Handy GOT ... When connected via RS-232, RS-422/485 or Ethernet : GT1665HS-VTBD
When connected via RS-232 or RS-422 : GT115MHS-QMBD
GT10 ... When connected via RS-232
: GT105M-QMBD, GT104M-QMBD, GT1030-HMD2/HMDW2,
GT1020-LMD2/LMDW2
When connected via RS-422
: GT105M-QMBD, GT104M-QMBD, GT1030-HMD/HMDW,
GT1030-HML/HMLW, GT1020-LMD/LMDW, GT1020-LML/LMLW
(The GT1030-HML/HMLW and GT1020-LML/LMLW can be used
only with the MELSEC-FXCPU.)
FA500
Yokogawa
Electric
FA-M3
✽10
STARDOM
✽14
✽13
MicroLogix 1000 series
(digital CPU)
✽5✽6✽7
✽12
✽3
MicroLogix 1000 series
Allen-Bradley (analog CPU) ✽5
(Rockwell
MicroLogix 1200 series ✽5
Automation,
MicroLogix 1500 series ✽5
Inc)
✽3
ControlLogix series
CompactLogix series
✽3
✽3
✽4
✽4
FlexLogix series
✽4
✽4
✽4
✽4
Series 90-30
✽3
Series 90-70
✽3
GE Fanuc
Automation
Corporation
✽1
VersaMax Micro
LS Industrial
Systems
K300S
K200S
K120S
K80S
Modicon
Premium
Schneider
Electric SA
Modicon
Quantum
SICK AG
Siemens AG
✽3
✽11
✽1 : The GT10 cannot be connected.
✽2 : The GOT cannot be connected to the CQM1-CPU11
because it does not have an RS-232 interface.
✽3 : RS-422 or RS232 is selectable.
✽4 : RS-232/RS-422 converter (TXU-2051) is required.
✽5 : Connection to the DH485 network via an adapter (1770-KF3) is possible.
✽6 : Connection to the DH485 requires a C-Series or later
CPU. (B-Series and earlier models do not support the
DH485 protocol.)
✽7 : A one-to-one connection requires a D-Series or later
CPU. (C-Series and earlier models do not support the
DF1 half-duplex format.)
✽1
✽1
✽8
✽8
✽1
✽8
✽1
✽11
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
Model name
Supported by the GT16 and GT15 only. (GT16 Handy can be connected only through Ethernet.)
When MELSECNET/H is used in NET/10 mode, the GOT terminal cannot be connected directly to a remote I/O station.
CC-Link (ID): Connected as CC-Link (intelligent device station).
Use NC system software version D0 or later.
Only a USB interface is available on the Q173NCCPU.
The Q173NCCPU can be accessed via RS-232 of the QCPU of a multi-CPU system.
✽6 : Supported by the GT16, GT15, and GT12 only.
✽7 : Supported by the GT16, GT15, and GT11 only.
TCmini series
✽5
✽12
✽9
Specifications,
External Dimensions
✽5
PROSEC
V series
Unified controller nv series
TOSHIBA
MACHINE
✽1
✽1 :
✽2 :
✽3 :
✽4 :
✽5 :
The GOT can be connected to Mitsubishi servo amplifiers
to set their parameters and display alarms.
TOYOPUC
series
connection✽1
A1SJ71QE71-B5
A1SJ71QE71-B2
MELDAS FCA C6
C6/C64
FCA C64
CRnD-700
66
KOSTAC SU
series
PZ series
DirectLOGIC
205 series
LJ71GF11-T2
CPU series
MELSEC-Q series (Q mode)
C controller
MELSEC-L series
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU
✽4
KEYENCE
For CC-Link (ID) connection
CNC
GT16/GT15/GT12/GT11
Connection configuration
Controller name
Bus CPU direct Computer MELSEC MELSEC CC-Link IE CC-Link IE CC-Link CC-Link
Controller
Ethernet
connection connection link
NET/H NET/10 Network Field Network (ID) (via G4) ✽6
✽7
✽1
✽1 ✽2
✽1
✽1 ✽3
✽1
✽1 :
✽2 :
✽3 :
✽4 :
✽5 :
SYSMAC CVM1/CV
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit
Ethernet module✽1
QJ71E71-100
AJ71QE71N3-T
AJ71QE71N-B5
AJ71QE71N-B2
AJ71E71N3-T
AJ71E71N-B5
AJ71E71N-B2
FX3U-ENET (-L)
GT16/GT15/GT12/GT11/GT10
RS-422
RS-232
Robot controllers
CRnQ-700
SYSYMAC C1000H
SYSYMAC C2000H
SLC500 series
SLC500-20
SLC500-30
SLC500-40
SLC5/01
SLC5/02
SLC5/03
SLC5/04
SLC5/05
1761-L10BWA
1761-L10BWB
1761-L16AWA
1761-L16BWA
1761-L16BWB
1761-L16BBB
1761-L32AWA
1761-L32BWA
1761-L32BWB
1761-L32BBB
1761-L32AAA
1761-L20AWA-5A
1761-L20BWA-5A
1761-L20BWB-5A
1762-L24BWA
1764-LSP
1756-L
1756-L1M1
1756-L1M2
1756-L1M3
1756-L61
1756-L62
1756-L63
1756-L55M12
1756-L55M13
1756-L55M14
1756-L55M16
1756-L55M22
1756-L55M23
1756-L55M24
1769-L31
1769-L32E
1769-L32C
1769-L35E
1769-L35CR
1794-L33
1794-L34
IC693CPU311
IC693CPU313
IC693CPU323
IC693CPU350
IC693CPU360
IC693CPU363
IC693CPU366
IC693CPU367
IC693CPU374
IC697CPU731
IC697CPX772
IC697CPX782
IC697CPX928
IC697CPX935
IC697CPU780
IC697CGR772
IC697CGR935
IC697CPU788
IC697CPU789
IC697CPM790
IC200UAA003
IC200UAR014
IC200UDD104
IC200UDD112
IC200UDR001
IC200UDR002
IC200UDR003
IC200UAL004
IC200UAL005
IC200UAL006
IC200UAA007
IC200UAR028
IC200UDD110
IC200UDD120
IC200UDD212
IC200UDR005
IC200UDR006
IC200UDR010
IC200UDD064
IC200UDD164
IC200UDR164
IC200UDR064
K4P-15S
K3P-07MS
K7M-DMMMU
K7M-DMMMS (/DC)
TSX P57 203M
TSX P57 253M
TSX P57 303M
TSX P57 353M
TSX P57 453M
140 CPU 311 10
140 CPU 434 12U
140 CPU 534 14U
140 CPU 651 50
140 CPU 651 60
140 CPU 671 60
140 CPU 113 02
140 CPU 113 03
140 CPU 434 12A
140 CPU 534 14A
Flexi Soft series
SIMATIC S7-200 series
SIMATIC S7-300 series
SIMATIC S7-400 series
MELSEC Process
Control
MELSERVO-J2M series
SYSMAC CS1
For CC-Link IE Field Network connection
✽2 : With function version A, either CH1 or CH2 can be
connected. With function version B or later, both
CH1 and CH2 can be connected.
✽3 : Only CH2 can be connected.
✽4 : Either CH1 or CH2 can be connected.
✽5 : When connecting to A1SHCPU, A2SCPU(S1),
A2SHCPU(S1), A1SJHCPU, A0J2HCPU,
A171SHCPU(N) or A172SHCPU(N), use computer link
module software version U or later.
✽6 : Computer link module/serial communication
module operate within the range of devices
available on AnACPU. (R devices cannot be
used.)
SYSMAC C200HS
SYSMAC C200H
SYSMAC α
AJ71QBR11
A1SJ71QBR11
AJ71BR11
A1SJ71BR11
QJ71GP21-SX✽1
QJ71GP21S-SX✽1
CPU series
MELSEC-Q series (Q-mode)
C controller
MELSEC-L series
SYSMAC CP1
Computer link connection CPU direct connection Ethernet
connection
RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232
✽9
✽2
✽3
Model name
iQ Platform
MELSERVO-J2-Super
series
OMRON
✽1 : GT11 and GT10 can monitor only the master station.
Model name
Servo amplifiers
SYSMAC CJ2
✽1 : In the extension mode, use a CPU with the first 5 digits of the serial No. are 12052 or higher.
FREQROL-S500/S500E
FREQROL-E500
FREQROL-F500/F500L
FREQROL-F500J
FREQROL-A500/A500L
FREQROL-V500/V500L
FREQROL-E700
FREQROL-F700
FREQROL-A700
FREQROL-D700
FREQROL-F700P/F700PJ
MELSERVO-J3 series
QJ71BR11
For CC-Link IE Controller Network connection
The GOT can be connected to Mitsubishi inverters to set their
parameters and display alarms.
Series
QJ71LP21
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71LP21S-25
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71LP21S-25
A1SJ71QLP21
AJ71QLP21
AJ71QLP21S A1SJ71QLP21S
AJ71LP21
A1SJ71LP21
CPM1
CPM1A
CPM2A
CPM2C
CQM1
CQM1H
CJ1H
CJ1M
CJ1G
CJ2H
CJ2M
CP1H
CP1L
CP1E (N type) ✽13
C200HS
C200H
C200HX
C200HE
C200HG
CS1H
CS1D
CS1G
C1000H
C2000H
CV500
CV2000
CV1000
CVM1
KV-700
KV-3000
KV-1000
KV-5000
KV-5500
SU-5E
SU-5M
SU-6B
SU-6M
PZ3
D2-240
D2-250-1
D2-260
D0-05AA
D0-05DD
D0-05AD
D0-05DD-D
D0-05AR
D0-05DR
D0-05DA
D0-05DR-D
D0-06DD1
D0-06AA
D0-06DD1-D
D0-06DD2
D0-06DR
D0-06DD2-D
D0-06DA
D0-06DR-D
D0-06AR
JW-21CU
JW-50CUH
JW-31CUH
JW-22CU
JW-70CUH
JW-32CUH
JW-100CUH
JW-33CUH
JW-100CU
Z-512J
PC3JG-P-CPU PC3JG-CPU
PC3J-CPU
PC3JL-CPU
PC2JC-CPU
PC2J16PR-CPU
PC2J16P-CPU
PC2J-CPU
PC2JR-CPU
PC2JS-CPU
T2 (PU224)
T2E
T2N
T3
T3H
model 3000 (S3)
model 2000 (S2)
model 2000 (S2T)
model 2000 (S2E)
PU811
TC3-01
TC6-00
TC3-02
TC8-00
TS2000
TS2100
H-302
H-4010
H-702
H-300
H-1002
H-700
H-2002
H-2000
H-200
H-252B
H-250
H-252C
H-252
H-20DR
H-28DT
H-28DR
H-40DT
H-40DR
H-64DT
H-64DR
HL-40DR
H-20DT
HL-64DR
EH-CPU104
EH-CPU308
EH-CPU208
EH-CPU316
LQP510
LQP520
LQP800
LQP011
LQP000
LQP120
LQP010
F55
F140S
F70
F15MS
F120S
FP0-C16CT
FP1-C24C
FP0-C32CT
FP1-C40C
FP0R
FP2
FP5
FP2SH
FP10 (S)
FP3
FP10SH
FP-M (C20TC) FP-Σ
FP-M (C32TC)
FP-X
GL120
GL130
GL60S
GL60H
GL70H
CP-9200SH
CP-9300MS
MP920
MP930
MP940
PROGIC-8
CP-9200 (H)
CP-312
CP-317
MP2200
MP2300
FA500
F3SP05
F3SP08
F3SP10
F3SP20
F3SP30
F3FP36
F3SP21
F3SP38
F3SP25
F3SP53
F3SP35
F3SP58
F3SP28
F3SP59
F3SP66
F3SP67
NFCP100
NFJT100
GT16/GT15/GT12/GT11/GT10
Manufacturer
Computer link connection CPU direct connection Ethernet
connection
GT10
Inverters
SYSMAC CJ1
✽1 : Use CPU and MELSECNET/H network unit function version B or later.
For Ethernet connection
MELSEC-Q series (A mode)
MELSEC-A series
Motion controller CPU (A series)
MELSEC-FX series
SYSMAC CQM1
SYSMAC CPQ1H
MELSECNET/H (NET/10 mode), MELSECNET/10 module
Optical loop
Coaxial bus
MELSEC-Q series (Q mode)✽1
MELSEC-QS series
Model name
RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232
SYSMAC CPM
For MELSECNET/10 connection
CPU series
MELSEC-Q series (Q mode)
C controller
MELSEC-L series
MELSEC-QnA series
GT16/GT15/GT12/GT11/GT10
Manufacturer
QJ71BR11
✽1 : Use CPU and MELSECNET/H network unit function version B or later.
For CC-Link (via G4)
CPU series
MELSEC-Q series (Q mode)/MELSEC-QS series
QJ71LP21
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71LP21S-25
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71LP21S-25
For Maintenance
Personnel
✽1 : RS-485 communication is not possible; therefore,
A0J2-C214-S1 is unusable.
When using A series computer link with QnACPU,
only the device ranges within AnACPU specifications
are supported.
The following devices cannot be monitored:
• Devices that have been newly added to the QnACPU
• Latch relays (L) and step relays (S)
(In the QnACPU, the latch relay (L) and step relay
(S) are separate devices from the internal relay
(M), but the internal relay is nonetheless accessed
when either a latch relay or step relay is specified.)
• File register (R)
✽2
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-422/485
Modular connector
Modular connector
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-422/485
RS-232
RS-232
RS-422
RS-232
RS-232
RS-422
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-422/485
RS-232
RS-232
RS-422/485
RS-232
RS-422/485
RS-232
RS-232
For Initial Startup &
Operations
MELSEC-A series
Motion controller CPU
(A series)
✽2
The GOT can be connected with third party PLCs through RS-232 communication at up to 115.2kbps or Ethernet.
For Designers
MELSEC-QnA series
QJ71C24
QJ71C24-R2
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
QJ71CMO
QJ71CMON
LJ71C24
LJ71C24-R2
A1SJ71UC24-R2
A1SJ71UC24-R4
AJ71QC24
AJ71QC24-R2
AJ71QC24-R4
AJ71QC24N
AJ71QC24N-R2
AJ71QC24N-R4
A1SJ71QC24
A1SJ71QC24-R2
A1SJ71QC24N
A1SJ71QC24N-R2
A1SJ71QC24N1
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2
AJ71UC24
A1SJ71UC24-R2
A1SJ71UC24-R4
AJ71UC24
A1SJ71UC24-R2
A1SJ71UC24-R4
A1SJ71C24-R2
A1SJ71C24-R4
A1SCPUC24-R2
A2CCPUC24
MELSECNET/H module
Optical loop
Coaxial bus
INDEX
MELSEC-Q series
(Q mode)
Motion controller CPU
(Q series)
MELSECNET/H remote I/O
station
Third party PLCs/Motion controllers/Safety controllers
For MELSECNET/H connection
module✽1
✽8 : EtherNet/IP (PCCC protocol) is supported.
✽9 : Supported by the GT16, GT15, and GT12 only.
✽10 : The GT10 is applicable only to the following models:
CP-9200SH, MP920, MP930, MP940, MP2200,
MP2300.
✽11 : Only MODBUS®/TCP connection is supported. Use a
MODBUS/TCP communication driver.
✽12 : Not applicable to duplex Ethernet
✽13 : CPU units with 20 points or less of CP1E (N type) can
be connected only directly to CPU.
✽14 : Only the CJ2M-CPU1M can be connected.
67
For details of connection configurations, see the GOT1000 Series Handbook and the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual.
List of connectable models
The GOT1000 series allows connection to Mitsubishi PLCs and a variety of other FA devices.
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Connectable Device List
Third party PLCs/Motion controllers/Safety controllers
Manufacturer
Modules usable when connected with a third party computer link and Ethernet modules
Manufacturer
KV-L20V
Fuji Electric Micro
Systems
Controller X
EN811
COMM-H
COMM-2H
LQE565
LQE165
COMM-H
COMM-2H
LQE560
LQE060
NV1L-RS2
SDC
LQE160
YAMATAKE
DMC
FFK120A-C10
NC1L-RS4
FFU120B
AFPX-COM3
NC1L-RS2
FFU120B
AFP2462
AFP3462
AFP5462
JAMSC-IF60
JAMSC-IF61
CP-217IF
AFPX-COM1
AFPX-COM2
AFPX-COM4
217IF
218IF
217IF-01
218IF-01
218IF-01
LC01-0N
LC02-0N
F3LC01-1N
F3LC11-1N
F3LC11-1F
F3LC12-1F
NX
GREEN series
F3LE01-5T
F3LE11-0T
F3LE12-0T
1756-ENBT
1756-ENET
Yokogawa
TSX ETY 4102
TSX ETY 5102
140 NOE 771 00
140 NOE 771 10
140 NWM 100 00
UT2000 series
The GOT can be used to set parameters and display alarms.
Manufacturer
Model name
UTAdvanced series
GT16/GT15/GT12/GT11
RS-485
RS-232
MINAS A4 series
MINAS A4F series
MINAS A4L series
MINAS A5 series
Panasonic
Manufacturer
X-SEL
PCON
ACON
SCON
Model name
In-Panel NEO
ACS-13A series
DCL-33A series
JC series
JCM-33A series
FCR-100 series
FCD-100 series
FCR-23A series
PC-900 series
PCD-300 series
FIR series
JIR-301-M series
Model name
The GOT can be used to log data,
set parameters, and display alarms.
GT16/GT15/GT12/GT11
RS-485
RS-422 RS-232 Ethernet�9
E5AN/E5EN
E5CN
(2-wire type)�1
E5GN
E5ZN
ACS-13A M/M,M,C5�8
DCL-33A-M/M,M,C5�8
JCS-33A-M/MM,C5�8
JCR-33A-M/MM,C5�8 (2-wire type)�1
JCD-33A-M/MM,C5�8
JCM-33A-M/M,MC5�8
FCR-13A-M/M,C
FCR-15A-M/M,C
FCD-13A-M/M,C
FCD-15A-M/M,C
FCR-23A-M/M,C
PC935-M/M,C
PC935-M/M,C5�8
(2-wire type)�1
PC955-M/M,C
PC955-M/M,C5�8
�1
PCD-33A-M/M,C5�8
(2-wire type)
FIR-201-M,C
JIR-301-MM,C5�8
(2-wire type)�1
�2
FB
RKC
Instrument
RB
PF
HA
RMC
MA
AG
THV
SA
SRX
�2
(2-wire type)�1
(4-wire type)
�2
(2-wire type)�1
(4-wire type)
(2-wire type) �1
�10
�11
MELSEC-Q series
(A mode)
MELSEC-L series
MELSEC-WS series
C controller
�1
(2-wire type/
4-wire type)
MELSEC-QnA series
(QnACPU type)
MELSEC-QnA series
(QnASCPU type)
�2
(2-wire type)
�1
MELSEC-A series
(AnCPU type)�10
(4-wire type)
�1
(2-wire type/
4-wire type)
�11
(2-wire type)�1
(2-wire type)�1�6
�5
�2
MELSEC-A series
(AnSCPU type)�10
�2
(2-wire type)�1
�2
�2
(2-wire
MELSEC-A
series�10
type)�1
�2
�1 : Supported by the GT16 and GT15 only. Not supported by the GT16 Handy.
GT16: Use RS-422/485 interface or GT15-RS4-TE. GT-15-RS4-9S is not applicable.
GT15: Use GT15-RS4-TE. GT-15-RS4-9S is not applicable.
�2 : If the temperature controller/indicating controller is designed for RS-485, use the RS-232/RS-485 converter supplied by the manufacturer.
�3 : If the temperature controller/indicating controller is designed for RS-422, use the RS-232/RS-422 converter supplied by the manufacturer.
�4 : Only indicating controllers with RS-232 serial communication function can be connected.
�5 : Use a communication extension module (Z-COM).
�6 : Use a communication extension module (Z-COM) depending on the temperature controller system configuration.
�7 : Select a model name that supports the MODBUS® communication function.
�8 : Connection is possible to products manufactured after October, 2010 (Instrument Nos. 07Axxxxxx, 07Kxxxxxx,
07Xxxxxxx, and subsequent Nos.)
�9 : Supported by the GT16, GT15, and GT12 only.
�10: Only MODBUS®/RTU connection is supported. Use a MODBUS/RTU communication driver.
�11: Only MODBUS®/TCP connection is supported. Use a MODBUS/TCP communication driver.
MODBUS® devices
MELSEC-QS series
Connection to all MODBUS®/RTU and MODBUS®/TCP slave devices
is possible by using the MODBUS/RTU communication driver or the
MODBUS/TCP communication driver.
(For the GT11 and GT10, only MODBUS®/ RTU connection is supported.)
Motion
controller CPU
(Q series)
Motion
controller CPU
(A series/large type)
Motion
controller CPU�10
(A series/small type)
MELSEC-FX
series
For details regarding operation-verified MODBUS® devices, refer to Technical Bulletin
No. GOT-A-0037 (List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series MODBUS® Connection).
�2
�4
�2
Microcomputer connection
Data can be written to and read from virtual devices on a
GOT by connecting a personal computer, microcomputer
board, PLC, etc. to the GOT.
� : Applicable GOT varies depending on the connection destination.
GT16 ... When connected via RS-232, RS-422/485 or Ethernet : All models (Use the built-in interface of the GOT main unit.)
When connected via ports other than above : All models (Bus connection and network connection are enabled by
mounting a communication unit on the GOT main unit.)
GT15 ... When connected via RS-232
: All models (Use the built-in interface of the GOT main unit.)
When other than RS-232
: All models (Bus connection and network connection are enabled by
mounting a communication unit on the GOT main unit.)
GT12 ... When connected via RS-232, RS-422/485 or Ethernet : All models (Use the built-in interface of the GOT main unit.)
GT11 ... When connected via RS-232 or RS-422 : GT115M-QMBD
When using bus connection
: GT115M-QMBDQ, GT115M-QMBDA
Handy GOT ... When connected via RS-232, RS-422/485 or Ethernet : GT1665HS-VTBD
When connected via RS-232 or RS-422 : GT115MHS-QMBD
GT10 ... When connected via RS-232
: GT105M-QMBD, GT104M-QMBD, GT1030-HMD2/HMDW2,
GT1020-LMD2/LMDW2
When connected via RS-422
: GT105M-QMBD, GT104M-QMBD, GT1030-HMD/HMDW,
GT1030-HML/HMLW, GT1020-LMD/LMDW, GT1020-LML/LMLW
(The GT1030-HML/HMLW and GT1020-LML/LMLW can be used
only with the MELSEC-FXCPU.)
MELSECNET/H
remote I/O station
Use a network unit applicable to the network board used for GT SoftGOT1000. The network boards that can be used with
GT SoftGOT1000 are shown on the right. Q81BD-J71GF11-T2
�5
For Ethernet connection
�5 �6 �12
�5 �6
MELSEC-Q series (A mode)/
MELSEC-A series/
Motion controller CPU (A series)�
MELSEC-FX series
� : Only the device ranges within AnACPU specifications are supported.
Third party PLCs
Manufacturer
Small-size
PLC
OMRON
Large-size
PLC
�14
�4
�4
Yaskawa Electric
�4
�4
Yokogawa Electric
�7
CPM2A
C200HX
C200HG
CQM1
CQM1H
CS1H
CS1G
CS1D
CJ1H
CJ1G
CJ1M
CJ2H
CJ2M
CP1E (N type)
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1
GL120
GL130
GL60S
GL60H
GL70H
CP-9200SH
CP-9300MS
MP920
MP930
MP940
PROGIC-8
CP-9200 (H)
MP2200
MP2300
F3SP05 F3SP38
F3SP08 F3SP53
F3FP36 F3SP58
F3SP21 F3SP59
F3SP25 F3SP66
F3SP35 F3SP67
F3SP28
Ethernet
�18
�17
Modules usable when connected with PLCs made by the OMRON Corporation
For Ethernet connection
Ethernet unit
CS1W-ETN21, CS1D-ETN21D, CJ1W-ETN21
Modules usable when connected with PLCs made by the Yaskawa Electric Corporation
For computer link connection
MEMOBUS module/communication module
JAMSC-IF60, JAMSC-IF61, CP-217IF, 217IF-01, 217IF, 218IF-01
For Ethernet connection
�7
Communication module
218IF, 218IF-01
Modules usable when connected with PLCs made by the Yokogawa Electric Corporation
For Ethernet connection
�7
Ethernet interface module
F3LE01-5T, F3LE11-0T, F3LE12-0T
[CNCs] Mitsubishi CNCs
�7
Series
�7
CNC C70
�7
MELDAS C6/C64
Model name
Q173NCCPU
FCA C6
FCA C64
Connection configuration
CPU direct Computer MELSECNET/ MELSECNET/
CC-Link IE
CC-Link IE Ethernet
connection
link
H�1
10�2
Controller Network Field Network
�11
�9
�9
Usable units when connected to the MELDAS C6/C64
For Ethernet connection
USB
connection
CPU series
MELSEC-Q series (Q mode)
MELSEC-Q series (A mode)
MELSEC-L series/CC-Link IE Field Network
CPU series
Ethernet module
MELDAS C6/C64
FCU6-EX875
[Robot] Mitsubishi Industrial Robots
�8
Controller name
�8
CRnQ-700
CRnD-700
For computer link connection�
MELSEC-A series
Connection configuration
CPU direct connection (RS-232)
Computer link (RS-232)
Model name
Micro PLC
Modules usable when connected with Mitsubishi PLCs
� : Only RS-232 communication is possible.
Ethernet module
QJ71E71-100/QJ71E71-B5/QJ71E71-B2/QJ71E71
AJ71QE71N3-T/AJ71QE71N-B5/AJ71QE71N-B2/AJ71QE71N-T/
AJ71QE71N-B5T/AJ71QE71/AJ71QE71-B5/A1SJ71QE71N3-T/
A1SJ71QE71N-B5/A1SJ71QE71N-B2/A1SJ71QE71N-T/
A1SJ71QE71N-B5T/A1SJ71QE71-B5/A1SJ71QE71-B2
AJ71E71N3-T/AJ71E71N-B5/AJ71E71N-B2/AJ71E71N-T/
AJ71E71N-B5T/AJ71E71-S3/A1SJ71E71N3-T/A1SJ71E71N-B5/
A1SJ71E71N-B2/A1SJ71E71N-T/A1SJ71E71N-B5T/
A1SJ71E71-B5-S3/A1SJ71E71-B2-S3
FX3U-ENET (-L)
MELSEC-QnA series
CC-Link IE Field
LJ72GF15-T2
Network head unit
CC-Link IE Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB
Ethernet adaptor unit�15
MELSEC-QnA series
CPU series
MELSEC-Q series (Q mode)/MELSEC-QS series
Serial communication module/computer link module
QJ71C24(-R2)/QJ71C24N(-R2)/QJ71CMO(N)
A1SJ71UC24-R2/A1SJ71C24-R2
LJ71C24 (-R2)
AJ71QC24(-R2)/AJ71QC24N(-R2)/
A1SJ71QC24(-R2)/A1SJ71QC24N(-R2)
AJ71C24-S8/AJ71UC24/A1SJ71C24-R2/A1SJ71UC24-R2
Connection configuration
CPU direct Computer MELSECNET/ MELSECNET/ CC-Link IE
CC-Link IE Ethernet
connection
link
H�1
10�2
Controller Network Field Network
�11
�19
�1 : Connection configuration for network type MELSECNET/H mode and MELSECNET/H extension mode (PC-to-PC net).
�2 : Connection configuration for network type MELSECNET/10 mode (PC-to-PC net).
(Including the case where the mode is switched from MELSECNET/H to MELSECNET/10 (PC-to-PC net))
�3 : For multi-CPU configuration, use the CPU function version B or later.
�4 : When using a computer link module for A series or an Ethernet module with QnACPU, GT SoftGOT1000 cannot monitor
the module.
�5 : Use the PLC CPU and MELSECNET/H network module function version B or later.
�6 : Use the driver (SW0DNC-MNETH-B) of version K or later for the MELSECNET/H board.
�7 : Only the following software version or later can be used to write data to the AnNCPU(S1), A2SCPU, A0J2HCPU and
A2CCPU. Earlier versions cannot be used.
• AnNCPU(S1): Version L or later for a CPU with link, and version H or later for a CPU without link
• A2SCPU: Version H or later • A0J2HCPU: Version E or later
• A0J2HCPU-DC24: Version B or later • A2CCPU: Version H or later
�8 : When connected with GT SoftGOT1000, the CPUs cannot be connected simultaneously with other MELSOFT products
(GX Developer, etc.).
�9 : Use a MELDAS C6/C64 of the following NC system software version.
• NC system software version D0 or later
�10: Computer link unit software version U or later must be used for the A2SCPU, A2SHCPU, A1SHCPU, A1SJHCPU,
A0J2HCPU, A171SHCPU and A172SHCPU computer link connection.
A0J2-C214-S1 (computer link unit for A0J2HCPU) cannot be used.
�11: Accessing Q173NCCPU, CRnQ-700 must be performed via USB or RS-232 of QCPU in the multi-CPU system.
�12: MELSECNET/H extension mode cannot be used.
�13: Only the PLC unit (No.1) of Q170MCPU can be connected. The peripheral I/F cannot be used.
�14: For connection through RS-232, L6ADP-R2 is required.
�15: Host station monitoring is not possible.
�16: Use a CPU with the first 5 digits of the serial No. are 12042 or higher.
�17: Only the CJ2M-CPU1M can be connected.
�18: Not applicable to duplex Ethernet
�19: The CRnQ-700's DISP I/F cannot be used. Access the controller via the Ethernet module or the Ethernet port of the QCPU
of a multi-CPU system.
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
Thermac NEO
GT16/GT15/GT12/GT11/GT10
RS-232
RS-422
XSEL-J/K/KE
XSEL-P/Q
XSEL-KT/KET
XSEL-JX/KX
XSEL-KTX
XSEL-PX/QX
SSEL
PCON-C/CG/CF/CY
PCON-SE
PCON-PL/PO
ACON-C/CG/CY
ACON-SE
ACON-PL/PO
SCON-C
Temperature controllers/Indicating controllers
Manufacturer
CB
The GOT can be used to monitor robot controllers and
set their parameters.
(2-wire type)�1
For CC-Link IE Field Network connection
�5
Specifications,
External Dimensions
SSEL
IAI
SRZ
Redundant system
(main base)
Redundant system
(extension base)
For CC-Link IE Controller Network connection
Use a network unit applicable to the network board used for GT SoftGOT1000. The network boards that can be used with
GT SoftGOT1000 are shown on the right. Q80BD-J71GP21-SX and Q80BD-J71GP21S-SX
USB
connection
MELSEC Process
Control
Robot controllers
SR Mini HG
MELSEC-Q series
(Q mode)
Use a network unit applicable to the network board used for GT SoftGOT1000. The network boards that can be used with
GT SoftGOT1000 are shown on the right. Q80BD-J71BR11 (coaxial loop), Q80BD-J71LP21-25 (optical loop) and
Q80BD-J71LP21G (optical loop)
iQ Platform
Servo amplifiers
UT100 series
�2
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU �3
Q01CPU �3
Q02CPU �3
Q02HCPU �3
Q06HCPU �3
Q12HCPU �3
Q25HCPU �3
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU
Q25PRHCPU
Q12PRHCPU
Q25PRHCPU
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
QS001CPU
Q02CPU-A
Q02HCPU-A
Q06HCPU-A
L02CPU
L26CPU-BT
L02CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
WS0-CPU0
WS0-CPU1
Q12DCCPU-V �16
Q2ACPU (-S1)
Q3ACPU
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU (-S1)
Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU (-S1)
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU (-S1)
A2ACPUP21 (-S1)
A2ACPUR21 (-S1)
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
A3ACPUR21
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU (-S1)
A2NCPUP21 (-S1)
A2NCPUR21 (-S1)
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
A2USCPU (-S1)
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
A2SCPU (-S1)
A2SHCPU (-S1)
A1SJCPU (-S3)
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU (N)
Q173CPU (N)
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Q172DCPU (-S1)
Q173DCPU (-S1)
Q170MCPU �13
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU (-S3)
A373UCPU (-S3)
A171SCPU (-S3)
A171SCPU-S3N
A171SHCPU (N)
A172SHCPU (N)
A173UHCPU (-S1)
FX0S
FX0N
FX1S
FX1N
FX1NC
FX2N
FX2NC
FX3G
FX3U
FX3UC
QJ72LP25-25
QJ72LP25G
QJ72BR15
Connection configuration
CPU direct Computer MELSECNET/ MELSECNET/ CC-Link IE
CC-Link IE Ethernet
H�1
10�2
connection
link
Controller Network Field Network
GT10
IC693CMM311
IC697CMM711
G7L-CUEB
G6L-CUEB
G4L-CUEA
Model name
For Maintenance
Personnel
FFK120A-C10
Schneider Electric SA
Ethernet unit
68
AL3000 series
AH3000 series
SE3000 series
JU series
KE series
LE5000 series
THU-5139
JAMSC-120NOM27100
JAMSC-IF612
217IF
217IF-01
LC02-0N
Yokogawa Electric
Personal computer link module/ F3LC11-2N
Ethernet interface module
Allen-Bradley (Rockwell Automation, Inc.)
EtherNet/IP communication module
GE Fanuc Automation Corporation IC693CMM311
IC697CMM711
Communication module
G7L-CUEC
LS Industrial Cnet communication unit
Systems
G4L-CUEA
Cnet communication module G6L-CUEC
Shinko
Technos
KP series
ZW-10CM
YASKAWA Electric
MEMOBUS module/
communication module
OMRON
CHINO
(2-wire type)�1
For MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connection
Mitsubishi PLCs and motion controllers
Series
�2
�3
For Initial Startup &
Operations
Panasonic Electric Works
Computer communication unit
KV-L20R
KV-L20
U-01DM
D2-DCM
D0-DCM
JW-21CM
JW-10CM
THU-2755
THU-2927
Ethernet
CS1W-ETN21
CS1D-ETN21D
CJ1W-ETN21
[PLCs/motion controllers]
For Designers
KEYENCE
Multi-communication unit
KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES
Data communication module/
serial data communication module
Sharp Manufacturing Systems
Link unit
JTEKT
Link unit
TOSHIBA Ethernet unit
Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems
Intelligent serial port module
Hitachi
Communication module
RS-232C
Fuji Electric interface card
RS-232C/485
FA
Components interface capsule
& Systems General interface
module
RS-232
C200H-LK201-V1
C500-LK201-V1
CS1W-SCU21
CS1W-SCB21/41
CJ1W-SCU21-V1
CJ1W-SCU21-V1+CP1W-EXT01
CJ1W-SCU41
C200HW-COM02/05/06
CQM1-CIF01/02
CQM1-SCB41
CPM1-CIF01
CPM2C-CN111
CPM2C-CIF01-V1
CP1W-CIF01
KV-L20R
KV-L20V
KV-L20
U-01DM
D2-DCM
D0-DCM
LT350, LT370
LT450, LT470
DZ1000 �7
DZ2000 �7
LT230
LT830
GT120
DB1000
DB2000
KP1000
KP2000
AL3000
AH3000
SE3000
JU
KE3000
LE5000
PXR
PXR3/4/5/9
PXG
PXG4/5/9
PXH
PXH9
SDC20/21
SDC30/31
SDC40A/40B/40G
SDC15
SDC25/26
SDC35/36
DMC10
DMC50
NX-D15
NX-D25
UT320/321
UT350/351
UT420
UT450
UT520
UT550/551
UT750
UP350/351
UP550
UP750
UM330/331
UM350/351
US1000
UT130
UT150
UT152
UT155
UP150
UT2400
UT2800
UT32A/UT35A
UT52A/UT55A
UP35A/UP55A
UM33A
H-PCP-J
H-PCP-A, H-PCP-B�7
Z-TIO, Z-DIO, ZCT
CB100/400/500�7
CB700/900�7
FB100
FB400/900
RB100/400/500/700/900
PF900/901
HA400/401/900/901
RMC500
MA900/901
AG500
THV-A1
SA100/200
X-TIO
GT16/GT15/GT12/GT11
RS-485
RS-422 RS-232 Ethernet�9
INDEX
OMRON
Host link unit/
communication unit/
communication board/
Ethernet unit
RS-422
C200H-LK202-V1
C500-LK201-V1
CQM1-SCB41
CJ1W-SCU41
CJ1W-SCU21-V1+CP1W-EXT01
CS1W-SCB41
C200HW-COM03/06
CP1W-CIF11
CP1W-CIF12
CJ1W-CIF11
LT300 series
LT400 series
DZ1000 series
DZ2000 series
LT230 series
LT830 series
GT120 series
DB1000 series
DB2000 series
Model name
[MODBUS® devices]
Connection to all MODBUS®/TCP slave devices is possible by using the MODBUS/TCP communication driver.
For details regarding operation-verified MODBUS® devices, refer to Technical Bulletin No. GOT-A-0037 (List of
Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series MODBUS® Connection).
69
Function list
P.49
GT1655 GT1665 GT1595
-VTBD HS-VTBD -XTBM
XGA
SVGA
SVGA
VGA
VGA
SVGA
VGA
VGA
VGA
VGA �4
XGA
15"
12.1"
10.4"
10.4"
10.4"
8.4"
8.4"
8.4"
5.7"
6.5"
15"
GT
GT1585(V) GT1575(V) GT1575 GT157M GT1565 GT1562 GT155M GT1275 GT1265 SoftGOT
-STBM
-STBM -VTBM -VNBM -VTBM -VNBM -MMBD -VNBM -VNBM
1000
SVGA
SVGA
VGA
VGA
VGA
VGA VGA/QVGA VGA
VGA
Version3
10.4"
10.4"
8.4"
8.4"
5.7"
10.4"
8.4"
12.1"
10.4"
�4
�3
GT11
GT10 �4
GT115M GT115M GT115M GT105M GT104M GT1030
GT1020
-QMBD -QMBDM HS-QMBD -QMBD -QMBD -HBM(W)(2) -LBM(W)(2)
QVGA
QVGA
QVGA �4
QVGA
QVGA
5.7"
5.7"
5.7"
5.7"
4.7"
4.5"
3.7"
�12
�10
15MB
Up to
57MB
15MB
Up to
57MB
15MB
Up to
57MB
15MB
Up to
57MB
11MB
Up to
53MB
15MB
Up to
57MB
15MB
Up to
57MB
11MB
Up to
53MB
15MB
Up to
57MB
15MB
Up to
57MB
9MB
Up to
57MB
9MB
Up to
57MB
9MB
Up to
57MB
9MB
Up to
57MB
5MB
Up to
53MB
9MB
Up to
57MB
5MB
Up to
53MB
9MB
Up to
57MB
6MB
6MB
P.49
57MB
3MB
3MB
3MB
3MB
3MB
GT1055QSBD only
GT1045QSBD only
GT1050QBBD only
GT1040QBBD only
1.5MB
512KB
P.52~
GT1555MTBD only
4,096 colors
GT1555QSBD only
GT1675VNBM only
256 colors
GT1575VNBM only
GT1672VNBM only
GT1155GT1155
QMBDQ/A only HS-QSBD only
GT1150QLBD only
GT1150GT1150
QLBDQ/A only HS-QLBD only
For Maintenance
Personnel
16 colors
GT1155QMBD only
GT1572VNBM only
Monochrome (black/white) 16 gray scales
GT1550QLBD only
Monochrome (black/white) 2 colors
1920 × 1200 dots (WUXGA) (max. at specified resolution)
1600 × 1200 dots (UXGA)
1280 × 1024 dots (SXGA)
1024 × 768 dots (XGA)
800 × 600 dots (SVGA)
640 × 480 dots (VGA)
GT1555VTBD only
P.52~
P.52~
GT155MQMBD only
288 × 96 dots
160 × 64 dots
RS-232 interface
RS-422 interface
RS-422/232 interface
�5
�5
�5
�5
�5
�5
�5
�5
�5
�5
�5
�5
�5
�5
�5
�11
�11
�11
�11
GT1030GT1020HBM(W) only LBM(W) only
Bus interface
Ethernet interface
USB host
USB device
CF card interface
Optional function board interface
USB interface
Extension interface
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
1ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
1ch
Multimedia & Video/RGB interface
Required
Required Sound output unit
Video input / RGB input / RGB output
Required
USB mouse/keyboard connection
Backlight OFF detection function
Required
P.33
P.33
Required�2
(GT15 only)
Video/RGB
unit
P.32
P.32
GT1585V only GT1575V only
P.34
P.34
CF card
(CF card/
USB memory
<GT16 only>)
(CF card)
(CF card)
�6
P.39
Required�2
(GT15 only)
Gateway function
MES interface function
SoftGOT-GOT link function
Required�2 Required
P.33
Required
(CF card)
(CF card)
Required
(CF card/
Required USB memory
<GT16 only>)
Up to 4ch
Up to 4ch
Up to 4ch
Up to 4ch
Up to 4ch
Up to 4ch
Up to 4ch
Up to 4ch
Up to 4ch
Up to 4ch
P.39
Up to 4ch
P.35
P.35
P.27, 34
Up to 4ch Up to 4ch Up to 4ch Up to 4ch Up to 4ch Up to 4ch Up to 2ch Up to 2ch Up to 2ch
�13
�13
P.35
P.35
P.27, 34
P.34
P.34
P.37
P.37
�1 : The function details, such as the number of settings and the data storage destination, vary depending on the model.
�2 : An optional function board may be required depending on the model, function version or hardware version of the GOT main unit. The optional function board to be used varies depending on the required function. For details, see
"Notes for use" (page 81).
For the GT10 and GT SoftGOT1000, it is unnecessary to install an optional function board or the extended/optional function OS.
�3 : Necessary optional units, CF cards and USB memory devices other than the optional function board are shown. Parenthesized devices will be required depending on conditions of use. For details, see "Notes for use" (page 81).
�4 : For details, see "GT10" (page 48), "Handy GOT" (page 24) and "GT SoftGOT1000" (page 26).
�5 : The RS-232 interface can be used as an RS-422 interface by connecting an RS-422 conversion unit.
�6 : Structural restrictions are applied.
�7 : Only user alarms can be used.
�6
P.33
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
Specifications
P.52~
input/
Required External
output unit
Multi-channel function
Base screen, window screen
Dialog window display
BMP image display
Graphic
JPEG image display
drawing
DXF data
IGES data
�9
P.52~
CF card unit/
CF card
extension unit
Project data read/write
Resource data read
FA transparent function
Main unit functions
(Printer unit)
Sound output
External input/output
File transfer function (FTP client)
Screen design
(Battery)
CF card unit (CF card extension unit)
Start from CF card
70
GT1585V only GT1575V only
Vertical display
Clock function
Buzzer output
Human sensor
Printer
Specifications,
External Dimensions
Others
Video/RGB interface
MELSEC Process
Control
Built-in interface
RS-422/485 interface
iQ Platform
Hardware specifications
320 × 240 dots (QVGA)
GT10
Resolution
Monochrome (blue/white) 16 gray scales
For Initial Startup &
Operations
P.52~
Via G4 only Via G4 only Via G4 only Via G4 only Via G4 only
P.65
�12
CF card
Via G4 only
Via G4 only Via G4 only
Via G4 only
65,536 colors
Display colors
Model
Details page
�10
GT1695M GT1685M GT1675M GT1675M GT167M GT1665M GT1665M GT1662
-XTBM
-STBM
-STBM
-VTBM
-VNBM
-STBM
-VTBM
-VNBM
GT12
Other
necessary
devices
P.65
GT15
Optional function
board
�2
Extended/optional function
�2
OS installation
Details page
�3
Other
necessary
devices
�10
GT16
For Designers
Memory
Mitsubishi PLC bus connection
Mitsubishi PLC CPU direct connection
Mitsubishi PLC computer link connection
Mitsubishi PLC MELSECNET/H connection
Mitsubishi PLC MELSECNET/10 connection
Mitsubishi PLC CC-Link IE Controller Network connection
Mitsubishi PLC CC-Link IE Field Network connection
Mitsubishi PLC CC-Link connection
(ID station/via G4)
Mitsubishi PLC Ethernet connection
Third party PLC connection
Microcomputer connection
MODBUS®/RTU connection
MODBUS®/TCP connection
Temperature controller connection
Inverter connection
Servo amplifier connection
CNC connection
Robot controller connection
GOT multi-drop connection
Standard memory capacity
Total memory capacity when using
Required�2
(GT15 only)
optional memory (standard + optional)
Model
INDEX
Connection configuration
Function �1
GT11 GT10
Optional function
board
�2
Extended/optional function
OS installation
�2
Category
GT16 GT15 GT12 GT SoftGOT
�8 : To use the historical data list display and the historical trend graph, it is necessary to specify the logging function in advance. In addition, it is necessary to install the optional function OS (logging).
�9 : Read from the PLC clock.
�10 : Different connection configurations may require different communication units. For details, see the GOT1000 Series Handbook and the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual.
�11 : For the compatible hardware versions, please contact your local sales office.
�12 : Only CPU direct connection and Ethernet connection are supported.
�13 : Only the FTP server function is supported.
71
Function list
Common settings
Object settings
SVGA
VGA
VGA
SVGA
VGA
VGA
VGA
VGA�4
XGA
12.1"
10.4"
10.4"
10.4"
8.4"
8.4"
8.4"
5.7"
6.5"
15"
�3
Model
Details page
SVGA
15"
Other
necessary
devices
XGA
Optional function
board
�2
Extended/optional function
�2
OS installation
Details page
�3
GT1655 GT1665 GT1595
-VTBD HS-VTBD -XTBM
GT
GT1585(V) GT1575(V) GT1575 GT157M GT1565 GT1562 GT155M GT1275 GT1265 SoftGOT
-STBM
-STBM -VTBM -VNBM -VTBM -VNBM -MMBD -VNBM -VNBM
1000
VGA
SVGA
SVGA
VGA
VGA
VGA
VGA VGA/QVGA VGA
Version3
8.4"
10.4"
12.1"
10.4"
10.4"
10.4"
8.4"
8.4"
5.7"
�4
GT11
GT10 �4
GT115M GT115M GT115M GT105M GT104M GT1030
GT1020
-QMBD -QMBDM HS-QMBD -QMBD -QMBD -HBM(W)(2) -LBM(W)(2)
QVGA
QVGA
QVGA �4
QVGA
QVGA
5.7"
5.7"
5.7"
5.7"
4.7"
4.5"
3.7"
Required
Required
Required
P.36
P.36
(CF card/
Required USB memory
<GT16 only>)
P.41
P.41
Required�8
P.40
Required
Required
(CF card)
(Battery)
Extended alarm monitoring/display
Operation panel function
Operation log function
Document display function
Logging function
Project script/Screen script
Script function
Object script
Device data transfer function
Device monitor function
System monitor function
�7
�7
(CF card)
(CF card)
Required�8
P.40
(CF card)
(CF card)
(Printer unit)
Required
(CF card)
CF card
Required (Printer unit)
P.37
Required
P.33
Required
P.40
P.37
Required
Required
Required
P.33
Required
Required
Multimedia unit
Required
CF card
Required
License
Video/RGB
Required
input unit
P.32
P.32
P.34
P.34
P.34
P.34
GT1585V only GT1575V only
Required
External input/
output unit
Required
CF card
P.41
P.41
Required�2
Required
(GT15 only)
CF card
P.33
P.33
P.40
P.40
P40
P.40
P.37
P.37
(CF card)
Required
(Battery)
(CF card/
Required
USB memory)
Required
Required
P.33
Required
P.46
Required
List editor for FX
Required
P.33
Required
Required
P.47
P.46
P.47
GT115MQMBDA only
Required
SFC monitor function
Required�2
Required
(GT15 only)
CF card
P.44
GT1555VTBD only
P.44
Motion SFC monitor function
Required�2
Required
(GT15 only)
CF card
P.45
GT1555VTBD only
P.45
Ladder editor function
Required�2
Required
(GT15 only)
CF card
P.45
Ladder monitor function
Required�2
Required
(GT15 only)
(CF card)
P.44
P.46
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
CF card/
USB memory
Required <GT16 only>
Required
Required
Battery
P.45
P.44
GT1555VTBD only
P.46
P.47
P.47
P.46
P.46
P.47
P.47
P.42
P.46
P.38
P.42
P.46
P.38
�1 : The function details, such as the number of settings and the data storage destination, vary depending on the model.
�2 : An optional function board may be required depending on the model, function version or hardware version of the GOT main unit. The optional function board to be used varies depending on the required function. For details,
see "Notes for use" (page 81).
For the GT10 and GT SoftGOT1000, it is unnecessary to install an optional function board or the extended/optional function OS.
�3 : Necessary optional units, CF cards and USB memory devices other than the optional function board are shown. Parenthesized devices will be required depending on conditions of use. For details, see "Notes for use"
(page 81).
�4 : For details, see "GT10" (page 48), "Handy GOT" (page 24) and "GT SoftGOT1000" (page 26).
�5 : The RS-232 interface can be used as an RS-422 interface by connecting an RS-422 conversion unit.
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
List editor for A
Intelligent unit monitor function
Q motion monitor function
Servo amplifier monitor function
Network monitor function
CNC monitor function
CNC data input/output function
Backup/restoration function
MELSEC-L troubleshooting function
Maintenance time notification function
�7
(CF card)
Specifications,
External Dimensions
Log viewer function
�7
(CF card)
MELSEC Process
Control
Remote personal computer function (serial)
P.43
iQ Platform
Remote personal computer function (Ethernet)
P.43
GT10
Alarm display
Alarm history display
Floating alarm display
Parts display
Parts movement
Panel meter display
Level display
Trend graph/Line graph/Bar graph/Statistical graph
Historical trend graph�8
Scatter graph
Status observation function
Advanced recipe function
Recipe function
For Maintenance
Personnel
Lamp display
Touch switch
Numeric display/input
Data list display
Historical data list display�8
ASCII display/input
Kana-Kanji
Normal version
conversion function
Enhanced version
Clock display
Comment display
Multimedia function
Others
GT1695M GT1685M GT1675M GT1675M GT167M GT1665M GT1665M GT1662
-XTBM
-STBM -STBM
-VTBM -VNBM -STBM
-VTBM -VNBM
GT12
For Initial Startup &
Operations
Screen design
GT15
For Designers
Standard
Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional),
fonts (optional)
Japanese
High-quality font
TrueType font, TrueType font (7 segments)
Windows® font
Stroke basic font (extended)
Stroke font (optional)
Logo character function
Parts (object + figure) layer function
Station No. switching
Multilingual support function
Password
Boot logo
Data operation function
Offset function
Security level authentication
Security
function
Operator authentication
Hardcopy
File saving in CF card
function
Printing on printer
Barcode function
RFID function
Maintenance functions
GT16
(Japanese, Japanese (supporting European languages),
Chinese (Simplified),
Chinese (Simplified, supporting European languages),
Chinese (Traditional, supporting European languages))
Report function
72
Model
INDEX
Specifications
Standard
fonts (basic)
Other
necessary
devices
Function �1
GT11 GT10
Optional function
board
�2
Extended/optional function
OS installation
�2
Category
GT16 GT15 GT12 GT SoftGOT
�6 : Structural restrictions are applied.
�7 : Only user alarms can be used.
�8 : To use the historical data list display and the historical trend graph, it is necessary to specify the logging function in advance. In addition, it is necessary to install the optional function OS (logging).
�9 : Read from the PLC clock.
�10 : Different connection configurations may require different communication units. For details, see the GOT1000 Series Handbook and the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual.
�11 : For the compatible hardware versions, please contact your local sales office.
�12 : Only CPU direct connection and Ethernet connection are supported.
�13 : Only the FTP server function is supported.
73
Product list
GOT main units
Main unit model name
GT16 9 5 M - X T B A
GT15
High performance models with multimedia and a host of features and functions
Performance models ideal for a wide range of applications in a
network or standalone environment
Code
Resolution
XGA
X
(1024 × 768 dots)
SVGA
S
(800 × 600 dots)
VGA
V
(640 × 480 dots)
QVGA
Q
(320 × 240 dots)
(288 × 96 dots)
None
(160 × 64 dots)
Code
B
W
Large basic models with integrated features and communications
Small models with a host of advanced functions
Compact models with basic functions
GT1685
GT167M
GT16
GT1595
GT157M
GT156M
GT1275
GT12
GT1265
GT1155
GT11
GT1150
Handy
GOT
GT105M
GT10
74
GT104M
5.7" VGA [640 × 480 dots]
6.5" VGA [640 × 480 dots]
15" XGA
[1024 × 768 dots]
12.1" SVGA
[800 × 600 dots]
10.4" SVGA
[800 × 600 dots]
10.4" VGA
[640 × 480 dots]
8.4" VGA
[640 × 480 dots]
Display
TFT color LCD
(high brightness, wide viewing angle)
TFT color LCD
(high brightness, wide viewing angle)
TFT color LCD
(high brightness, wide viewing angle)
TFT color LCD
(high brightness, wide viewing angle)
Display colors
(number of colors)
65,536 colors
65,536 colors
65,536 colors
65,536 colors
TFT color LCD
4,096 colors
TFT color LCD
16 colors
TFT color LCD
65,536 colors
(high brightness, wide viewing angle)
TFT color LCD
65,536 colors
(high brightness, wide viewing angle)
TFT color LCD
16 colors
TFT color LCD (high brightness, wide viewing angle)
TFT color LCD (high brightness, wide viewing angle)
TFT color LCD
(high brightness, wide viewing angle)
TFT color LCD
(high brightness, wide viewing angle)
TFT color LCD
(high brightness, wide viewing angle)
TFT color LCD
(high brightness, wide viewing angle)
TFT color LCD
(high brightness, wide viewing angle)
TFT color LCD
(high brightness, wide viewing angle)
65,536 colors
65,536 colors
TFT color LCD
256 colors
TFT color LCD
16 colors
65,536 colors
65,536 colors
65,536 colors
65,536 colors
TFT color LCD
65,536 colors
(high brightness, wide viewing angle)
TFT color LCD
5.7" VGA [640 × 480 dots] TFT color LCD
(high brightness, wide viewing angle)
5.7" QVGA
STN color LCD
[320 × 240 dots]
STN monochrome LCD
10.4" VGA
[640 × 480 dots]
TFT color LCD
8.4" VGA
[640 × 480 dots]
16 colors
65,536 colors
4,096 colors
Monochrome (black/white) 16 gray scales
256 colors
Power
supply
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
100-240VAC
24VDC
Memory
size
15MB
15MB
15MB
15MB
Compatible with
multimedia & Video/RGB
Compatible with
multimedia & Video/RGB
Compatible with
multimedia & Video/RGB
Compatible with
multimedia & Video/RGB
15MB
15MB
Monochrome (black/white)
16 gray scales
STN color LCD
STN monochrome LCD
STN color LCD
STN monochrome LCD
STN color LCD
STN monochrome LCD
256 colors
Monochrome (black/white) 16 gray scales
256 colors
24VDC
Monochrome (blue/white) 16 gray scales
256 colors
24VDC
Monochrome (blue/white) 16 gray scales
Product name
NEW
NEW
3.7"
[160 × 64 dots]
3.7"
[160 × 64 dots]
5MB
5MB
3-color LED 24VDC
(green, orange, red)
5VDC
512KB
3-color LED 24VDC
(white, pink, red)
5VDC
Standard station unit (optical loop)
Intelligent device station unit
Intelligent device station unit (supporting CC-Link version 2)
Ethernet (100Base-TX) unit
For GOT multi-drop connection
Conversion connector between D sub 9-pin male and Europe terminal block 5-pin
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-RS2-9P
GT15-RS4-9S
GT15-RS4-TE
RS-422 conversion unit
MELSECNET/H
communication unit
CC-Link IE Controller Network
communication unit
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit
CC-Link communication unit
Ethernet communication unit
Serial multi-drop connection unit
Connector conversion adapter
Specifications
Applicable model
GT16 GT15 GT12 GT11 Handy GOT GT10
✽6
✽4
✽6
✽4
✽5
✽5
✽5
✽5
✽5
✽5
✽5
✽5
CC-Link interface unit for Handy GOT
✽1 : The unit cannot be used stacked on other units.
✽2 : The unit may not be able to be used depending on the connection destination. See "List of connectable models"
(page 65).
✽3 : The unit cannot be used when connecting to temperature controllers/indicating controllers via RS-485 (2-wire type)
5MB
512KB
3-color LED 24VDC
(white, pink, red)
5VDC
GT15-J71GF13-T2 NEW
GT15-J61BT13
GT15-J71E71-100
GT01-RS4-M
GT10-9PT5S
GT11HS-CCL
GT11H-CCL
GT15-75QBUS2L
CC-Link interface unit
9MB
3-color LED 24VDC
(green, orange, red)
5VDC
GT15-J71GP23-SX
GT15-ABUS
Serial communication unit
9MB
Monochrome
White
(black/white)
1.5MB
3-color LED 24VDC
(white, pink, red)
5VDC
GT15-RS2T4-9P
GT15-RS2T4-25P
GT15-J71LP23-25
GT15-J71BR13
GT15-QBUS2
GT15-75ABUS2L
Compatible with
Video/RGB
Black
3-color LED 24VDC
(green, orange, red)
5VDC
Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model
for QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q series)
Bus connection (2ch) unit standard model
for QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q series)
Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model
for QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A series)
Bus connection (2ch) unit standard model
for QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A series)
Bus connection (1ch) unit thin model✽1
for QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q series)
Bus connection (2ch) unit thin model✽1
for QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q series)
Bus connection (1ch) unit thin model✽1
for QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A series)
Bus connection (2ch) unit thin model✽1
for QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A series)
RS-232 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (male))
RS-422/485 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (female))✽2 ✽3
RS-422/485 serial communication unit (terminal block)✽2
✽ Usable only when connecting to temperature controllers/indicating controllers via RS-485 or in GOT multi-drop connection
RS-422 connector: 9-pin
RS-232→RS-422 conversion unit
RS-422 connector: 25-pin
Standard station unit (optical loop)
Standard station unit (coaxial bus)
GT15-75QBUSL
Compatible with
Video/RGB
STN monochrome LCD
Model name
GT15-QBUS
Compatible with
multimedia & Video/RGB
Compatible with
multimedia & Video/RGB
9MB
✽4 : The unit cannot be used with the GT155M.
✽5 : For the hardware version compatible with GOT, please contact your local sales office.
For the instructions for connection of GT16/GT15, please contact your local sales office.
✽6 : The unit cannot be used with the GT1655.
Optional units
9MB
Product name
Printer unit
Multimedia unit
6MB
Video input unit
STN color LCD
STN monochrome LCD
NEW
GT15-ABUS2
Dedicated to Q bus connection
Dedicated to A bus connection
24VDC
NEW
✽1 : Not supported by GT Works2/GT Designer2.
15MB
15MB
9MB
STN monochrome LCD
Monochrome
(black/white)
NEW
Communication interface
11MB
9MB
Monochrome
White
(black/white)
NEW
Bus connection unit
11MB
256 colors
5.7" QVGA
[320 × 240 dots]
4.7" QVGA
[320 × 240 dots]
Remarks
11MB
TFT color LCD
5.7" QVGA
[320 × 240 dots]
GT1020
STN monochrome LCD
(High contrast)
NEW
1.5MB
3-color LED 24VDC
(white, pink, red)
5VDC
3MB
Dedicated to Q bus connection
Dedicated to A bus connection
Dedicated to Q bus connection
Dedicated to A bus connection
3MB
3MB
RGB input unit
Video/RGB input unit
RGB output unit
CF card unit
CF card extension unit
Sound output unit
External input/output unit
Model name
Specifications
USB slave (PictBridge) for printer connection, 1ch
✽ Cable for printer connection (3m) included
For video input (NTSC/PAL) 1ch motion image playback
GT16M-MMR
For video input (NTSC/PAL) 4ch
GT16M-V4
For video input (NTSC/PAL) 4ch
GT15V-75V4
For analog RGB input 2ch
GT16M-R2
For analog RGB input 1ch
GT15V-75R1
For video input (NTSC/PAL) 4ch / analog RGB 1ch composite input
GT16M-V4R1
For video input (NTSC/PAL) 4ch / analog RGB 1ch composite input
GT15V-75V4R1
For analog RGB output 1ch
GT16M-ROUT
For analog RGB output
GT15V-75ROUT
For additional CF card port (B drive) on the back of the GOT
GT15-CFCD
GT15-CFEX-C08SET For additional CF card port (B drive) at the front of the control panel✽1
For sound output
GT15-SOUT
For external input/output devices and operation panel connection (negative common input / source type output)
GT15-DIOR
For external input/output devices and operation panel connection (positive common input / sink type output)
GT15-DIO
Applicable model
GT16 GT15 GT12 GT11 Handy GOT GT10
GT15-PRN
✽1 : Includes unit to be installed on the control panel, unit to be installed on the GOT, and connection cable (0.8m).
✽2 : Excluding the GT16MM-VNBM and GT1655.
✽3 : Only the GT1585V and GT1575V are supported.
✽2
✽2
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
GT155M
8.4" VGA
[640 × 480 dots]
Code GT10 backlight
W
White backlight
None Green backlight
4.5"
[288 × 96 dots]
NEW
3-color LED 24VDC
(green, orange, red)
5VDC
Specifications,
External Dimensions
GT15
8.4" SVGA
[800 × 600 dots]
✽1 : GT115M-QMBDQ and
GT115M-QMBDA only
✽2 : GT10 only
Black
Monochrome
(black/white)
MELSEC Process
Control
GT1585
10.4" VGA
[640 × 480 dots]
GT10
STN monochrome LCD
(High contrast)
iQ Platform
GT1655
Handy GOT
15" XGA
[1024 × 768 dots]
12.1" SVGA
[800 × 600 dots]
10.4" SVGA
[800 × 600 dots]
GT1030
NEW
4.5"
[288 × 96 dots]
GT10
GT166M
GT1695M-XTBA
GT1695M-XTBD
GT1685M-STBA
GT1685M-STBD
GT1675M-STBA
GT1675M-STBD
GT1675M-VTBA
GT1675M-VTBD
GT1675-VNBA✽1
GT1675-VNBD✽1
GT1672-VNBA✽1
GT1672-VNBD✽1
GT1665M-STBA
GT1665M-STBD
GT1665M-VTBA
GT1665M-VTBD
GT1662-VNBA✽1
GT1662-VNBD✽1
GT1655-VTBD✽1 NEW
GT1665HS-VTBD✽1
GT1595-XTBA
GT1595-XTBD
GT1585V-STBA
GT1585V-STBD
GT1585-STBA
GT1585-STBD
GT1575V-STBA
GT1575V-STBD
GT1575-STBA
GT1575-STBD
GT1575-VTBA
GT1575-VTBD
GT1575-VNBA
GT1575-VNBD
GT1572-VNBA
GT1572-VNBD
GT1565-VTBA
GT1565-VTBD
GT1562-VNBA
GT1562-VNBD
GT1555-VTBD
GT1555-QTBD
GT1555-QSBD
GT1550-QLBD
GT1275-VNBA
GT1275-VNBD
GT1265-VNBA
GT1265-VNBD
GT1155-QTBD
GT1155-QTBDQ
GT1155-QTBDA
GT1155-QSBD
GT1155-QSBDQ
GT1155-QSBDA
GT1150-QLBD
GT1150-QLBDQ
GT1150-QLBDA
GT1155HS-QSBD
GT1150HS-QLBD
GT1055-QSBD
GT1050-QBBD
GT1045-QSBD
GT1040-QBBD
Main unit frame
Black
White
Code Communication interface
With built-in bus connection interface for QCPU
Q✽1
(Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q series)
With built-in bus connection interface for
A✽1
QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A series)
With built-in RS-232
2✽2
With built-in RS-422
None✽2
NEW
Remarks
Dedicated to RS-422 connection
Dedicated to RS-232 connection
Dedicated to RS-422FX connection
Dedicated to RS-422 connection
Dedicated to RS-232 connection
Dedicated to RS-422FX connection
Dedicated to RS-422 connection
Dedicated to RS-232 connection
Dedicated to RS-422FX connection
Dedicated to RS-422 connection
Dedicated to RS-232 connection
Dedicated to RS-422FX connection
Dedicated to RS-422 connection
Dedicated to RS-232 connection
Dedicated to RS-422FX connection
Dedicated to RS-422 connection
Dedicated to RS-232 connection
Dedicated to RS-422FX connection
Dedicated to RS-422 connection
Dedicated to RS-232 connection
Dedicated to RS-422FX connection
Dedicated to RS-422 connection
Dedicated to RS-232 connection
Dedicated to RS-422FX connection
For Maintenance
Personnel
GT1695
Screen size
[resolution]
Code Power supply
A 100 to 240VAC
24VDC
D
5VDC
L
✽ For inquiries relating to products which conform to UL, cUL, and CE directives and shipping
directives, please contact your local sales office.
GOT main units
Model name
Code Display device
TFT color
T
(high brightness,
wide viewing angle)
N
TFT color
S
STN color
STN monochrome
B
(blue/white)
L
STN monochrome
STN monochrome
H
(White/black, high contrast)
NEW
Memory
size
For Initial Startup &
Operations
GT12
GT11
GT10
Code Mounting type
V Compatible wirh video/RGB
None Panel mount type
HS
Handy type
Compatible with
M
multimedia & Video/RGB
Frame color
NEW
Power
supply
For Designers
GT16
Code Display colors
5 256 colors or more
2
16 colors
0 Monochrome
GT1030-HBD✽1
GT1030-HBD2✽1
GT1030-HBL✽1
GT1030-HBDW✽1
GT1030-HBDW2✽1
GT1030-HBLW✽1
GT1030-HWD✽1
GT1030-HWD2✽1
GT1030-HWL✽1
GT1030-HWDW✽1
GT1030-HWDW2✽1
GT1030-HWLW✽1
GT1020-LBD
GT1020-LBD2
GT1020-LBL
GT1020-LBDW
GT1020-LBDW2
GT1020-LBLW
GT1020-LWD
GT1020-LWD2
GT1020-LWL
GT1020-LWDW
GT1020-LWDW2
GT1020-LWLW
Display colors
(number of colors)
Display
INDEX
Code Screen size
15"
9
12.1"
8
10.4"
7
8.4", 6.5"
6
5.7"
5
4.7"
4
4.5"
3
3.7"
2
Screen size
[resolution]
Model name
✽3
✽2
✽3
✽2
✽3
✽2
✽3
75
Product list
Software
Options
Product name
Model name
GT Works3 Version1
License key for GT SoftGOT1000✽1
Personal computer remote operation
function (Ethernet) license✽2
Contents
SW1DNC-GTWK3-E
SW1DNC-GTWK3-EA
GT15-SGTKEY-U
Single license <English version>
Multiple-license <English version>✽3
For USB port
GT16-PCRAKEY
1 license
Product name
Options
Product name
✽ The required optional function board
varies depending on the GOT main unit
and function.
For the details, see "Notes for use"
(page 81).
Oil resistant cover✽7
Emergency stop switch guard
Stand
✽5
NEW
NEW
Memory card adapter
GT15-70ATT-87
GT15-60ATT-97
GT15-60ATT-96
Attachment
GT15-60ATT-87
NEW
Oil resistant cover for 15" screen
Oil resistant cover for 12.1" screen
Oil resistant cover for 10.4" screen
Oil resistant cover for 8.4" screen
Oil resistant cover for 5.7" screen
Oil resistant cover for 5.7" screen
Oil resistant cover for 4.7" screen
Oil resistant cover for 4.5" screen
Oil resistant cover for 3.7" screen
Cover for accidental operation prevention of emergency stop switch (for GT16 Handy GOT)
Cover for accidental operation prevention of emergency stop switch (for GT11 Handy GOT)
Stand for 15" type
Stand for 12.1" type
Stand for 10.4"/8.4" type
Stand for 5.7" type
128MB flash ROM
256MB flash ROM
512MB flash ROM
1GB flash ROM
2GB flash ROM
4GB flash ROM
8GB flash ROM
16GB flash ROM
CF card→memory card (TYPE @) conversion adapter
A985GOT ✽8
GT167M
A870GOT-SWS
Attachment for
A8GT-70GOT-TB
→ GT157M
A870GOT-TWS
10.4" type
A8GT-70GOT-SW
GT1275
A8GT-70GOT-TW
A8GT-70GOT-SB
A97MGOT
A960GOT
A77GOT-EL-S5
A870GOT-EWS
GT166M
A77GOT-EL-S3
A8GT-70GOT-EW
Attachment for
→ GT156M
A77GOT-EL
A8GT-70GOT-EB
8.4" type
GT1265
A77GOT-L-S5
A77GOT-CL-S5
GT15-60ATT-77
Battery
GT15-50ATT-95W
GT15-50ATT-85
GT15-BAT
GT11-50BAT
A77GOT-CL-S3
A77GOT-CL
A956WGOT
A85MGOT
: Function version C or earlier.
: Function version D or later.
: Function version B or earlier.
: Function version C or later.
: Excluding the GT115M-QMBDQ and GT115M-QMBDA.
: Excluding the GT1020.
: Check if the oil resistant cover can be used in the actual environment before use.
When using the oil resistant cover, the front USB interface and human sensor cannot be used.
✽8 : Including the GP250M and GP260M manufactured by Pro-face.
✽9 : Can be used only with the GT11 Handy.
Manuals
✽10
✽10
A77GOT-L-S3
A77GOT-L
GT1655
Attachment for
→ GT155M
5.7" type
GT115M
Battery for backup of clock data and maintenance time notification data
Battery for backup of clock data, alarm history, recipe data, time action set values (for replacement)
✽1
✽2
✽3
✽4
✽5
✽6
✽7
✽10
✽11
✽13
✽12
✽9
✽6
✽10 : Can be used only with the GT16 Handy.
✽11 : Excluding GT1655. Application: Battery for backup of clock data, maintenance time notification data, system log data,
SRAM user area (for replacement)
✽12 : Can be used only with the GT1655. Application: Battery for backup of clock data, maintenance time notification data,
system log data, SRAM user area (for replacement)
✽13 : Can be used only with the GT16 Handy. Application: Battery for backup of clock data, maintenance time notification data,
system log data, SRAM user area (for replacement)
✽14 : The front-face USB interface cannot be used when using a protective sheet that covers the USB protective cover area.
✽Manuals are supplied as PDF documents with the software package in the CD-ROM. Printed manuals are also available.
Manual title
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) *A set of two volumes
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 2) for GT Works3
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3
GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3
GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3
GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)
GT15 User's Manual
GT12 Supplementary Description
GT11 User's Manual
GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual (Hardware • Utility, Connection) *A set of two volumes
GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual (Hardware • Utility, Connection) *A set of two volumes
GT10 User's Manual
Catalog No.
SH-080866ENG
SH-080867ENG
SH-080868ENG
SH-080869ENG
SH-080870ENG
SH-080871ENG
SH-080858ENG
SH-080859ENG
SH-080861ENG
SH-080860ENG
SH-080862ENG
SH-080863ENG
SH-080928ENG
SH-080929ENG
SH-080528ENG
SH-080864ENG
JY997D17501
JY997D41201
JY997D20101
JY997D24701
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
NEW
CF card
NEW
Protective cover for USB interface
on main unit front panel
(for replacement)
Specifications,
External Dimensions
NEW
✽9
NEW
MELSEC Process
Control
NEW
For GT1030/GT1020 (for OS project data transfer) no power source required
For GT105M/GT104M (for OS and project data transfer)
Clear, 5 sheets
Anti-glare, 5 sheets
Protective sheet for 15" screen
Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets
(for GT16)
Anti-glare (frame: white), 5 sheets
Clear (USB protective cover type), 5 sheets✽14
Clear, 5 sheets
Anti-glare, 5 sheets
Protective sheet for 15" screen
Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets
(for GT15)
Anti-glare (frame: white), 5 sheets
Clear, 5 sheets
Anti-glare, 5 sheets
Protective sheet for 12.1" screen
Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets
(for GT16)
Anti-glare (frame: white), 5 sheets
Clear (USB protective cover type), 5 sheets✽14
Clear, 5 sheets
Anti-glare, 5 sheets
Protective sheet for 12.1" screen
Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets
(for GT15)
Anti-glare (frame: white), 5 sheets
Clear, 5 sheets
Anti-glare, 5 sheets
Protective sheet for 10.4" screen
Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets
(for GT16)
Anti-glare (frame: white), 5 sheets
Clear (USB protective cover type), 5 sheets✽14
Clear, 5 sheets
Anti-glare, 5 sheets
Protective sheet for 10.4" screen
Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets
(for GT15)
Anti-glare (frame: white), 5 sheets
Protective sheet for 10.4" screen (for GT12) Clear, 5 sheets
Clear, 5 sheets
Anti-glare, 5 sheets
Protective sheet for 8.4" screen
Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets
(for GT16)
Anti-glare (frame: white), 5 sheets
Clear (USB protective cover type), 5 sheets✽14
Clear, 5 sheets
Protective sheet for 8.4" screen
Anti-glare, 5 sheets
Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets
(for GT15)
Anti-glare (frame: white), 5 sheets
Protective sheet for 8.4" screen (for GT12) Clear, 5 sheets
Protective sheet for 6.5" screen (for GT16 Handy GOT) Clear, 5 sheets
Clear, 5 sheets
Anti-glare, 5 sheets
Protective sheet for 5.7" screen
Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets
(for GT16)
Anti-glare (frame: white), 5 sheets
Clear (USB protective cover type), 5 sheets✽14
Clear, 5 sheets
Anti-glare, 5 sheets
Protective sheet for 5.7" screen
Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets
(for GT15)
Anti-glare (frame: white), 5 sheets
Clear, 5 sheets
Anti-glare, 5 sheets
Protective sheet for 5.7" screen
Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets
(for GT11)
Anti-glare (frame: white), 5 sheets
Protective sheet for 3.7" screen
(for GT1020)
iQ Platform
76
Optional function board
USB protective cover
Protective sheet for 4.5" screen
(for GT1030)
GT10
Protective sheet
Backlight
For GT1695M-XTBM
For GT1685M-STBM
For GT1675M-STBM
For GT1675M-VTBM✽1
For GT1675M-VTBM✽2
For GT1675-VNBM/GT1672-VNBM
For GT1665M-STBM
For GT1665M-VTBM
For GT1662-VNBM
For GT1595-XTBM
For GT1585V-STBM/GT1585-STBM
For GT1575-STBM✽3
For GT1575V-STBM/GT1575-VTBM/GT1575-STBM✽4
For GT1575-VNBM/GT1572-VNBM
For GT1565-VTBM
For GT1562-VNBM
For GT1275-VNBM
For GT1265-VNBM
For MES interface function
(No expansion memory)
(No expansion memory)
+ 16MB expansion memory
+ 32MB expansion memory
+ 48MB expansion memory
+ 48MB expansion memory
Protective sheet for 4.7" screen
(for GT104M)
For Maintenance
Personnel
GT10 memory loader
GT10 memory board
GT16-90XLTT
GT16-80SLTT
GT16-70SLTT
GT16-70VLTT
GT16-70VLTTA
GT16-70VLTN
GT16-60SLTT
GT16-60VLTT
GT16-60VLTN
GT15-90XLTT
GT15-80SLTT
GT15-70SLTT
GT15-70VLTT
GT15-70VLTN
GT15-60VLTT
GT15-60VLTN
GT12-70VLTN
GT12-60VLTN
GT16-MESB
GT15-FNB
GT15-QFNB
GT15-QFNB16M
GT15-QFNB32M
GT15-QFNB48M
GT15-MESB48M
GT11-50FNB
GT10-LDR
GT10-50FMB
GT16-90PSCB
GT16-90PSGB
GT16-90PSCW
GT16-90PSGW
GT16-90PSCB-012
GT15-90PSCB
GT15-90PSGB
GT15-90PSCW
GT15-90PSGW
GT16-80PSCB
GT16-80PSGB
GT16-80PSCW
GT16-80PSGW
GT16-80PSCB-012
GT15-80PSCB
GT15-80PSGB
GT15-80PSCW
GT15-80PSGW
GT16-70PSCB
GT16-70PSGB
GT16-70PSCW
GT16-70PSGW
GT16-70PSCB-012
GT15-70PSCB
GT15-70PSGB
GT15-70PSCW
GT15-70PSGW
GT11-70PSCB
GT16-60PSCB
GT16-60PSGB
GT16-60PSCW
GT16-60PSGW
GT16-60PSCB-012
GT15-60PSCB
GT15-60PSGB
GT15-60PSCW
GT15-60PSGW
GT11-60PSCB
GT16H-60PSC
GT16-50PSCB
GT16-50PSGB
GT16-50PSCW
GT16-50PSGW
GT16-50PSCB-012
GT15-50PSCB
GT15-50PSGB
GT15-50PSCW
GT15-50PSGW
GT11-50PSCB
GT11-50PSGB
GT11-50PSCW
GT11-50PSGW
Specifications
Protective sheet for 5.7" screen
(for GT105M)
Clear, 5 sheets
Clear, 5 sheets
Anti-glare, 5 sheets
Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets
Anti-glare (frame: white), 5 sheets
Clear, 5 sheets
Anti-glare, 5 sheets
Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets
Anti-glare (frame: white), 5 sheets
Clear, 5 sheets
Anti-glare, 5 sheets
Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets
Anti-glare (frame: white), 5 sheets
Clear, 5 sheets
Anti-glare, 5 sheets
Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets
Anti-glare (frame: white), 5 sheets
For 15"/12.1"/10.4"/8.4"
For 5.7"
For 15"/12.1"/10.4"/8.4"
For 5.7"
For Initial Startup &
Operations
Optional function board
Model name
Protective sheet for 5.7" screen (for GT11 Handy GOT)
For Designers
Backlight
Protective sheet
Applicable model
GT16 GT15 GT12 GT11 Handy GOT GT10
GT11H-50PSC
GT10-50PSCB
GT10-50PSGB
GT10-50PSCW
GT10-50PSGW
GT10-40PSCB
GT10-40PSGB
GT10-40PSCW
GT10-40PSGW
GT10-30PSCB
GT10-30PSGB
GT10-30PSCW
GT10-30PSGW
GT10-20PSCB
GT10-20PSGB
GT10-20PSCW
GT10-20PSGW
GT16-UCOV
GT16-50UCOV
GT15-UCOV
GT11-50UCOV
GT05-90PCO
GT05-80PCO
GT05-70PCO
GT05-60PCO
GT16-50PCO
GT05-50PCO
GT10-40PCO
GT10-30PCO
GT10-20PCO
GT16H-60ESCOV
GT11H-50ESCOV
GT15-90STAND
GT15-80STAND
GT15-70STAND
GT05-50STAND
GT05-MEM-128MC
GT05-MEM-256MC
GT05-MEM-512MC
GT05-MEM-1GC
GT05-MEM-2GC
GT05-MEM-4GC
GT05-MEM-8GC
GT05-MEM-16GC
GT05-MEM-ADPC
GT15-70ATT-98
Applicable model
GT16 GT15 GT12 GT11 Handy GOT GT10
Specifications
INDEX
✽1 : To use GT SoftGOT1000, a license key for GT SoftGOT1000 is necessary for each personal computer.
✽2 : 1 license is required for 1 GOT unit.
✽3 : The desired number of licenses (2 or more) can be purchased. For details, please contact your local sales office.
Model name
77
Product list
Cables
Cables
Product name
Long-distance connection
cable for QCPU
GOT-to-GOT long-distance
connection cable
Large CPU
extension cable
GOT-to-GOT long-distance
connection cable
A0J2HCPU connection cable
RS-422 conversion cable
QnA/A/FXCPU
direct connection cable
Computer link
connection cable
FXCPU direct
connection cable
FX communication
function extension board
connection cable
Connector conversion cable for
F930→GT1030 replacement
RS-232 cable
78
Q/LCPU direct
connection cable
Data transfer cable
30.6m
GT15-C07BS
GT15-C12BS
GT15-C30BS
GT15-C50BS
GT15-C100BS
GT15-C200BS
GT15-C300BS
GT15-J2C10B
A7GT-CNB
GT15-EXCNB
GT15-QFC
GT15-AFC
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT16-C02R4-25S
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05
FA-LTBGTR4CBL10
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20
GT01-C30R4-25P
GT01-C100R4-25P
GT01-C200R4-25P
GT01-C300R4-25P
GT10-C30R4-25P
GT10-C100R4-25P
GT10-C200R4-25P
GT10-C300R4-25P
GT09-C30R4-6C
GT09-C100R4-6C
GT09-C200R4-6C
GT09-C300R4-6C
GT01-C10R4-8P
GT01-C30R4-8P
GT01-C100R4-8P
GT01-C200R4-8P
GT01-C300R4-8P
GT10-C10R4-8P
GT10-C30R4-8P
GT10-C100R4-8P
GT10-C200R4-8P
GT10-C300R4-8P
0.7m
1.2m
3m
5m
10m
20m
30m
1m
GT09-C30R2-25P
3m
Computer link
connection cable
0.5m
0.2m
0.2m
0.5m
1m
2m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
1m
3m
10m
20m
30m
1m
3m
10m
20m
30m
For connection between motion controller CPU
(A series, main base) and GOT
For connection between motion controller CPU
(A series, main base) and A7GT-CNB
For connection between QnAS/AnSCPU and A7GT-CNB
For long-distance connection between QnAS/AnSCPU/
motion controller CPU (A series) and GOT
For long-distance connection between A7GT-CNB and GOT
✽Set of GT15-EXCNB and GT15-CMBS
1.5m
GT11H-C15R2-6P
1.5m
Barcode reader connection cable
GT10-C02H-6PT9P
0.2m
External I/O unit connection conversion cable
GT15-C03HTB
0.3m
Analog RGB cable
GT15-C50VG
For connection between GOT and GOT
For connection between power supply unit (A0J2-PW) for A0J2HCPU and GOT
Used for QnA/ACPU long-distance bus connection
Usable as GT15-CMEXSS-1 in combination with GT15-CMBS
Ferrite cores for replacing existing GOT-A900 bus cable with
bus cable for GOT1000
For connection between RS-422/485 (connector) of GT16 and RS-422 cable (D-sub 9 pins)
For connection between RS-422/485 (connector) of GT16 and RS-422 cable (D-sub 25 pins)
RS-485 terminal block conversion unit
✽ With cable for connection between RS-422/485 (connector) of
GT16 and RS-485 terminal block conversion unit
For connection between QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU
(A series)/FXCPU (D-sub 25-pin connector) and GOT
For connection between FA-CNVMCBL and GOT
For connection between serial communication unit and GOT
For connection between AJ65BT-G4-S3 and GOT
GT10-RS2TUSB-5S
Data transfer cable
GT09-C30USB-5P
3m
GT10-C10EXUSB-5S
1m
Extension USB waterproof cable
✽3
✽6
✽4
✽3
✽4
✽7
✽8
For connection between connector conversion box and Handy
GOT
✽7
For connection between CC-Link interface unit and Handy GOT
✽7
For connection between FA device connection relay cable
and GOT
✽8
For connection between FA device, power supply and
operation switches and GOT
✽8
For connection between CC-Link interface unit and Handy GOT
✽8
For connection between FXCPU and GOT
For connection between power supply and operation switches and GOT
For connection between A/QnACPU and GOT
For connection between power supply and operation switches and GOT
For connection between QCPU and GOT
For connection between power supply and operation switches and GOT
For connection between barcode reader (D-sub 9-pin, male)
and GOT (MINI-DIN 6-pin, male) RS-232
For connection between GOT1000 (external I/O unit) and GOT-A900 external I/O
interface unit connection cable (A8GT-C05TK/A8GT-C30TB/user-fabricated cable)
For connection between external monitor, personal computer and vision sensor and GOT
For connection between personal computer (USB) and GOT (RS-232)
(Adapter and personal computer are connected with GT09-C30USB-5P.)
For connection between personal computer (USB) and GOT (USB mini-B)
For connection between QnUCPU (USB mini-B) and personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000)
For connection between printer and GOT (printer unit)
For extending the USB port of GOT to the control panel
✽8
✽8
✽8
✽5
✽5
✽4
✽4
✽4
Cables for third party FA devices
Product name
✽5
Model name
Cable Third party
length products
✽1
GT09-C30R20102-25S
GT09-C30R20103-25P
GT09-C30R21101-6P
Cable for
GT09-C30R21102-9S
KEYENCE PLC
GT09-C30R21103-3T
Cable for Sharp Manufacturing GT09-C30R20601-15P
Systems PLC
GT09-C30R20602-15P
Cables for JTEKT PLC
GT09-C30R21201-25P
Cable for Shinko Technos
GT09-C30R21401-4T
digital indicating controller
Cable for
GT09-C30R20501-9P
TOSHIBA PLC
GT09-C30R20502-15P
3m
3m
3m
3m
3m
3m
3m
3m
3m
Digital indicating controller: FCR-100/FCD-100/FCR-23A/PC-900/FIR series
3m
3m
Cable for Hitachi Industrial GT09-C30R20401-15P
Equipment Systems PLC
GT09-C30R20402-15P
Cable for Hitachi PLC
GT09-C30R21301-9S
3m
PLC CPU: T2E
PLC CPU: T2N
PLC CPU: Large-size H series/H200 to 252 series/H series board type/EH-150 series
Intelligent serial port module: COMM-H/COMM-2H
PLC CPU: H-4010/H-252C/EH-150 series
Communication module: LQE560/LQE060/LQE160
RS-232C interface card: NV1L-RS2
RS-232C/485 interface capsule: FFK120A-C10
General interface module: NC1L-RS2/FFU120B
RS-422→232 conversion adapter: AFP8550
PLC CPU: FP2/FP2SH/FP3/FP5/FP10(S)/FP10SH/FP-M
Computer communication unit: AFP2462/AFP3462/AFP5462
PLC CPU: FP1-C24C/C40C
PLC CPU: FP1-C16CT/C32CT/FPOR
Cable for
OMRON PLC
✽4
✽4
✽6
✽5
RS-232
cable
✽5
✽5
✽5
✽8
✽1 :
✽2 :
✽3 :
✽4 :
GT09-C30R20101-9P
3m
3m
3m
Cable for Fuji Electric FA
GT09-C30R21003-25P
Components & Systems PLC
3m
GT09-C30R20901-25P
3m
GT09-C30R20902-9P
3m
GT09-C30R20903-9P
GT09-C30R20904-3C
3m
3m
Cable for
Panasonic Electric Works
PLC
✽4
GOT connection destination
PLC CPU: CPM2A/CQM1(H)/CS1/CJ1/CJ2H/CP1E/C200HX/C200HG/
C200HE/CV500/CV1000/CV2000/CVM1
RS-232C adapter: CPM1-CIF01/CPM2C-CIF01-V1
Cable: CPM2C-CN111/CQM1-CIF02
Serial communication unit/board: CQM1-SCB41/C200HW-COM02/
C200HW-COM05/C200HW-COM06/CS1W-SCB21(-V1)/CS1W-SCB41(-V1)/
CS1W-SCU21(-V1)/CJ1W-SCU21(-V1)/CJ1W-SCU41(-V1)/CP1W-CIE01
Connection cable: CQM1-CIF01
Base mount type host link unit: C500-LK201-V1/C200H-LK201-V1
PLC CPU: KV-700/1000/3000
Multi-communication unit: KV-L20/KV-L20R/KV-L20V (port 1)
Multi-communication unit: KV-L20/KV-L20R/KV-L20V (port 2)
PLC CPU: JW-22CU/70CUH/100CUH/100CU
PLC CPU: JW-32CUH/33CUH/Z-512J
RS-232/RS-422 converter: TXU-2051
✽3
✽6
For connection between FXCPU (MINI-DIN 8-pin connector)
and GOT
For connection between FXCPU communication function
extension board (MINI-DIN 8-pin connector) and GOT
For replacing a F930GOT unit with the GT1030 series unit
Converts D-sub 9-pin connector to loose wire (Europe terminal block)
For connection between Q/LCPU and GOT/personal computer
(GT SoftGOT1000) (D-sub 9-pin)
For connection between personal computer (screen design software)
(D-sub 9-pin, female) and GOT (MINI-DIN 6-pin, male)
For connection between Q/LCPU and GOT
For connection between GOT and GOT
For connector conversion box between Q/LCPU and Handy GOT
5m
RS-232/USB conversion
adapter for data transfer
✽3
✽1 : FA-LTBGTR4CBLM is developed by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Company Limited and sold through your local sales office.
The other products listed are developed by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., LTD. and sold through your local sales office.
✽2 : The applicable connection configuration and cable vary depending on the GOT main unit. For more details, see the GOT1000 Series Handbook and the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual.
✽3 : Can be used when used together with the Handy GOT connector conversion box.
✽4 : Can be used only with the GT105M and GT104M.
✽5 : Can be used only with the GT1030 and GT1020.
✽6 : To connect with RS-422/485 interface of GT16 main unit, an RS-422 conversion cable (GT16-C02R4-9S) is required.
✽7 : Can be used only with the GT16 Handy.
✽8 : Can be used only with the GT11 Handy.
✽3
0.2m
RS-232, power supply and
operation switch connection cable
USB cable
For connection between QnA/A/FXCPU (D-sub 25-pin
connector) and GOT
For connection between serial communication unit
(AJ71QC24(N)-R4) and GOT
For connection between serial communication unit and GOT
For connection between computer link unit and GOT
RS-422, power supply
and operation switch
connection cable
FA device
connection
relay cable
For connection between GOT and GOT
GT10-C02H-9SC
3m
GT11H-C15R4-25P
Dedicated cable for
CC-Link interface unit
For connection between QnAS/AnSCPU/motion controller CPU
(A series) and A7GT-CNB
For connection between FXCPU (MINI-DIN 8-pin connector) and
GOT
For connection between FXCPU communication function
extension board (MINI-DIN 8-pin connector) and GOT
3m
1.5m
For connection between QnAS/AnSCPU and GOT
1m
3m
10m
20m
30m
GT11H-C30R2-6P
GT11H-C15R4-8P
External
connection cable
FA device, power supply
and operation switch
connection cable
For connection between QnAS/AnSCPU/motion controller CPU
(A series) and GOT
GT10-C10R4-8PC
GT10-C30R4-8PC
GT10-C100R4-8PC
GT10-C200R4-8PC
GT10-C300R4-8PC
GT10-C30R2-6P
3m
6m
10m
3m
5m
8m
13m
3m
6m
10m
3m
6m
10m
3m
5m
8m
13m
For connection between QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU
(A series, extension base) and A7GT-CNB
1m
3m
GT16H-CNB-42S
GT11H-CNB-37S
GT16H-C30-42P
GT16H-C60-42P
GT16H-C100-42P
GT16H-C30-32P
GT16H-C50-32P
GT16H-C80-32P
GT16H-C130-32P
GT11H-C30-37P
GT11H-C60-37P
GT11H-C100-37P
GT11H-C30
GT11H-C60
GT11H-C100
GT11H-C30-32P
GT11H-C50-32P
GT11H-C80-32P
GT11H-C130-32P
Connector conversion box for Handy GOT
For connection between QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU
(A series, extension base) and GOT
For connection between FXCPU (MINI-DIN 8-pin connector) and GOT
For connection between FXCPU communication function extension
board (MINI-DIN 8-pin connector) and GOT
✽The unit cannot be used with the FX1NC, FX2NC, FX3UC-D/DSS, FX3G.
GT01-C30R2-6P
3m
Used for QCPU long-distance (13.2m or more) bus connection
GT15-C300EXSS-1
GT10-C10R4-8PL
3m
GT09-C30R2-9P
Applicable model
GT16 GT15 GT12 GT11
Items listed above are developed by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., LTD., and sold through your local sales office.
The applicable connection configuration and cable vary depending on the GOT main unit. For more details, see the GOT1000 Series Handbook and the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual.
RS-422 cables less than 10m and the RS-232 cable less than 3m can be used when the connector conversion box for the Handy GOT is used.
Can be used only with the GT105M and GT104M.
✽2
Handy
GOT
GT10
✽4
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
RS-422 cable
GT01-C30R2-25P
✽4
Specifications,
External Dimensions
Computer link
connection cable
FX communication function
adapter connection cable
✽3
MELSEC Process
Control
RS-485 terminal block conversion unit
20.6m
3m
✽2
iQ Platform
Bus connector conversion box
Buffer circuit cable
Ferrite core set for Q bus cable (two-pack)
Ferrite core set for A bus cable (two-pack)
GT15-C200EXSS-1
GT01-C30R2-9S
For connection between FXCPU communication function extension board
(D-sub 9-pin connector) and GOT/personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000) (D-sub 9-pin)
For connection between FXCPU communication function adapter
(D-sub 9-pin connector) and GOT
For connection between personal computer (screen design software)
(D-sub 9-pin, female) and GOT (D-sub 9-pin, female)
For connection between FXCPU communication special adapter (D-sub 25-pin
connector) and GOT, personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000) (D-sub 9-pin)
For connection between serial communication unit and GOT
For connection between computer link unit and GOT
For connection between AJ65BT-R2N and GOT (GT09-C30R2-9P only)
Converts Handy GOT connector to RJ-45 for terminal block, D-sub connector or Ethernet for each signal type
Converts D-sub 37-pin connector to terminal block and D-sub 9-pin connector
Applicable model
GT16 GT15 GT12 GT11 Handy
GOT GT10
GT10
GOT-to-GOT
connection cable
10.6m
RS-232 cable
For long-distance (13.2m or more) connection between
QCPU and GOT (A9GT-QCNB required)
For long-distance connection between GOT and GOT
FX communication function
extension board connection
cable, FX communication
function adapter connection
cable, Data transfer cable
Application
For Maintenance
Personnel
Small CPU long-distance
connection cable
GT15-C100EXSS-1
For connection between QCPU and GOT
For connection between GOT and GOT
Cable Third party
length products
✽1
Model name
For Initial Startup &
Operations
Bus connection
cable for
Small CPU extension cable
QnA/ACPU/motion
controller CPU
(A series)
1.2m
3m
5m
0.6m
1.2m
3m
5m
1.2m
2.5m
1.2m
2.5m
0.7m
1.2m
3m
5m
0.45m
0.7m
3m
5m
0.6m
1.2m
3m
5m
10m
15m
20m
25m
30m
35m
Product name
For Designers
Bus extension connector box
GT15-QC06B
GT15-QC12B
GT15-QC30B
GT15-QC50B
GT15-QC100B
GT15-QC150BS
GT15-QC200BS
GT15-QC250BS
GT15-QC300BS
GT15-QC350BS
A9GT-QCNB
GT15-C12NB
GT15-C30NB
GT15-C50NB
GT15-AC06B
GT15-AC12B
GT15-AC30B
GT15-AC50B
GT15-A370C12B-S1
GT15-A370C25B-S1
GT15-A370C12B
GT15-A370C25B
GT15-A1SC07B
GT15-A1SC12B
GT15-A1SC30B
GT15-A1SC50B
GT15-A1SC05NB
GT15-A1SC07NB
GT15-A1SC30NB
GT15-A1SC50NB
Application
Applicable model ✽2
GT16 GT15 GT12 GT11 Handy
GOT GT10
INDEX
Bus connection
cable for
QCPU (Q mode)
QCPU extension cable
GOT-to-GOT connection cable
Model name
Cable Third party
products
length
✽1
✽3
✽4
79
Product list
Notes for use
Cables for third party FA devices
Product name
RS-232
cable
3m
GT09-C30R20202-15P
GT09-C30R20203-9P
GT09-C30R20204-14P
3m
3m
3m
GT09-C30R20205-25P
3m
GT09-C30R20301-9P
GT09-C30R20302-9P
GT09-C30R20305-9S
3m
3m
3m
3m
Converter: ML2-M
3m
PLC CPU: SL500 series
3m
HMI adapter
✽4
GT Designer/GT Designer2 → GT Works3 compatibility ✽
Cables
• For details on using the GOT-A900 series bus connection cables, RS-422 cables and
RS-232 cables with the GOT1000 series, see Technical Bulletin No.GOT-A-0009.
• For details regarding use of the GOT-F900 series RS-422 cable with the GOT1000,
please contact your local sales office.
• The bus connection cables, RS-422 cables and RS-232 cables for the GOT1000 series
cannot be used for the GOT900 series.
(For details regarding use of bus connection cables in systems where both the
GOT-A900 and GOT1000 series coexist, see Technical Bulletin No. GOT-A-0009.)
Project data created in GT Designer2 can be used in GT Works3.
Project data created in GT Designer can be used in GT Works3 after the data is
converted by GT Designer2/GT Designer2 Classic.
GOT900 series → GOT1000 series compatibility ✽
Using data from the GOT-A900 series
Project data for the GOT-A900 series can be used in the GOT1000 series.
For the details, see Technical Bulletin No.GOT-A-0009 "Precautions when Replacing
GOT-A900 Series with GOT1000 Series".
Panel cut dimensions
GOT900 series → GOT1000 series compatibility
Using data from the GOT-F900 series
• The A985GOT(-V) and GT1685/GT1585, A975/970GOT(-B) and GT167M/GT157M,
F940GOT and GT1655/GT155M/GT115M/GT105M have the same panel dimensions,
respectively. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the mounting hole size.
• Although the A95M differs in panel cut dimensions from the GT1655, GT155M,
GT115M-QMBDQ and GT115M-QMBDA, the GOT900 series model can be replaced
with any of the GOT1000 series ones without changing the mounting hole size.
Project data for the GOT-F900 series can be used in the GOT1000 series.
For the details, see "Replacement Guidance (for GOT1000 Series) – From
GOT-F900/A950 Handy Series to GOT1000 Series" (JY997D39301).
✽Some data and functions cannot be used in the GOT1000 series.
PLC CPU: CV500/CV1000/CV2000/CVM1
Serial communication unit: CJ1W-SCU41
Serial communication board: CQM1-SCB41/CS1W-SCB41
Communication board: C200HW-COM03/COM06
Base mount type host link unit: C200H-LK202-V1/C500-LK201-V1
✽4
Selection of optional units and devices
Using the optional functions listed in the table below may require optional devices or units as shown. Note that the availability of the function or the required optional units and devices may vary
depending on the model of the GOT main unit.
Functions not listed in the table below may also require a CF card or a USB memory device depending on the application. For details, see "Function list" (page 70) and "GT Designer3 Version1
Screen Design Manual."
An optional function board or a CF card may be necessary depending on the function version and hardware version of the GOT main unit or available space of the user area.
For details, see "Optional function board, CF card, and USB memory selection <GT16/GT15/GT12/GT11>" (page 82).
: Function that cannot be used on the model
Communication board: CP1W-CIF11/CP1W-CIF12/CJ1W-CIF11
Multi-communication unit: KV-L20/KV-L20R/KV-L20V (port 2)
PLC CPU: JW-22CU/70CUH/100CUH/100CU
Required optional units and devices
Function
PLC CPU: JW-32CUH/33CUH/Z-512J
Link unit: JW-21CM/JW-10CM/ZW-10CM
PLC CPU: PC3J/PC3JL
Communication module: PC/CMP2-LINK
Memory extension
CF card
Multi-channel function
Not necessary
Multimedia function✽1
Multimedia unit: GT16M-MMR
CF card for multimedia
RGB input✽1 ✽2
RGB input unit: GT16M-R2
or
Video/RGB input unit: GT16M-V4R1
RGB input unit: GT15V-75R1
or
Video/RGB input unit: GT15V-75V4R1
RGB output✽1 ✽2
RGB output unit: GT16M-ROUT
RGB output unit: GT15V-75ROUT
CF card unit/CF card extension unit
CF card unit: GT15-CFCD
or
CF card extension unit: GT15-CFEX-C08SET
CF card unit: GT15-CFCD
or
CF card extension unit: GT15-CFEX-C08SET
Sound output function
Sound output unit: GT15-SOUT
Sound output unit: GT15-SOUT
Remote personal computer operation
function (serial)✽1 ✽2
RGB input unit: GT16M-R2
or
Video/RGB input unit: GT16M-V4R1
RGB input unit: GT15V-75R1
or
Video/RGB input unit: GT15V-75V4R1
External input/output function,
operation panel function
External input/output unit: GT15-DIO or
GT15-DIOR
PLC CPU: LQP510
Communication module: LQE565/LQE165
File transfer function (FTP client)
USB memory device or CF card
Gateway function
Not necessary
External input/output unit: GT15-DIO or GT15-DIOR
USB memory or
CF card
Not necessary
CF card
Ethernet communication unit: GT15-J71E71-100
Optional function board: GT16-MESB
Document display function
CF card
CF card
Operation log function
CF card
Backup/restoration function
USB memory device or CF card
PLC CPU: MP940
Maintenance time notification function
Not necessary
(equipped with battery as standard feature)
CF card
USB memory or
CF card
Not necessary
(equipped with battery
as standard feature)
CNC data input/output function✽3
USB memory device or CF card
Personal computer link module: F3LC11-2N
Ladder monitor function✽4
(when using Q/L/QnA ladder monitor
function)
Not necessary
SFC monitor function✽4
CF card
CF card
Optional function board: GT15-QFNBMM or GT15-MESB48M
CF card
Motion SFC monitor function✽4
CF card
CF card
Optional function board: GT15-QFNBMM or GT15-MESB48M
CF card
Ladder editor function✽5
CF card
CF card
Optional function board: GT15-QFNBMM or GT15-MESB48M
CF card
Report function
Printer unit: GT15-PRN (when
PictBridge-compatible printer is used)
CF card
MEMOBUS module: JAMSC-120NOM27100/JAMSC-IF612
✽4
Temperature controller: GREEN series
Temperature controller: UT2000 series
Items listed above are developed by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., LTD., and sold through your local sales office.
The applicable connection configuration and cable vary depending on the GOT main unit. For more details, see the GOT1000 Series Handbook and the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual.
RS-422 cables less than 10m and the RS-232 cable less than 3m can be used when the connector conversion box for the Handy GOT is used.
Can be used only with the GT105M and GT104M.
To connect with RS-422/485 interface of GT16 main unit, an RS-422 conversion cable (GT16-C02R4-9S) is necessary.
Hard copy
function
Saving files on CF card
Printing by printer
CF card
CF card
CF
card
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
Personal computer link module: LC02-0N
Optional function board: GT15-QFNB(MM) or GT15-MESB48M
CF card
Battery: GT15-BAT
CF card
Not necessary
CF card
Printer unit: GT15-PRN (when
PictBridge-compatible printer is used)
✽1 : Excluding the GT16MM-VNBM and GT1655.
✽4 : Excluding QVGA of the GT155M.
✽2 : For the GT15, only the GT1585V and GT1575V are applicable. ✽5 : Excluding the GT155M.
✽3 : Only XGA and SVGA of the GT16 and GT15 are applicable.
✽6 : Including the GT11 Handy.
Specifications,
External Dimensions
MES interface function
RS-232C/485 interface capsule: FFK120A-C10
General interface module: NC1L-RS4/FFU120B
Not
necessary
Ethernet communication unit: GT15-J71E71-100
Optional function board: GT15-MESB48M
MELSEC Process
Control
Intelligent serial port module: COMM-H/COMM-2H
GT12 GT11✽6 GT10
Not
Optional function board: GT15-QFNB(MM) or GT15-MESB48M necessary
Video input unit: GT15V-75V4
or
Video/RGB input unit: GT15V-75V4R1
✽5
PLC CPU: T2N
CF card
Not necessary
GT15
Optional function board: GT15-QFNBMM or GT15-MESB48M
CF card
Video input unit: GT16M-V4
or
Video/RGB input unit: GT16M-V4R1
PLC CPU: T2/T3/T3H/model3000(S3)
PLC CPU: T2E/model2000(S2)
GT16 Handy
Video input✽1 ✽2
Video/RGB
function
✽3
GT16
iQ Platform
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
3m
10m
20m
30m
GT16 GT15 GT12 GT11 Handy
GOT GT10
Backward compatibility
Project data
GT10
Cable for Yokogawa Electric
GT09-C30R20304-9S
temperature controller
Cable for Allen-Bradley
GT09-C30R20701-9S
(Rockwell Automation, Inc.) PLC
Cable for
GT09-C30R20801-9S
Siemens AG PLC
GT09-C30R40101-9P
GT09-C100R40101-9P
GT09-C200R40101-9P
GT09-C300R40101-9P
GT09-C30R40102-9P
Cable for
GT09-C100R40102-9P
OMRON PLC
GT09-C200R40102-9P
GT09-C300R40102-9P
GT09-C30R40103-5T
GT09-C100R40103-5T
GT09-C200R40103-5T
GT09-C300R40103-5T
GT09-C30R41101-5T
GT09-C100R41101-5T
Cable for
GT09-C200R41101-5T
KEYENCE PLC
GT09-C300R41101-5T
GT09-C30R40601-15P
GT09-C100R40601-15P
GT09-C200R40601-15P
GT09-C300R40601-15P
GT09-C30R40602-15P
Cable for
GT09-C100R40602-15P
Sharp Manufacturing
GT09-C200R40602-15P
Systems PLC
GT09-C300R40602-15P
GT09-C30R40603-6T
GT09-C100R40603-6T
GT09-C200R40603-6T
GT09-C300R40603-6T
GT09-C30R41201-6C
GT09-C100R41201-6C
Cable for
GT09-C200R41201-6C
JTEKT PLC
GT09-C300R41201-6C
GT09-C30R40501-15P
GT09-C100R40501-15P
GT09-C200R40501-15P
GT09-C300R40501-15P
GT09-C30R40502-6C
Cable for
GT09-C100R40502-6C
TOSHIBA PLC
GT09-C200R40502-6C
GT09-C300R40502-6C
GT09-C30R40503-15P
GT09-C100R40503-15P
GT09-C200R40503-15P
GT09-C300R40503-15P
GT09-C30R40401-7T
Cable for
GT09-C100R40401-7T
Hitachi Industrial
GT09-C200R40401-7T
Equipment Systems PLC
GT09-C300R40401-7T
GT09-C30R41301-9S
Cable for
GT09-C100R41301-9S
Hitachi PLC
GT09-C200R41301-9S
GT09-C300R41301-9S
GT09-C30R41001-6T
Cable for Fuji Electric FA
GT09-C100R41001-6T
Components & Systems
GT09-C200R41001-6T
PLC
GT09-C300R41001-6T
GT09-C30R40201-9P
GT09-C100R40201-9P
GT09-C200R40201-9P
Cable for
GT09-C300R40201-9P
Yaskawa Electric PLC
GT09-C30R40202-14P
GT09-C100R40202-14P
GT09-C200R40202-14P
GT09-C300R40202-14P
GT09-C30R40301-6T
GT09-C100R40301-6T
GT09-C200R40301-6T
GT09-C300R40301-6T
PLC
GT09-C30R40302-6T
GT09-C100R40302-6T
GT09-C200R40302-6T
Cable for
GT09-C300R40302-6T
Yokogawa
GT09-C30R40303-6T
Electric
GT09-C100R40303-6T
GT09-C200R40303-6T
Temperature
GT09-C300R40303-6T
controller
GT09-C30R40304-6T
GT09-C100R40304-6T
GT09-C200R40304-6T
GT09-C300R40304-6T
✽2
For Maintenance
Personnel
80
GT09-C30R20201-9P
PLC CPU: GL120/GL130/MP-920/MP-930/CP-9200(H)/PROGIC-8 (port 1)
MEMOBUS module: JAMSC-IF60/JAMSC-IF61
Communication module: 217IF/CP-217IF (when connected to CN1)/
217IF-01/218IF-01
PLC CPU: PROGIC-8 (port 2)
PLC CPU: CP-9300MS
PLC CPU: MP-940
MEMOBUS module: CP-217IF (when connected to CN2)
Yokogawa Electric personal computer module: LC01-0N/LC02-0N
CPU port/D-sub 9-pin conversion cable: KM10-0C/KM10-0S
Personal computer link module: F3LC01-1N/F3LC11-1N/F3LC11-1F/F3LC12-1F
PLC CPU: NFCP100/NFJT100
Applicable model
For Initial Startup &
Operations
✽1 :
✽2 :
✽3 :
✽4 :
✽5 :
GOT connection destination
For Designers
RS-422
cable
Cable for
Yokogawa Electric PLC
Cable Third party
length products
✽1
INDEX
Cable for
YASKAWA Electric PLC
Model name
Optional function board: GT15-QFNB(MM) or GT15-MESB48M
Printer unit: GT15-PRN (when PictBridge-compatible printer is
used)
CF card
CF card
CF card
Printer unit: GT15-PRN (when PictBridge-compatible printer is
used)
CF card
81
Notes for use
Optional function board, CF card, and USB memory selection <GT16/GT15/GT12/GT11>
When using the GT16
� When using optional functions & extended functions
When using the GT15
� When using optional functions & extended functions
� Storage memory (ROM) and operation memory (RAM)
Operation memory
(RAM)
Extended by
CF card
Decompressing
data from ROM to
RAM for operation
57MB�
� Storage memory (ROM) and operation memory (RAM)
The GOT operates by decompressing the OS and project data, which is stored in the storage memory
(ROM), into the operation memory (RAM). The GT15 has a 9MB� memory for the storage memory
(ROM) and the operation memory (RAM) as a standard feature. When the OS or the project data
exceeds 9MB�, use a CF card and an optional function board with expansion memory (GT15-QFNBMM
or GT15-MESB48M) to increase the memory capacity.
The built-in flash memory is for "drive C". The CF card is for "drive A (standard)" or "drive B (extension)."
� : Differs depending on the GOT main unit model.
� Types and capacities of data and CF card selection
The data types and capacities are as shown in the table below.
Data type
Storage memory
(ROM)
Data capacity
9MB�
Extended by optional function board
Decompressing
data from ROM to
RAM for operation
function OS and optional function OS
A Extended
decompressed in RAM
Capacity of "GT16(RAM)" in Table A on page 84
B Communication driver
Check with Table B on page 84.
C Special data
Check with a screen design software.
D Project data
Check with a screen design software.
Data type
E Buffering area
Check with a screen design software.
A Extended function OS, optional function OS
B Second communication driver and onwards
C Special data
Check with a screen design software.
D Project data
Check with a screen design software.
E Buffering area
Check with a screen design software.
Operation memory
(RAM)
� Types and capacities of data and CF card selection
The data types and capacities are as shown in the table below.
A
B
C
E
D
a
A
B
C
D
E
a + B + C + D ≤ 15MB�2
Yes
�2 : Depending on the GOT main unit model.
GT16MM-MTBM, GT16 Handy: 15MB,
GT16MM-VNBM: 11MB
No
a + B + C ≤ 15MB�2
B
C
D
a
B
C
�Store in built-in flash
memory (drive C)
D
Operation memory
(RAM)
A
B
C
Check the total size of following data.
B
C
CF card necessary
Select CF card with
larger capacity
than D .
Yes
A + B + C + D + E
≤ 9MB�2
No
A + B + C + D ≤ 9MB�2 No
a + B + C + D
+standard monitor OS (12MB)�
� : When storing the extended function OS and optional function OS in the CF card (drive A), the standard
monitor OS (standard monitor OS, standard font, etc.) needs to be stored in the CF card (drive A).
� CF card and USB memory capacities
The CF card and USB memory capacities are as follows.
FAT16 format: max. 2GB, FAT32 format: max. 32GB.
(Boot OS and standard monitor OS of GT Designer3 Ver.1.17T or later must be installed in
order to use a CF card or USB memory with a capacity exceeding 2GB. Such CF cards and
USB memories cannot be used with GT Works2 / GT Designer2.)
B
C
D
Operation memory
(RAM)
B
C
D
Decompressing
data from ROM to
RAM for operation
D
A
B
Maximum 6MB
E
D
Maximum 6MB
Maximum 12MB
Necessity and capacity of the CF card depends on the data size.
Determine the necessity and capacity of the CF card according to the following flow chart.
Check the total size of following data.
�2: Depending on the GOT main unit
model.
GT15MM-MTBM: 9MB,
GT15MM-MNBM: 5MB
B
D
E
D + E
≤ 6MB
No
≤ 9MB
No
The project data size is
too large. Reduce
project data.
Yes
B
C
�Store in built-in flash
memory (drive C)
D
a + B + D
A
B
C
D
�Store in built-in flash
memory (drive C)
�Store in built-in flash
memory (drive C)
�Store in CF card
(drive A or B)
�Store in CF card
(drive A) (not on drive B)
CF card not necessary
CF card not necessary
CF card necessary
CF card necessary
�3: When storing the extended function OS and
optional function OS in the CF card (drive A), the
standard monitor OS (standard monitor OS,
standard font, first communication driver, etc.)
needs to be stored in the CF card (drive A).
B
Yes
A
A
a
Storage memory
(ROM)
A + B + C ≤ 9MB�2 No
Yes
Optional function board with
expansion memory is not
necessary.
A
The buffering area E is an area for storing resource data for the functions such as logging
and advanced alarms. It uses the operation memory (RAM). The data size differs
depending on the setting.
When the file save mode is specified in the screen design software, the accumulated
resource data is stored in the designated storage (drive A). (The storage memory (ROM) is
not used.)
Up to 6MB of the operation memory (RAM) can be used for the total of the project data D
and the buffering area E . If the total data size exceeds 6MB, it is necessary to reduce,
for instance, the project data size or delete unnecessary OS.
a
D
CF card necessary
E
Data size is too large.
Reduce project data or
delete unnecessary OS.
Yes
�Store in CF card (drive A)
(not on drive B)
Select CF card with
larger capacity than
D
A + B + C + D + E ≤ 57MB�1 No
No
a
Decompressing
data from ROM to
RAM for operation
D
As for the extended function OS and optional function OS, when decompressing the
compressed data a in the storage memory (ROM) to the operation memory (RAM), the
data size becomes larger as shown in A .
Up to 6MB of the operation memory (RAM) can be used for the total of the data A and the data B .
�1: Depending on the GOT main unit model.
GT15MM-MTBM: 57MB,
GT15MM-VNBM: 53MB
E
Optional function board with expansion memory
is necessary. Select Optional function board
with expansion memory with larger capacity
than A + B + C + D + E – 9MB�2
�Store in CF card
(drive A or B)
CF card not necessary
Check with a screen design software.
Select CF card with
larger capacity
than D .
Select CF card with
larger capacity than
A + B + C + D
+standard monitor OS
(6MB)�3
� CF card capacities
The CF card capacities are as follows. FAT16 format: max. 2GB, FAT32 format: not usable
Yes
a
B
D
�Store in built-in flash
memory (drive C)
CF card not necessary
a
B
�Store in built-in flash
memory (drive C)
D
OR
a
B
D
�Store in CF card (drive A)
�Store in CF card
(drive A)
CF card necessary
Select CF card with
larger capacity
than D .
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
a
Check with a screen design software.
E Buffering area
C
Yes
�Store in built-in flash
memory (drive C)
Check with Table B on page 84.
Specifications,
External Dimensions
Data size is too large.
Reduce project data or
delete unnecessary OS.
Yes
Data capacity
Capacity of "GT12(ROM)" in Table A on page 84
D Project data
B
D
Data type
function OS and optional function OS
a Extended
stored in ROM
B Communication driver
A
C
The data types and capacities are as shown in the table below.
150KB for each
Storage memory
(ROM)
B
The built-in flash memory is for "drive C". The CF card is for "drive A (standard)".
� Types and capacities of data and CF card selection
Capacity of "GT15" on Table A on page 84
Maximum 57MB
Necessity and capacity of the optional function board with expansion memory and the CF card
depends on the data size. Determine the necessity and capacity of the optional function board
with expansion memory and the CF card according to the following flow chart.
A
A + B + C + D + E ≤ 57MB�1 No
12MB
MELSEC Process
Control
�1 : Depending on the GOT main unit model.
GT16MM-MTBM, GT16 Handy: 57MB,
GT16MM-VNBM: 53MB
Check the total size of following data.
Decompressing
data from ROM to
RAM for operation
Capacity of "GT12(RAM)" in Table A on page 84
�1
Necessity and capacity of the CF card depends on the data size.
Determine the necessity and capacity of the CF card according to the following flow chart.
Operation memory
(RAM)
Extended by
CF card
function OS and optional function OS
A Extended
decompressed in RAM
Data capacity
The buffering area E is an area for storing resource data for the functions such as logging
and advanced alarms. It uses the operation memory (RAM). The data size differs depending
on the setting.
When the file save mode is specified in the screen design software, the accumulated
resource data is stored in the designated storage (drive A or B). (The storage memory
(ROM) is not used.)
If the size of data decompressed on the operation memory (RAM) exceeds 57MB�1, it is
necessary to reduce, for instance, the project data size or delete unnecessary OS components.
Maximum 57MB�1
Built-in flash memory
9MB
iQ Platform
Operation memory
(RAM)
(GT15-QFNBMM or GT15-MESB48M)
� : Differs depending on the GOT main unit model: GT15MM-MTBM: 9MB, GT15MM-VNBM: 5MB
Storage memory
(ROM)
The CF card capacities are as follows. FAT16 format: max. 2GB, FAT32 format: not usable
GT10
Capacity of "GT16(ROM)" in Table A on page 84
The GT12 has a 12MB operation memory (RAM) as a standard feature. The operation
memory is not extendable.
The extended function OS, optional function OS, and communication drivers occupy 6MB
of the operation memory (RAM). The remaining 6MB of the operation memory (RAM) is
used for the project data and the buffering area.
� CF card capacities
For Maintenance
Personnel
Extended by
CF card
function OS and optional function OS
a Extended
stored in ROM
As for the extended function OS and optional function OS, when decompressing the
compressed data a in the storage memory (ROM) to the operation memory (RAM), the
data size becomes larger as shown in A .
The buffering area E is an area for storing resource data for the functions such as logging
and advanced alarms. It uses the operation memory (RAM). The data size differs depending
on the setting.
When the file save mode is specified in the screen design software, the accumulated
resource data is stored in the designated storage (drive A or B). (The storage memory
(ROM) is not used.)
If the size of data decompressed on the operation memory (RAM) exceeds 57MB�1, it is
necessary to reduce, for instance, the project data size or delete unnecessary OS components.
Decompressing
Storage memory
a
B
C
D
data from ROM to
(ROM)
RAM for operation
82
Built-in flash memory
9MB�
The GOT operates by decompressing the OS and project data, which is stored in the
storage memory (ROM), into the operation memory (RAM).
The GT12 has a 9MB built-in flash memory for storage memory (ROM) as a standard
feature.
The CF card expands the memory capacity if the OS and project data exceeds 9MB.
Up to 6MB of project data can be stored in the storage memory (ROM) or a CF card. When
storing the project data to the storage memory (ROM), the maximum size of the project
data may be less than 6MB depending on the data size of the extended function OS,
optional function OS, and communication drivers.
For Initial Startup &
Operations
Built-in flash memory
15MB�
� Storage memory (ROM) and operation memory (RAM)
Since the following GOT models have a built-in optional function board (GT11-50FNB), it is
unnecessary to mount an optional function board to use optional functions shown in Table A .
• GT115M-QMBDA
• GT1155-QTBD
GT115M-QMBDQ
• GT115MHS-QMBD: Version B or later
• GT115M-QMBD: Version C or later
•
For Designers
The GOT operates by decompressing the OS and project data, which is stored in the
storage memory (ROM), into the operation memory (RAM). Since the GT16 compresses
some data before storing it in the storage memory (ROM), the data size becomes larger
when decompressed in the operation memory (RAM).
The GT16 has a 15MB� built-in flash memory for storage memory (ROM) as a standard feature.
The CF card expands the memory capacity if the OS and project data exceeds 15MB�.
The GT16 has a 57MB� operation memory (RAM) as a standard feature. The operation
memory is not extendable.
The built-in flash memory is for "drive C". The CF card is for "drive A (standard)" or "drive B
(extension)."
The optional function board is not required when using the optional functions or extended
functions.
Some functions, however, may require a CF card due to OS installation.
See below for details.
When using the GT11
� When using optional functions
INDEX
When using the following function, install the optional function board GT15-MESB48M.
• MES interface function
When using the following function, install the optional function board GT15-QFNBMM or GT15-MESB48M.
• SFC monitor function • Motion SFC monitor function
When using the following functions, install the optional function board GT15-QFNB(MM) or
GT15-MESB48M.
• Multi-channel function • Document display function
• MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor function
The following GOT requires no optional function boards when using optional functions
other than above.
• GT15: hardware version D or later
To activate the built-in optional function board in the GOT, it is necessary to install
the standard monitor OS on the GOT using GT Designer Version 2.55H or later.
Some functions, however, require an optional function board with expansion memory
(GT15-QFNBMM or GT15-MESB48M) and a CF card.
See below for details.
When using the MES interface function, install the optional function board GT16-MESB.
No optional boards are necessary when using other functions.
Some functions, however, may require a CF card due to OS installation.
See below for details.
Storage memory
(ROM)
When using the GT12
� When using optional functions & extended functions
CF card necessary
Select CF card with
larger capacity than
a + B + D
+standard monitor OS (6MB)�
� : When storing the extended function OS and optional function OS in the CF card (drive A), the standard
monitor OS (standard monitor OS, standard font, etc.) needs to be stored in the CF card (drive A).
� CF card capacities
The CF card capacities are as follows. FAT16 format: max. 2GB, FAT32 format: not usable
83
Notes for use
Table A Used capacity of extended functional OS and optional function OS
84
166
746
235
1104
200
800
400
2160
3175
1474
2016
�1
�1
�1
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
512
84
820
None
None
None
None
None
730
460
784
None
200
200
100
383
200
100
770
200
3882
1300
�2
�2
1280
1920
1280
1037
1248
1680
1221
3072
None
2774
�2
�2
710
100
1187
360
674
674
4170
1024
1024
770
370
80
100
70
210
77
50
340
100
1434
300
�2
�2
1280
1920
1280
1037
1248
1680
384
150
None
1242
�2
�2
380
70
310
180
342
342
590
542
542
390
210
None
200
100
437
100
100
None
200
None
1300
�2
�2
1280
1920
1280
1037
1248
1680
1218
2048
1223
2774
�2
�2
740
100
1241
360
523
592
1082
1058
1058
384
324
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
�1
None
None
None
None
None
�1
�1
None
None
�1
�2
�3
�4
�5
<Table 1>
GOT
GT157M-VN, GT1562-VN
Other than above
Necessary setting
· Set boot source of OS to "A: standard CF card."
· Memory extension (install optional function board with expansion memory)
· Memory extension (install optional function board with expansion memory)
For setting the boot source of the OS, see "GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual
(Fundamentals)."
�6 : To use the ladder editor, free space of 9950KB or more is necessary in the user area of the specified
drive for installing the extension function OS and optional function OS. The total capacity of the memory
necessary for using the ladder editor is 21212KB. For the above reasons, when using the ladder editor,
specify "A: Standard CF card" for the OS boot source, and mount an optional function board with a
memory capacity of 16MB or more.
�7 : To use the SFC monitor, it is necessary to install all of the GOT platform library, SFC monitor and GOT
function extension library.
�8 : To use the ladder editor, it is necessary to install all of the GOT platform library, ladder editor and GOT
function extension library.
�9 : The operation of the MES interface function uses 8218KB of the extended memory
(GT15-MESB48M(48MB)) of GT15's operation memory.
�10 : To use the motion SFC monitor, it is necessary to install all of the GOT platform library and motion SFC
monitor.
�11 : To use the motion SFC monitor, free space of 2577KB or more is necessary in the user area of the specified
drive for installing the extended function OS and optional function OS. The total capacity of the memory
necessary for using the motion SFC monitor is 12622KB. For the above reasons, mount an optional function
board with a memory capacity of 16MB or more.
�12 : The device name conversion library (extended function) is required when confirming the trigger device on the
GOT using the backup/restoration function and when outputting the device name using the operation log function.
�13 : Function usable with the GT12.
�14 : The GT12 user usage area is as follows. RAM: 500KB, ROM: 250KB
Up to
Up to
Up to
2 channels 4 channels 2 channels
Up to 4 channels
channels
<GT16 only>
• Ethernet connection is available for up to four channels.
Number of
mountable Up to 5 units Up to 3 units Up to 5 units
units
Up to
3 units
Number of
Up to
Up to 3 stages Up to 3 stages Up to 3 stages
mounting
3 stages
(2 slots)
(1 slot)
(2 slots)
stages
(1 slot)
3rd stage
When using GT15:
qBus connection, network connection �1, or Ethernet connection �3 + serial connection �2
wSerial connection �2
When using GT12:
qEthernet connection �3 + serial connection �2
wSerial connection �2
�1: The network connections include the following connection configurations.
• MELSECNET/H connection • MELSECNET/10 connection
• CC-Link IE Controller Network connection • CC-Link IE Field Network connection
• CC-Link connection (ID)
�2: The serial connections include the following connection configurations.
• CPU direct connection • Computer link connection • CC-Link connection (via G4)
• Microcomputer connection (serial) • Connection with third party PLCs (serial)
• Temperature controller connection • Inverter connection • Servo amplifier connection
• CNC connection (CPU direct connection) • GOT multi-drop connection
• MODBUS®/RTU connection • Robot controller connection (serial)
�3: The Ethernet connections include the following connection configurations.
• Ethernet connection • MODBUS®/TCP connection • Third party PLC connection (Ethernet)
• Robot controller connection (Ethernet) • CNC connection (Ethernet)
• Microcomputer connection (Ethernet)
84
(On GT16 Handy, no units can be mounted because it does not have
extension interface 1 or 2.)
Extension interface 2
(GT1655 and GT155M has the extension interface 1 only)
2nd stage
Up to 3 communication units and optional units can be mounted on each extension
interface.
1st stage
Mount a unit that occupies two slots on the first stage.
However, when any of the following units are used, mount the unit on the first stage,
then mount other units on the second and subsequent stages.
Unit occupying
two slots
Ex.: GT15-QBUS2
For GT16 (Only one of these units can be mounted on the GT16 except GT16MM-VNBM and GT1655)
�GT16M-V4, GT16M-R2, GT16-V4R1, GT16-ROUT, GT16M-MMR
For GT15 (Only one of these units can be mounted on the GT1585V and GT1575V)
�GT15V-75V4, GT15V-75R1, GT15V-75V4R1, GT15V-75ROUT
The following units must not be stacked on other units. Mount any of them on the first stage.
(Example: GT1685)
�GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
�GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, GT15-75J61BT13-Z (GT16 or GT155M cannot be used.)
Instructions for mounting and removing the GT15-CFCD
2 slots (1st stage)
are occupied.
�An extension unit cannot be mounted on a CF card unit.
When extension units are mounted, mount the CF card unit on the last stage.
Capacity (KB)
180
180
180
200
200
230
160
160
230
150
� Maximum number of connectable channels, mountable
units and mounting stages
(1) Number of connectable channels
The number of connectable channels varies depending on the GOT model.
See Table C on the following page.
(2) Number of mountable units and mounting stages
When the multi-channel function is used, add interfaces to the GOT using any of the
following methods.
(a) Stack communication units on the extension interface.
(b) Mount communication units on the extension interface to use the unit in
combination with the standard interface. The number of mountable units and
mounting stages vary depending on the GOT model. See Table C on the following
page.
�: The performance of GOT may be affected depending on the configuration of connected devices.
�: Up to two channels can be connected to the GT12.
�: No communication units can be mounted on the GT12.
� Optional function board
Not necessary when using the GT16 and GT12.
The GT15 requires an optional function board. Use the optional function board
GT15-QFNB(MM) or GT15-MESB48M. The GT15-FNB cannot be used.
� Communication driver
Extension interface 1
�When mounting a CF card unit on extension interface 1 (left), ensure that the number of
extension units mounted on extension interface 2 (right) is smaller than the number on the
extension interface 1 (left). Otherwise, the CF card cannot be inserted or removed.
�Remove the CF card unit in the designated direction (�PULL) to prevent damage to the connector.
Standard interface (built-in RS-232 interface)
The interface can establish a serial connection with connected devices and peripheral devices, such as a barcode reader.
Standard interface (built-in Ethernet interface) (GT16 only)
The interface can establish a connection with connected devices via Ethernet.
Standard interface (built-in RS-422/485 interface) (GT16 only)
A communication driver must be installed for each of the connection configurations.
For the GT16, the communication driver is installed in the user area.
For the GT15, communication drivers for the second and subsequent channels will be
installed in the user area.
For the GT12, the communication driver is installed in the system area.
The interface can establish a serial connection with connected devices.
Calculation of current consumed by units <GT16/GT15>
When using multiple units, a barcode reader, and a RFID controller, the total current consumed by the units, barcode reader and RFID
controller must be less than the current that can be supplied by the GOT. Design the system using the following values so that the total
current is within the range of the current supply capacity of the GOT.
(1) Current that can be supplied by the GOT (2) Current used by units, barcode reader and RFID controller
(3) Calculation example
GOT model
GT1695
GT1685
GT167M
GT166M
GT1655
GT1595
GT1585
(incl. GT1585V)
GT157M
(incl. GT1575V)
GT156M
GT155M
Current supply
capacity (A)
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
1.3
2.13
1.74
2.2
2.2
1.3
Unit model
GT15-QBUS
GT15-QBUS2
GT15-75QBUSL
GT15-75QBUS2L
GT15-ABUS
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-RS2-9P
GT15-RS4-9S
GT15-RS4-TE
GT15-RS2T4-9P
GT15-J71E71-100
GT15-J71GP23-SX
GT15-J71GF13-T2
GT15-J71LP23-25
GT15-J71BR13
GT15-J61BT13
Consumed
current (A)
0.275�1
0.12
0.29
0.33
0.3
0.098
0.224
1.07
0.96
0.56
0.77
0.56
Unit model
Barcode reader
GT15-PRN
GT16M-V4
GT15V-75V4
GT16M-R2
GT15V-75R1
GT16M-V4R1
GT15V-75V4R1
GT16M-ROUT
GT15V-75ROUT
GT16M-MMR
GT15-CFCD
GT15-CFEX-C08SET
GT15-SOUT
GT15-DIO
GT15-DIOR
RFID controller
Consumed
current (A)
�2
0.09
0.12 �1
0.2 �1
0 �1
0.2 �1
0.12 �1
0.2 �1
0.11 �1
0.11
0.27 �1
0.07
0.15
0.08
0.1
0.1
�2
�1 : This value is used for calculating the current consumption of multi-channel functions.
For the specifications of each unit, see the manual supplied with each unit.
�2 : When using a barcode reader or a RFID controller to which the power is supplied
from the standard interface, add the current to be used by the barcode reader or
RFID controller at 5VDC. (Maximum: less than 0.3A)
When GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (3 units), and
barcode reader (0.12A) are connected to a GT1695.
3rd stage
2nd stage
1st stage
GT15-RS4-9S
Serial connection [4ch]
GT15-RS4-9S
GT15-RS4-9S
Serial connection [2ch] Serial connection [3ch]
GT15-J71BR13
MELSECNET/H connection [1ch]
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
qBus connection or network connection �1 + serial connection �2
wBus connection or network connection �1 + Ethernet connection �3
eEthernet connection �3 + serial connection �2
rBus connection or network connection �1 + Ethernet connection �3 + serial connection �2
tSerial connection �2
yEthernet connection �3
� GT16 Handy can be connected only by methods e or y.
GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S and GT15-RS4-TE
GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13, GT15-J61BT13, GT15-J71GP23-SX
GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4, GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1, GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1, GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT, GT16M-MMR
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, GT15-75J61BT13-Z
Specifications,
External Dimensions
When using GT16:
�6 :
�7 :
�8 :
�9 :
See "External
dimensions" (page 61) and
"Mounting units on the
GOT side interface
<GT16/GT15>" (page 85).
Mounting units on the GOT interface <GT16/GT15>
To use the multi-channel function <GT16/GT15/GT12>
The following connection combinations can be used for the multi-channel function.
No units
can be
mounted
�4 : Ethernet download function, gateway function, MES interface function, file
transfer function (FTP client), remote personal computer function (Ethernet)
�5 : Barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer (remote personal
computer function [serial], FA transparent function, OS write, and project
data write), and printer (serial)
The multi-channel function is designed to connect and monitor multiple FA devices by mounting multiple communication units on a single GOT unit or by using the standard interface.
� Acceptable combinations
No units
can be
mounted
See "Calculation of
current consumed by units
< GT16/GT15>" (page 85).
MELSEC Process
Control
Communication driver name
Bus connection Q
A/QnA/L/QCPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24
Mitsubishi PLC,
MELSEC-FX
motion controller,
MELSECNET/H
robot controller,
CC-Link IE Controller Network
CNC
CC-Link IE Field Network
JTEKT Corporation TOYOPUC-PC
Third party PLC,
Ethernet (Yaskawa Electric Corporation)
motion controller
Microcomputer
Microcomputer connection, Ethernet (microcomputer)
Communication drivers other than above
No units
can be
mounted
(2)
Table B Capacity of GT16/GT12 communication driver
Units connected
No units
can be
mounted
The number of units that can be mounted on extension interfaces 1 and 2 of the GOT.
• More than one serial communication unit �6 of the same model can be mounted.
• Optional units are included in the number of units.
• RS-422 conversion units are not included in the number of units. (The RS-422
conversion unit cannot be used with GT1655 and GT155M.)
• It is necessary to calculate the total current consumed by the units to be mounted.
The number of mounting stages that units can be stacked on extension interfaces 1
and 2 of GOT.
• Units that occupy two slots �7 �8 must be mounted on the first stage.
• When any units in �8 are used, mount the unit on the first stage, then mount other
units on the second or subsequent stages.
• Units in �9 cannot be stacked on other units. Mount units on the first stage.
iQ Platform
512
292
860
292
50
420
Number of
(1) connectable
Description
<GT16/GT15/GT12>
The number of communication ports (communication units and interfaces) for use for communication on the GOT.
• Only one channel per one GOT can be connected in the bus connection (excluding GT12) and network connection.
• When the Ethernet interface built into the GOT (GT16/GT12) or the Ethernet communication unit (GT15) is used for
functions other than communication with the connected device �4, the interface is not included in the number of
connected channels.
• The number of channels does not include the interface used for connection with external devices. �5
GT10
298
607
Q motion monitor
390
770
None
524
Servo amplifier monitor
390
770
None
CNC monitor
588
390
770
None
GOT platform library
100 �5
77
200
None
SFC monitor
SFC monitor
1373 �5
442
2108
None
�7
GOT function extension library
4729 �5
4729
19381
None
Motion SFC GOT platform library
100 �11
77
200
None
monitor�10 Motion SFC monitor
2477 �11
1240
12522
None
GOT platform library
Ladder
100 �6
77
200
None
Ladder editor
editor
5121 �6
2567
8192
None
GOT function extension library
�8
4729 �6
4729
19381
None
Gateway (server, client)
100
50
100
None
Gateway (mail)
Gateway
100
50
100
None
Gateway (FTP server)�13
64
50
84
None
�9
MES interface
3196
1598
13461
None
: Requires installation of the optional function OS and extended function OS, but does not use the user area.
: Installation of the optional function OS is not required.
: It is necessary to specify the logging function and install the optional function OS (logging) in advance.
: Necessary when using the GOT project data that is automatically created by PX Developer (Ver. 1.15 or later).
For details, see "PX Developer Version 1 Operating Manual (GOT Screen Generator)(SH-080772ENG)."
: To use the SFC monitor, free space of 6202KB or more is necessary in the user area of the specified drive
for installing the extension function OS and optional function OS. The total capacity of the memory
necessary for using the SFC monitor is 14393KB. Due to the above, the setting shown in Table 1 is
necessary depending on the GOT to be used.
GT12
For Maintenance
Personnel
480
1074
5130
480
84
766
Optional functions
50
50
450
150
552
80
400
300
2160
3175
1474
2016
Handy
GT16
For Initial Startup &
Operations
Optional functions
84
166
692
235
1104
200
800
400
2160
3175
1474
2016
Function
For Designers
Barcode�13
RFID�13
System monitor�13
Report
Printer (PictBridge)
Printer (serial)
Device name conversion library�12 �14
Stroke font support function
Stroke basic font (Japanese)
Stroke
Stroke basic font (Japanese) (with Hangul)
font
Stroke basic font (Chinese: Simplified)
Stroke basic font (Chinese: Simplified) (with Hangul)
Video display
Video/RGB
RGB display
Multimedia
Remote personal computer operation (Ethernet)
Remote personal Video/RGB
computer
operation (serial) Remote personal computer operation (serial)
Backup/restoration�13
Operator
Operator authentication
authentication
USB mouse/keyboard function
Audio output
External I/O, operation panel
CNC data input/output
CNC data
input/output GOT platform library
Device data transfer
MELSEC-L troubleshooting function
SoftGOT-GOT link function
Log viewer function
File transfer function (FTP client)
Maintenance time notification
Multi-channel�13
Standard font (Chinese: Simplified)
Standard font (Chinese: Traditional)
Chinese
Standard font (Japanese)
region
Stroke font (Japanese)
Stroke font (Chinese: Simplified)
Stroke font (Chinese: Traditional)
Operation log
Document display
Kana-Kanji conversion
Kana-Kanji conversion (enhanced version)
Historical data list display�3 �13
Historical trend graph�3 �13
Logging�4 �13
Recipe�13
Advanced recipe
Object script�4
MELSEC-A ladder monitor
Ladder
MELSEC-FX ladder monitor
monitor
MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor
A list editor�13 MELSEC-A list editor
FX list editor�13 MELSEC-FX list editor
Intelligent unit monitor
Network monitor
GT1695/GT1685/
GT1595/GT1585/
GT1655
GT155M
GT167M/GT166M
GT157M/GT156M
User area size to be used (KB)
GT16/GT12�13
GT15
GT11
RAM
ROM
INDEX
Extended functions
Function
Table C Number of connectable channels, number of mountable units and number of mountable stages when the multi-channel function is used
User area size to be used (KB)
GT16/GT12�13
GT15
GT11
RAM
ROM
GT1695 main unit
Barcode reader
Current supply
capacity of GOT (A)
Total current to be consumed (A)
2.4
0.77+0.33+0.33+0.33+0.12=1.88
Since the total current is within the current supply capacity of
the GOT, the units can be used.
85
Notes for use
Warranty
MELSOFT GT Works3 (English version) operating environment
Item
PC
1 GHz or more recommended
512 MB or more recommended
1 GB or more recommended
Resolution XGA (1024 × 768 dots) or more
To install GT Designer3: 2 GB or more recommended
To run GT Designer3: 512 MB or more recommended
Display colors
High Color (16 bits) or more
GX Simulator
Version 5.00A or later
GX Works2
Version 5.40E or later
Version 1.24A or later
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty-six
(36) months after the date of purchase or delivery to a
designated place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the
maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the
longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be
forty-two (42) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts
shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
Version 1.12N or later
■Gratis Warranty Range
Free hard disk space✽1
Display colors
Hardware✽6
Software
Other
86
Version 1.24A or later
Version 1.30G or later
Description
With DOS/V personal computer
PC/AT compatible machine on which the
following OS operates
Specification
Item
With PC CPU module
CONTEC PC CPU unit
(PPC-852-212, PPC-852-217,
PPC-852-226)✽7
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional Service Pack 4 or later (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽2 ✽4
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional Service Pack 2 or later (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽3 ✽4 ✽9
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition Service Pack 2 or later (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽3 ✽4 ✽9
Microsoft® Windows® XP Embedded (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽3 ✽4 ✽8
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽3 ✽4 ✽9
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽3 ✽4 ✽9
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽3 ✽4 ✽9
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽3 ✽4 ✽9
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽3 ✽4 ✽9
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽3 ✽4 ✽12 ✽13 ✽14
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽3 ✽4 ✽12 ✽13 ✽14
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽3 ✽4 ✽12 ✽13 ✽14
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽3 ✽4 ✽13 ✽14
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Starter (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽3 ✽4 ✽9
Recommended: 1GHz or more
Other than Microsoft® Windows Vista®, Microsoft® Windows® 7: 512MB or more
Microsoft® Windows Vista®, Microsoft® Windows® 7: 1GB or more recommended
Resolution of VGA (640 × 480 dots) or more
For installation: 2GB or more recommended
For execution: 512MB or more recommended
High Color (16 bit) or more
GT15-SGTKEY-U (License key (for USB port))
GT15-SGTKEY-U (License key
GT15-SGTKEY-P (License key (for parallel port)) (for USB port))
When creating or editing project data
: GT Designer3✽5
When using with PX Developer
: PX Developer Version 1.14Q or later
GT Designer3 Version 1.01B or later
Mouse, keyboard, printer, CD-ROM drive, sound function (sound speaker), or speaker
Resolution
(dots)
Display colors
Memory capacity
Connection
configuration✽10
Description
640 × 480, 800 × 600, 1024 × 768,
1280 × 1024, 1600 × 1200
Specifiable resolution (640 to 1920 × 480
to 1200)
65,536 colors
57MB
Bus connection✽11, CPU direct connection,
computer link connection,
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection,
CC-Link IE Field Network connection,
MELSECNET connection, Ethernet connection
✽1 : Use of GT Designer3 and PX Developer requires additional memory
space. For free space required when using the PX Developer monitoring
tool, refer to the PX Developer Version1 Operation Manual (Monitor
Tool). Additional memory space is also required when using
user-created applications.
✽2 : Administrator authority is required to install GT SoftGOT1000.
✽3 : Administrator authority is required to install and operate GT
SoftGOT1000.
✽4 : The following functions are not supported.
• Compatibility Mode • Fast User Switching
• Desktop Theme (Font) Change • Remote Desktop
✽5 : GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000 must be installed from the same
GT Works3 suite.
✽6 : The PC must be equipped with a USB port to use the GT15-SGTKEY-U.
The PC must be equipped with a parallel port (Centro/printer connector)
to use the GT15-SGTKEY-P.
✽7 : For CONTEC PC CPU unit, refer to the manual for the PC CPU module.
✽8 : Use is possible only when PPC-852-226 is preinstalled.
✽9 : Supported only by the 32-bit OS.
✽10 : The required devices vary depending on the connection configuration.
✽11 : Connectable only when using a PC CPU unit.
✽12 : Windows XP Mode is not supported.
✽13 : Windows Touch features are not supported.
✽14 : The 32-bit OS and the 64-bit OS NEW are applicable.
Changes in product specifications
The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical
documents are subject to change without prior notice.
Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the
usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead
to a major accident even if any problem or fault should
occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that
backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided
outside of the device for any problem or fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed
and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc.
Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such
as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated
by respective power companies, and applications in which a
special quality assurance system is required, such as for
Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be
excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property that
could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical
applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned
transportation equipment for recreation and amusement,
and safety devices, shall also be excluded from the graphic
operation terminal range of applications.
However, in certain cases, some applications may be
possible, providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi
representative outlining the special requirements of the
project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to
the special circumstances, solely at our discretion.
In some of these cases, however, Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation may consider the possibility of an application,
provided that the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation of the intention, the application is clearly
defined and any special quality is not required.
List of Connectable
Models, etc.
Required memory
Display
Version 1.12N or later
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be
liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause
found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in
opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of
Mitsubishi products, special damages and secondary damages
whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and
compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi
products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site
equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
Specifications,
External Dimensions
CPU
Version 7.23Z or later
Exclusion of loss in opportunity and
secondary loss from warranty liability
MELSEC Process
Control
OS
Version 7.22Y or later
✽4 : Only the 32-bit OS is applicable.
✽5 : Windows XP Mode is not supported.
✽6 : Use GT Simulator3, GX Developer, GX Simulator, and GX Works2 of the same language version.
✽7 : The GOT-A900 cannot be simulated.
✽8 : May be required when the simulation function is used.
✽9 : Windows Touch features are not supported.
✽10 : The 32-bit OS and the 64-bit OS NEW are applicable.
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 (English version) operating environment
Personal computer
Version 1.24A or later
Mouse, keyboard, printer, CD-ROM drive, sound function (sound card)✽8 and loudspeakers✽8 used with the above OS
GOT1000 Series
✽1 : Installation requires administrator authority. Simulating the GOT-A900 requires administrator authority.
✽2 : Installation requires administrator authority. Using GT Works3 requires an account higher than the
standard user.
To use GT Works3 with another application, if an administrator account is used to run the application
then use an administrator account to run GT Works3.
Simulating the GOT-A900 requires administrator authority.
✽3 : The following functions are not supported:
Compatibility Mode, Fast User Switching, Desktop Theme (Font) Change, Remote Desktop
Item
Version 7.08J or later
(1) The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure
diagnosis unless otherwise specified.
If requested by the customer, Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the
primary failure diagnosis at the customer's expense.
The primary failure diagnosis will, however, be free of
charge should the cause of failure be attributable to
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
(2) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage
state, usage methods, usage environment, etc. which follow
the conditions, precautions, etc. given in the instruction
manual, user's manual, caution labels on the product, etc.
(3) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be
charged for in the following cases.
1Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling,
carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused
by the user's hardware or software design.
2Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the
product by the user.
3When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's
device, Failure that could have been avoided if
functions or structures, judged as necessary in the legal
safety measures the user's device is subject to or as
necessary by industry standards, had been provided.
4Failure that could have been avoided if consumable
parts designated in the user's manual etc. had been
correctly serviced or replaced.
5Replacing consumable parts such as the battery,
backlight and fuses.
6Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as
fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force
majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water
damage.
7Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific
technology standards at time of shipment from
Mitsubishi.
8Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of
Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local
overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA
Center may differ.
iQ Platform
Others
Applicable GOT
Version 6.00A or later
Version 7.20W or later
Version 6.10L or later
Version 6.20W or later
Overseas service
GT10
Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU,
Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU,
Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU
LCPU
Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU
(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven
(7) years after production of the product is discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with
Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after
production is discontinued.
For Maintenance
Personnel
Software
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the
responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product
within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at
no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service
Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas
location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the
customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible
for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that
involves replacement of the failed module.
■Gratis Warranty Term
Simulation on a PC requires the following software:
• GX Works2 version 1.12N or later✽6 or GX Simulator version 5.00A or later✽6.
✽The applicable software version of GX Works2 or GX Simulator varies depending on the PLC CPU to be simulated.
PLC CPU to be simulated
QCPU (A mode), ACPU, motion controller CPU (A series)
QnACPU
FX0 series, FX0N series, FX0S series, FX1 series, FX1N series, FX1NC series, FX1S series,
FX2 series, FX2C series, FX2N series, FX2NC series
QCPU (Q mode) (excluding Q00J, Q00, and Q01 CPUs)
Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU
Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU
FX3UC Series
FX3U Series✽7
FX3G Series✽7
Onerous repair term after discontinuation
of production
For Initial Startup &
Operations
Available hard
disk space
Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis
Warranty Range
For Designers
CPU
Required memory
Display
• Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽2✽3✽4
• Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽2✽3✽4
• Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽2✽3✽4
• Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽2✽3✽4
• Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽2✽3✽4
• Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽2✽3✽5✽9✽10
• Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽2✽3✽5✽9✽10
• Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽2✽3✽5✽9✽10
• Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽2✽3✽9✽10
• Microsoft® Windows® 7 Starter (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽2✽3✽4
INDEX
• Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
Service Pack 4 or later (English, Simplified Chinese,
Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽1
• Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Service Pack 2 or later (English, Simplified Chinese,
Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽1✽3✽4
• Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
Service Pack 2 or later (English, Simplified Chinese,
Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)✽1✽3✽4
OS
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
Details
PC/AT compatible machine on which the following OS operates
87
Support
MEMO
"Mitsubishi Global FA Centers" are located around the world in Asia, North
America and Europe to provide optimum services.
� Global FA Centers
Shanghai FA Center
Mitsubishi Electric Automation (CHINA) Ltd.
No.1386 Hongqiao Road, Mitsubishi Electric
Automation Center 3F, Shanghai, China
Tel: +86-21-2322-3030 / Fax: +86-21-2322-3000
Beijing FA Center
Mitsubishi Electric Automation (CHINA) Ltd. Beijing Office
9F, Office Tower 1, Henderson Centre, 18 Jianguomennei
Avenue, Dongcheng District, Beijing, China
Tel: +86-10-6518-8830 / Fax: +86-10-6518-3907
Tianjin FA Center
Mitsubishi Electric Automation (CHINA) Ltd. Tianjin Office
Unit 2003-2004B, Tianjin City Tower, No.35,
You Yi Road, HeXi District, Tianjin, China
Tel: +86-22-2813-1015 / Fax: +86-22-2813-1017
Guangzhou FA Center
Mitsubishi Electric Automation (CHINA) Ltd. Guangzhou Office
Rm. 1609, North Tower, The Hub Center, No.1068,
Xin Gang East Road, Haizhu District, Guangzhou, China
Tel: +86-20-8923-6730 / Fax: +86-20-8923-6715
Korean FA Center
Mitsubishi Electric Automation Korea Co., Ltd. (Service)
B1F, 2F, 1480-6, Gayang-Dong, Gangseo-Gu, Seoul,
157-200, Korea
Tel: +82-2-3660-9632 / Fax: +82-2-3663-0475
ASEAN FA Center
European FA Center
Mitsubishi Electric Asia Pte. Ltd. ASEAN Factory
Automation Centre
307 Alexandra Road #05-01/02, Mitsubishi Electric Building, Singapore
Tel: +65-6470-2480 / Fax: +65-6476-7439
India FA Center
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Polish Branch
ul. Krakowska 50, 32-083 Balice, Poland
Tel: +48-12-630-4700 / Fax: +48-12-630-4701
German FA Center
Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd. India Factory Automation Centre
2nd Floor, DLF Building No.9B, DLF Cyber City Phase #,
Gurgaon 122002, Haryana, India
Tel: +91-124-4630300 / Fax: +91-124-4630399
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. German Branch
Gothaer Strasse 8, D-40880 Ratingen, Germany
Tel: +49-2102-486-0 / Fax: +49-2102-486-1120
UK FA Center
Thailand FA Center
Mitsubishi Electric Automation (Thailand) Co., Ltd.
Bang-Chan Industrial Estate No.111, Soi Serithai 54,
T.Kannayao, A.Kannayao, Bangkok10230, Thailand
Tel: +66-2906-3238 / Fax: +66-2906-3239
North American FA Center
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. UK Branch.
Travellers Lane, Hatfield, Hertfordshire, AL10 8XB, U.K.
Tel: +44-1707-27-6100 / Fax: +44-1707-27-8695
Czech Republic FA Center
Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc.
500 Corporate Woods Parkway, Vernon Hills, IL 60061,
U.S.A.
Tel: +1-847-478-2100 / Fax: +1-847-478-2253
Brazil FA Center
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. -o.s. Czech Office
Avenir Business Park, Radicka 714/113a, 158 00
Praha5, Czech Republic
Tel: +420-251-551-470 / Fax: +420-251-551-471
Russian FA Center
MELCO-TEC Representacao Comercial e
Assessoria Tecnica Ltda.
Av. Paulista, 1439, Cerqueira Cesar, CEP 01311-200,
Sao Paulo, Brazil
Tel: +55-11-3146-2200 / Fax: +55-11-3146-2217
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Russian Branch
St. Petersburg Office
Sverdlovskaya emb., bld "Sch", BC "Benua", office 720;
195027, St. Petersburg, Russia
Tel: +7-812-633-3497 / Fax: +7-812-633-3499
Taiwan FA Center
Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd.
3F., No.105, Wugong 3rd, Wugu Dist, New Taipei City
24889, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: +886-2-2299-9917 / Fax: +886-2-2299-9963
Complying with international quality assurance standards
All of Mitsubishi Electric's FA component products have acquired the international quality assurance "ISO9001" and the environment
management system standard "ISO14001" certification. Mitsubishi's products also comply with various safety standards, including UL
standards.
<Safety standards>
Mark
Standards/Agency
<Shipping Standards>
Country/Region
Abbrev.
CE
EN Standards
Europe
ABS
UL
UL Standards
United States
BV
cUL
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
Canada
DNV
Name
American Bureau of Shipping
Country
United States
Bureau Veritas
France
Det Norske Veritas
Norway
GL
Germanischer Lloyd
Germany
LR
Lloyd's Register
England
NK
Nippon Kaiji Kyokai
RINA
Registro Italiano Navale
Japan
Italy
For the details on the approval model within each standards,
please contact your local sales office.
88
89
MEMO
MEMO
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Nagoya Works and Himeji Works are factories certified for ISO14001 (standards for environmental
management systems) and ISO9001 (standards for quality assurance management systems).
EC97J1113
90
EC97J1234
91
Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal
This catalog explains the typical features and functions of the GOT1000 series HMI and
does not provide restrictions and other information on usage and module combinations.
When using the products, always read the user's manuals of the products.
Mitsubishi will not be held liable for damage caused by factors found not to be the cause
of Mitsubishi; machine damage or lost profits caused by faults in the Mitsubishi products;
damage, secondary damage, accident compensation caused by special factors
unpredictable by Mitsubishi; damages to products other than Mitsubishi products; and to
other duties.
• To use the products given in this catalog properly, always read the related manuals
before starting to use them.
• The products within this catalog have been manufactured as general-purpose parts
for general industries and have not been designed or manufactured to be
incorporated into any devices or systems used in purpose related to human life.
• Before using any product for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power,
aerospace, medicine or passenger movement vehicles, consult with Mitsubishi.
• The products within this catalog have been manufactured under strict quality control.
However, when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if
the product fails, install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system.
Country/Region Sales office
Tel/Fax
USA
Mitsubishi Electric Automation Inc.
500 Corporate Woods Parkway, Vernon Hills, IL 60061, U.S.A.
Tel: +1-847-478-2100
Fax: +1-847-478-2253
Brazil
MELCO-TEC Representacao Comercial e Assessoria Tecnica Ltda.
Av. Paulista, 1439, Cerqueira Cesar, CEP 01311-200,
Sao Paulo, Brazil
Tel: +55-11-3146-2200
Fax: +55-11-3146-2217
Germany
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. German Branch
Gothaer Strasse 8, D-40880 Ratingen, Germany
Tel: +49-2102-486-0
Fax: +49-2102-486-1120
UK
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. UK Branch
Travellers Lane, Hatfield, Hertfordshire, AL10 8XB, U.K.
Tel: +44-1707-27-6100
Fax: +44-1707-27-8695
Italy
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Italian Branch
Viale Colleoni 7-20041 Agrate Brianza (Milano), Italy
Tel: +39-039-60531
Fax: +39-039-6053-312
Spain
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Spanish Branch
Ctra. de Rubí 76-80-AC.420,
E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés (Barcelona), Spain
Tel: +34-935-65-3131
Fax: +34-935-89-2948
France
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. French Branch
25, Boulevard des Bouvets, F-92741 Nanterre Cedex, France
Tel: +33-1-5568-5568
Fax: +33-1-5568-5757
Czech Republic Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. -o.s. Czech Office
Avenir Business Park, Radická 714/113a 158 00 Praha 5, Czech Republic
Tel: +420-251-551-470
Fax: +420-251-551-471
Poland
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Polish Branch
ul. Krakowska 50, 32-083 Balice, Poland
Tel: +48-12-630-47-00
Fax: +48-12-630-47-01
Russia
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Russian Branch Moscow Office
52, bld. 3, Kosmodamianskaya nab., RU-115054, Moscow, Russia
Tel: +7-495-721-2070
Fax: +7-495-721-2071
South Africa
Circuit Breaker Industries Ltd.
9 Derrick Road, Spartan, Gauteng PO Box 100, Kempton Park 1620, South Africa
Tel: +27-11-977-0770
Fax: +27-11-977-0761
China
Mitsubishi Electric Automation (China) Ltd.
No.1386 Hongqiao Road, Mitsubishi Electric Automation Center,
Shanghai, China
Tel: +86-21-2322-3030
Fax: +86-21-2322-3000
Taiwan
Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd.
6F., No.105, Wugong 3rd, Wugu Dist, New Taipei City 24889, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: +886-2-2299-2499
Fax: +886-2-2299-2509
Korea
Mitsubishi Electric Automation Korea Co., Ltd.
3F, 1480-6, Gayang-Dong, Gangseo-Gu, Seoul
157-200, Korea
Tel: +82-2-3660-9530
Fax: +82-2-3664-8372
Singapore
Mitsubishi Electric Asia Pte, Ltd.
307 Alexandra Road #05-01/02,
Mitsubishi Electric Building, Singapore
Tel: +65-6470-2480
Fax: +65-6476-7439
Thailand
Mitsubishi Electric Automation (Thailand) Co., Ltd.
Bang-Chan Industrial Estate No.111 Soi Serithai 54,
T.Kannayao, A.Kannayao, Bangkok 10230 Thailand
Tel: +66-2906-3238
Fax: +66-2906-3239
Indonesia
P.T. Autoteknindo Sumber Makmur
Muara Karang Selatan, Block A / Utara No.1 Kav. No.11,
Kawasan Industri Pergudangan, Jakarta- Utara 14440,
P.O. Box 5045, Indonesia
Tel: +62-21-663-0833
Fax: +62-21-663-0832
India
Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd.
2nd Floor, DLF Building No.9B, DLF Cyber City Phase III, Gurgaon 122002, Haryana, India
Tel: +91-124-4630300
Fax: +91-124-4630399
Australia
Mitsubishi Electric Australia Pty. Ltd.
348 Victoria Road, P.O. Box 11, Rydalmere, N.S.W. 2116, Australia
Tel: +61-2-9684-7777
Fax: +61-2-9684-7245
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BLDG., 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS: 1-14, YADA-MINAMI 5, HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA, JAPAN
L(NA)08054-H 1109(MDOC)
New publication, effective Sep. 2011
Specifications subject to change without notice.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement